Intermec CV60 Programmer's Manual
Anúncio
Anúncio
Programmer's Guide
TE 2000t 5250
Terminal Emulation
Intermec Technologies Corporation
Corporate Headquarters
6001 36th Ave. W.
Everett, WA 98203
U.S.A.
Technical Communications Department
550 Second Street SE
Cedar Rapids, IA 52401
U.S.A.
www.intermec.com
The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec.
Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation.
E 1992-2005 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved.
The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, CrossBar, Data Collection Browser, dcBrowser,
Duratherm, EasyCoder, EasyLAN, Enterprise Wireless LAN, EZBuilder, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), InterDriver, Intermec Printer Network Manager, IRL, JANUS, LabelShop, Mobile Framework,
MobileLAN, Nor*Ware, Pen*Key, Precision Print, PrintSet, RoutePower, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, UAP,
Universal Access Point, and Virtual Wedge are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec
Technologies Corporation.
Throughout this manual, trademarked names may be used. Rather than put a trademark (
™ or ®) symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement.
There are U.S. and foreign patents pending.
Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.
ii
TE 2000t 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Document Change Record
J
Revision
F
G
H
Date
04/2003
10/2003
04/2004
03/2005
Description of Change
Added 2435A functions. Revised direct connect port number. Added Define Origin option. Modified Error Tone. Added 700 Series information. Added Write Structured Field command. Added 2435A 48-key keypad information. Revised 5250 SIP keyboards. Added 2435A 31/32 column bar codes. Added Magnetic Card Reader external command.
Written for software version 7.26 or greater. Revised Barcode Parms information for 700
Series Computers. Revised Radio Comm information for Trakkar Antares terminals.
Added Allow Alias, Security Opts, and SIP Toggle parameters. Revised 700 Computer sereen size information. Added 5055 .NET, CK30 Handheld Computer, and CV60
Data Collection PC information. Expanded the Binary to EBCDIC table and added information about implementing color attributes.
Written for firmware version 7.39 or greater. Added screen sizes and bar codes to Trakker
Antares terminals. Corrected write structured field value for input commands and hex codes. Modified 248X, 700 Series, CK30, and CV60 screen size information. Added an option to the Scan Options parameter. Updated applicable parameters to include Session
3 and Session 4 for 700 Series and CV60 Terminals. Removed references to “5055
.NET” and changed “5055 DOS” references back to “5055.” Added screen captures of dialogs from the CV60 Terminal. Added Disconnect Val option to Radio Comm parameter.
Written for TE 2000 version 8.00 or greater. Added Lock Error Msg parameter to
Protocol Options. Updated the 700 Series Auxiliary Keys. Added two VT/ANSI protocol options, revised the 2475, 2481, and 2486 terminal screen sizes, and revised the Code
Page option in Chapter 4, “Using the Terminal Emulation Menus.” Added
TE_SETTINGS.INI settings and updated remapping information in Chapter 5,
“Customizing Your Configuration.” Changed “DCS 300” references to “Intermec
Application Server” and “CV60 Data Collection PC” references with “CV60 Vehicle
Mount Computer.” Added CK31 Handheld Computer information.
TE 2000t 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
iii
iv
TE 2000t 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Contents
Contents
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi xxi
Do not repair or adjust alone
First aid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resuscitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Energized equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi xxi xxi xxi xxii
Global Services and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Information
Web Support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Who Should Read this Guide?
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii xxii xxii xxiii xxiii xxiv
1
Getting Started
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Understanding Network Protocol Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Setting Up the Terminal and the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Starting the TE 2000 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Becoming Familiar With the TE 2000 5250 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Performing a Quick Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Configuring the TE 2000 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Unsupported Commands and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Program Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
2
Using Terminal Emulation Applications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Auto-Advancing through Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
v
Contents
Special Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roll Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Exit Key
Signal Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
5250 Serial Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
3
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2415 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415 Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415 Paging Keys
2415 Tab Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415 AID-Generating Keys
2415 Field Exit Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415 Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415 Special Control Keys
2415 Special Host Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
18
18
18
18
2425 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2425 Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2425 Paging Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2425 Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2425 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2425 Field Exit Key
2425 Signal Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2425 Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2425 Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2425 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2425 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
24
24
24
24
25
22
22
22
22
23
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
vi
Contents
2435A Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A Cursor Keys
2435A Paging Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A Field Exit Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
29
29
30
30
26
26
27
27
27
28
29
2455 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2455 Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2455 Paging Keys
2455 Tab Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2455 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2455 Field Exit Key
2455 Signal Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2455 Special Control Keys
2455 Special Host Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2455 5250 Additional Functions
2455 Auto-Login Restart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
31
31
31
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
2475 and 248X Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X Paging Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X Field Exit Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X 5250 Additional Functions
2475 and 248X Auto-Login Restart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
36
36
36
36
34
34
34
34
35
35
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
vii
Contents
6400 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the 41-Key Keyboard
6400 Cursor Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400 Paging Keys
6400 Tab Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400 Field Exit
6400 Signal Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400 Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400 Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
40
40
40
40
41
37
37
38
38
38
38
39
5020 Data Collection PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the 5020 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5020 Cursor Keys
5020 Paging Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5020 Standard Keys
5020 Tab Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5020 Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5020 Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5020 Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5020 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5020 Top-Row Function Keys
5020 Caps Lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5020 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
45
45
43
43
43
44
42
42
42
43
43
43
5055 Data Collection PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5055 Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5055 Paging Keys
5055 Tab Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5055 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5055 Field Exit Key
5055 Signal Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5055 Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5055 Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5055 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5055 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
49
49
49
49
49
46
46
46
47
47
48
viii TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Contents
59XX Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX Cursor Keys
59XX Paging Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX AID-Generating Keys
59XX Field Exit Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX 5250 Additional Functions
59XX Auto-Login Restart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
53
53
53
53
50
50
50
51
51
52
52
17XX Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37-Key Keyboard
17XX Cursor Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17XX Paging Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17XX Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17XX AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17XX Field Exit Key
17XX Signal Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17XX Special Control Keys
17XX Special Host Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17XX 5250 Additional Functions
17XX Auto-Login Restart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
57
57
57
57
58
54
54
55
55
55
55
56
11XX Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11XX Cursor Keys
11XX Paging Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11XX Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11XX AID-Generating Keys
11XX Field Exit Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11XX Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11XX Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11XX Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11XX 5250 Additional Functions
11XX Auto-Login Restart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
62
62
62
62
59
59
59
60
60
61
61
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
ix
x
Contents
700 Series Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Software Input Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Paging Keys
700 Series Standard Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Editing Keys
700 Series Auxiliary Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Field Exit Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
68
69
69
69
63
63
64
64
64
65
67
69
69
70
CK30 Handheld Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK30 Cursor Keys
CK30 Paging Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK30 Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK30 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK30 Field Exit Key
CK30 Signal Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK30 Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK30 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK30 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK30 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
72
72
73
73
74
75
75
75
75
76
76
CK31 Handheld Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK31 Cursor Keys
CK31 Paging Keys
CK31 Tab Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK31 AID-Generating Keys
CK30 Field Exit Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK31 Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK31 Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK31 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK31 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK31 5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
79
80
80
80
80
80
77
77
77
78
78
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Contents
CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV60 Software Input Panels
CV60 Keyboard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV60 Cursor Keys
CV60 Paging Keys
CV60 Tab Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV60 AID-Generating Keys
CV60 Field Exit Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV60 Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV60 Special Control Keys
CV60 Special Host Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV60 5250 Additional Functions
CV60 Auto-Login Restart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
86
86
86
86
86
87
81
81
81
83
83
83
84
4
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y (“Yes”) Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up and Down Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number Keys [0] through [9] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Position 0
Display Position 1
Display Position 2
Display Position 3
Display Position 4
Display Position 5
Display Position 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Positions 1 through 3
Display Positions 4 and 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Positions 4 through 6
Display Positions 4 through 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Positions 5 through 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Menus (700 Series, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
91
92
93
93
94
94
94
95
92
92
92
93
93
93
93
97
90
90
90
90
Configuring TE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Sequence to Open Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
98
99
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Menus
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Menus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
101
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
xi
Contents
1) Set-up Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1) LCD Contrast (59XX, 17XX)
2) Screen Size (blank for 2480, 2485)
3) Screen Mode
6) Key Uppercase
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4) Annunciators (Blank for 17XX, 11XX)
5) Backlight (59XX, 17XX)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7) Scroll Window (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055,
59XX, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7) More (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3) Beeper Setup (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, CK30, CK31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4) Tests
1) Key Click (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
2) Error Tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3) Beeper Select (6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
1) Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2) Barcode Parms (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020) . . . . . . . . .
2) Barcode Parms (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31,
CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3) Protocol Opts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4) Display Opts (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020, 6400,
105
114
115
121
59XX, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4) Display Opts (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
137
5) Radio Comm (Blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, and for 2415,
2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals without either an 802.1x Supplicant Radio Driver or UDP Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
6) Cold Start (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX,
17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6) Exit TE2000 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
143
7) More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2) LCD Parms (Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
145
145
146
153
154
155
155
155
156
161
161
163
163
164
1) Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2) Converters (59XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3) Memory View (6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4) Packet Driver (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5) Numbers (blank for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6) Timed Numbers (blank for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . .
5) Version Info (Information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6) Exit Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
164
167
168
168
169
169
169
170
7) More (Main Menu 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
1) Keyboard Opts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2) Save Parms (Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
171
3) Cloning Opts (59XX, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
4) Session Menu (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X with WTP, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60 with TCP/IP, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX,
11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
Restarting Terminal Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
xii
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Contents
6400 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Exit Emulation Mode and Return to DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
177
178
5055 Data Collection PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programs to Create Terminal Emulation Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Exit Emulation Mode and Return to DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
178
179
179
5
Customizing Your Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
Using the Auto-Login Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Developing Auto-Login Script Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading the Auto-Login Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals
5020 Data Collection PC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400, 5055 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals
Disabling the Auto-Login Feature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400, 5055 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Auto-Login Script Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182
182
182
183
184
184
185
185
186
186
187
187
188
188
188
188
189
191
Displaying Double-Byte Characters
700 Series Terminals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CK30 Handheld Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
192
193
Creating a Custom Parameter Set-Up File
CONFIG.DAT Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIG.DAT Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIG.DAT Parameter Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying Your CONFIG.DAT Configuration
CONFIG.DAT Parameters and Qualifiers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TE_SETTINGS.INI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrading from CONFIG.DAT Configuration
TE_SETTINGS.INI Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TE_SETTINGS.INI Parameter Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TE_SETTINGS.INI Parameters and Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
194
194
195
196
196
217
217
218
218
219
Changing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
Preinitializing the 5250 TE Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
xiii
Contents
Remapping the Terminal’s Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remapping a Key or Two-Key Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Macro
Nesting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remapping Keys for Each Session
Key Code Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
234
235
236
236
236
Remapping Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
Implementing ITCCOLOR.DAT Attribute Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
Customizing 5250 EBCDIC to ASCII Translation
ASCII to EBCDIC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EBCDIC to ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
244
245
Substituting National Characters
Creating the File
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
246
246
248
Downloading Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6400, 5055 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reprogramming Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites for INTERLNK Flash Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERLNK Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERLNK and INTERSVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using CHECKCFG to Compile and Decompile Custom Configurations . . . . . . . . . .
Converting Files from ASCII to Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting Files from Binary to ASCII
Listing Parameters and Values
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using FLSHCONV.EXE to Build Customized HEX Files
Locating and Appending .EXE Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appending Data Files To Intel-Hex Files
Downloading a Hex File
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
251
251
252
252
252
252
253
253
253
254
254
254
254
255
256
256
6
Display Data Stream
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
257
Screen Design Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
Data Stream Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Commands and Hex Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Commands and Hex Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
259
259
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
xiv
Contents
Input Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Immediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Modified Immediate Alternate
Read Input Fields
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read MDT Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read MDT Alternate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Screen (Immediate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Screen (Immediate)
Write Structured Field
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
260
261
262
264
266
267
268
269
Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Format Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore Screen
Roll
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write to Display (WTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
271
272
273
274
276
278
Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Cursor (IC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move Cursor (MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat to Address (RA)
Set Buffer Address (SBA)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start of Field (SF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format Portions of SF Order
Control Portions of SF Order
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Portions of SF Order
Start of Header (SOH)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transparent Data (TD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
290
290
292
294
Asynchronous 5250 Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
System Messages and Parameter Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
7
Extended Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
299
Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port (#F)
Flow Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return AID Key Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Codes for Transmit and Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Transmit and Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300
302
303
304
305
Transmit Only On RS-232 Port (#P)
Flow Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Codes for Transmit Only
Example of Transmit Only
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
307
308
309
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
xv
Contents
Receive Only On RS-232 Port (#G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Codes for Receive Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Receive Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310
311
312
Set Parameters (#H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Codes for Set Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Set Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
314
315
Return Version (#V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
316
Tone (#T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
317
Scan (#S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC Byte 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC Byte 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bar Code Length
UPC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EAN Algorithms
Code 39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code 11
Code 93
Code 128
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Codes for Scan Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Scan Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
319
321
322
322
323
323
324
325
326
326
326
327
327
328
328
329
Get Optical Inputs (#I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330
Relay (Set, Reset, Read) Commands (#R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
Magnetic Card Reader (#M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Codes for Magnetic Card Reader
Magnetic Card Reader CAB File
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
333
333
334
334
xvi TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Contents
A
Bar Code Scanning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
DK, Display Column Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2415 and 2425 Terminal Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Columns
12 Columns
17 Columns
20 Columns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22 Columns
26 Columns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2435A Terminal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 or 10 Columns
12 Columns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 or 20 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31 or 32 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2455 Terminal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 Columns
33 Columns
40 Columns
53 Columns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2475 and 248X Terminal Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Columns
12 Columns
17 Columns
20 Columns
22 Columns
26 Columns
32 Columns
40 Columns
53 Columns
64 Columns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
336
336
336
336
337
338
338
339
340
340
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
349
349
350
351
351
352
353
353
353
353
347
347
348
348
348
349
Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
Paging Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
355
AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
355
Field Exit Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
358
Signal Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
359
Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
359
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
xvii
Contents
Special Host Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360
5250 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360
Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
361
Encoded Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Escape Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
361
363
363
B
Bar Code Symbologies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
Bar Code Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
366
UPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368
Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368
Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368
Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
370
Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
370
I 2 of 5 (Interleaved) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372
S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372
Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
373
MSI Code (Variant of Plessey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
373
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
xviii
Contents
C
Conversion Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
375
Decimal to Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
376
Binary to EBCDIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
379
I
D
Terminal Font Set Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
383
Index
General Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
394
Files Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
422
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
xix
Contents xx TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information.
Safety Summary
Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec
R equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions.
Do not repair or adjust alone
Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circumstances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present for your safety.
First aid
Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury.
Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems.
Resuscitation
Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing.
Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage, you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods.
Energized equipment
Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shock from energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform authorized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you comply strictly with approved safety regulations.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
xxi
Before You Begin
Safety Icons
This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this manual. You may also see icons that tell you when to follow ESD procedures and when to take special precautions for handling optical parts.
A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment.
Avertissement: Un avertissement vous avertit d’une procédure de fonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit
être strictement respecté pour éviter l’occurrence de mort ou de blessures graves aux personnes manupulant l’équipement.
A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data.
Attention: Une précaution vous avertit d’une procédure de fonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit
être strictement respecté pour empêcher l’endommagement ou la destruction de l’équipement, ou l’altération ou la perte de données.
Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances.
Global Services and Support
Warranty Information
To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support. The Intermec
Global Sales & Service page appears. From the Service & Support menu, move your pointer over Support, and then click Warranty.
Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided “as is with all faults.” All warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Web Support
Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor.
Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product.
xxii TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Before You Begin
Telephone Support
These services are available from Intermec Technologies Corporation.
Service
Factory Repair and
On-site Repair
Technical Support
Service Contract
Status
Schedule Site Surveys or Installations
Ordering Products
Description
Request a return authorization number for authorized service center repair, or request an on-site repair technician.
Get technical support on your
Intermec product.
Inquire about an existing contract, renew a contract, or ask invoicing questions.
Schedule a site survey, or request a product or system installation.
Talk to sales administration, place an order, or check the status of your order.
In the U.S.A. and Canada call 1-800-755-5505 and choose this option
1
2
3
4
5
Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click Contact.
Who Should Read this Guide?
This guide provides you with information about the TE 2000 5250 terminal emulation application, and how to install, configure, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot the application.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
xxiii
Before You Begin
Related Documents
This table contains a list of related Intermec documents and part numbers.
Manual
1100 Series Data Terminal User’s Guide
5020 Data Collection PC User’s Manual
5055 Data Collection PC User’s Guide
5900 Series User’s Guide
700 Series Color Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
700 Series Monochrome Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide
700 Series Monochrome Mobile Computer User’s Manual
The Bar Code Book
CK30 Handheld Computer User’s Manual
CK31 Handheld Computer User’s Manual
CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer User’s Guide
EZBuilder Getting Started Guide
EZBuilder Tutorial
Intermec Application Server User’s Guide
MobileLANtaccess 21xx System Manual
Native Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
PEN*KEY Model 6400 User’s Guide
RT1700 Radio Terminal User’s Guide
TE 2000 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
TE 2000 VT/ANSI Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
TRAKKER Antares 241X Hand-Held Terminal User’s Manual
TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand-Held Terminal User’s Manual
TRAKKER Antares 243X Hand-Held Terminal User’s Manual
TRAKKER Antares 2455 Vehicle Mount Terminal User’s Manual
TRAKKER Antares 2475 Vehicle-Mount Terminal User’s Manual
TRAKKER Antares 248X Stationary Terminal User’s Manual
TRAKKER Antares Application Development Tools System Manual
TRAKKER Antares Optical Link Adapter Quick Reference Guide
TRAKKER Antares TD2400 Communications Dock Quick Reference Guide
TRAKKER Antares TD2410 Communications Dock Quick Reference Guide
The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains our documents that you can download in PDF format.
To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local
Intermec representative or distributor.
Part #
072242
067150
977-055-006
961-047-098
961-047-068
977-055-003
977-055-005
069538
064024
071791-001
067358
072383
066960
064433
065826
065555
069552
961-047-069
068975-002
961-054-017
961-047-121
962-054-053
961-054-031
962-054-061
961-054-032
051241
073528
075205
961-054-033
066450
066449
xxiv TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
1
Getting Started
This chapter introduces the TE 2000t 5250 application.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
1
2
Chapter 1
—
Getting Started
Understanding Network Protocol Options
TE 2000 applications for the Enterprise Wireless LANt system use one of the following network protocol options:
S UDP Plus
The terminal communicates with the host computer through the
Intermec
R
Application Server and an access point.
S TCP/IP
The terminal communicates through an Intermec access point, which is directly connected to the host computer on an Ethernet or a token ring network.
S WTP
The terminal communicates with the host computer through the Intermec Application Server, Intermec access point, or other Intermec gateways.
For network configuration options, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
Setting Up the Terminal and the Network
Before you can start using the TE 2000 application on your terminal, you need to do the following:
1 Set up your terminal.
Set-up includes charging and installing the battery pack and turning on the terminal for the first time. For instructions, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
Note: Battery packs do not apply to all terminals. Vehicle mount and stationary terminals are powered via an external source.
2
Configure your terminal and the network.
To use RF communications on the terminal, you need to:
a
Configure the Intermec Application Server (UDP Plus or WTP), other Intermec gateways (WTP), or host (TCP/IP).
b
Configure the access point. This does not apply to the 2480/2481 Ter-
minal, which contains an Ethernet NIC instead of a radio.
c
Configure the network parameters on the terminal.
For instructions, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
3
Verify that your terminal is communicating correctly with the access point, Intermec Application Server, or host.
To verify that your terminal is communicating correctly, refer to the terminal’s user manual for instructions.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 1
—
Getting Started
Starting the TE 2000 Application
You are ready to start your application once the terminal is set up, the terminal and the network are configured, and communications are established with the gateway and access point or host.
To start your application:
Turn on the terminal. Wait a few seconds while the initialization screens
(below) clear and the application starts.
COPR. 1991-2005
INTERMEC. ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED
V<version number>
<release date>
TE 2000(TM)
<program name> <version>
Host: <host name>
<emulation type>
<program name> <version>
<emulation type>
Host: <host name>
<program name> <version>
Session: <current session number>
<session name>
<emulation type>
Host: <host name>
<device name>
For Version 7.26 or greater For Version 8.00 or greater
Note: If your application does not start after a few seconds, you may not have configured the terminal correctly. For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
You can now do one of the following:
S Become familiar with TE 2000 5250 if you have not previously used it.
S Perform a quick configuration.
S Configure your TE 2000 application.
S Customize your TE 2000 application.
Becoming Familiar With the TE 2000 5250 Application
If you have not previously used the TE 2000 5250 application, see Chapter 2, “Using Terminal Emulation Applications,” to understand 5250 commands. See Chapter 3, “Using the Terminal’s Keyboard,” to become familiar with your terminal’s keyboard and the keys you need to press to perform
5250 commands.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
3
Chapter 1
—
Getting Started
4
Performing a Quick Configuration
Note: For Terminal Emulation Version 6.60 or greater, the default data stream is “VT/ANSI.”
1
Change the data stream to “5250.” The default data stream is “Native” for the 6400 (WTP), 5055 (WTP), 11XX, 17XX, and 59XX Terminals.
The default data stream for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, and IP terminals is “3270.”
a
Access the terminal emulation configuration menus by pressing the following keys, then choose 1) Set-up Parms from the Main Menu.
Terminal
2415
2425
2435A
2455, 2475, 248X
6400
5055
59XX
17XX, 11XX
Key Sequence
) !
(55-key keyboard)
( 5
(37-key keyboard)
( !
r l
(57-key keyboard)
Green
>
, Orange
>
(48-key keyboard)
r l
(39-key function numeric keyboard)
( ¡
[Gold] [Blue]
[Blue] [M] or [ALT] [M]
[Brown] [Space]
[Gold] [Black]
Note: Press a number to select a menu option, then press [Enter] to return to a previous menu.
b
At the Enter Password prompt, enter “cr52401.”
On 17XX (37-key) Terminals, the password is: F12 F11 5 2 4 0 1
c
From the Set-up Parms menu, select 3) Protocol Opts,
2) Data Stream, then 3) 5250.
2
Extended commands transmit or receive data over the terminal’s
RS-232 port, send information to an RS-232 device, or collect data. Enable the Extended Cmds option if your host computer is configured to send extended commands to the terminal. It is disabled by default.
From the Protocol Opts menu, select 3) Extended Cmds, then
1) Enabled.
3
From the Main Menu, select 7) More, then 2) Save Parms.
4
At the Enter Password prompt, type “cr52401,” then press enter.
On 17XX (37-key) Terminals, the password is: F12 F11 5 2 4 0 1
5
From the Main Menu, select 6) Exit Menus.
Note: For WTP devices, you should also set a terminal number.
6
Log in to a TE session, then use the terminal to collect/transmit data.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 1
—
Getting Started
Configuring the TE 2000 Application
You can use the terminal’s TE 2000 configuration menus to configure site-specific operational parameters, including UDP Plus, WTP, or TCP/
IP communications, terminal emulation options, and the Main Menu password. For information about configuring the terminal, see Chapter 4,
“Using the Terminal Emulation Menus.”
Using Advanced Features
You can customize the standard TE 2000 program to do the following:
For more information, see Chapter 5, “Customizing Your Configuration.”
S Use the auto-login feature to send the same login information each time you login to the host.
S Display double-byte characters.
S Create a custom parameter set-up file.
S Change the text of terminal emulation configuration menus or system messages.
S Preinitialize the TE 2000 5250 terminal emulation program
Unsupported Commands and Functions
The TE 2000 application for the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and
248X Terminals does not support the following commands and functions, which were supported in previous versions.
End (viewport)
Erase Field
Erase Last Word
Moved the window/viewport to the end of the last line displayed on the TE screen.
Erased all characters in the field where the cursor was positioned.
Erased all characters from the cursor back to the start of a word or a space on the screen.
Fast Cursor Right or Left Moved the cursor two positions to the right or left rather than one.
Home (viewport) Moved the window or viewport to the top left corner of the
TE screen.
Reshow
Status
Status line messages
Resent a screen image from the locally maintained host buffer to refresh the terminal screen.
Toggled the terminal’s screen between the status line display and the normal field input display.
Reported the operating status of the terminal and host system.
If you scan the bar code for an unsupported command, the bar code data is read into the terminal. If you press the key sequence for the command, the sequence is ignored.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
5
Chapter 1
—
Getting Started
The TE 2000 application does not support the following 5250 commands:
Alternate cursor Allows selection of either the bar-type or block-type cursor.
Display cursor location Displays the cursor location.
Display Mode Allows the operator to adjust the display to his or her preference. To adjust the terminal’s display, refer to the terminal’s user manual.
Test Request Accesses diagnostic routines.
Also note that Trakker Antares terminals with UDP Plus or TCP allow only one session per terminal. Dual sessions are not supported.
6 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 1
—
Getting Started
Program Names
The following chart lists TE 2000 options and program names.
Note: The TE 2000 application does not support SST (Spread Spectrum
Transmission) or regular UHF. “S-UHF” is synthesized UHF.
Model Option
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/WTP/802.11
TE/UDP Plus/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/UDP Plus/802.11
TE/IP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/IP/802.11
6400
5020
5055
59XX
TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/WTP/802.11
TE/WTP/900 MHz Falcon
TE/IP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/IP/802.11
TE/UDP Plus/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/UDP Plus/802.11
TE/IP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/IP/802.11
TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/WTP/802.11
TE/IP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/IP/802.11
TE/WTP
TE/WTP
TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/WTP/900 MHz Falcon
TE/WTP/S-UHF
17XX
11XX
700 Series
CK30, CK31
CV60
TE/WTP
TE/WTP
TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/WTP/900 MHz Falcon
TE/WTP/S-UHF
TE/WTP
TE/WTP
TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir
TE/WTP/900 MHz Falcon
TE/WTP/S-UHF
TE/IP/802.11
TE/IP/802.11
TE/UDP Plus/802.11
TE/IP/802.11
Program Name
FWP240H0
51-key keyboard 41-key keyboard
FWP640H0 FWP640H4
FWP640H0 FWP640H4
FWP640H0
FWP64TH0
FWP64TH0
FWP640H4
FWP64TH4
FWP64TH4
FWP502H0
FWP650H0
FWP650H0
FWP65TH0
FWP65TH0
FWP592H0
FWP594H0
FWP598H0
FWP596H0
FWP591H1
57-key keyboard 37-key keyboard
FWP170H0
FWP174H0
FWP170H3
FWP174H3
FWP178H0
FWP176H0
FWP171H0
FWP178H3
FWP176H3
FWP171H3
FWP110H0
FWP114H0
FWP118H0
FWP116H0
FWP111H0
FWP700H0
FWPCK3H0
FWPCV6H0
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
7
Chapter 1
—
Getting Started
8 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
2
Using Terminal Emulation
Applications
This chapter describes how to use the TE 2000t 5250 application for your particular terminal. For this application, Intermec Technologies emulates an IBM-5291-1 terminal. If a double-byte CAB file is installed or a localized operating system is running for a double-byte country, then the
IBM-5555-B01 terminal is emulated.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
9
Chapter 2
—
Using Terminal Emulation Applications
Annunciators
The terminal’s display reserves a location for annunciators (icons) that help you monitor RF and network communications, or alert you of a condition that requires action. Following are TE 2000 5250 annunciators.
S
X
Input inhibited
The keyboard has accepted enough information for the defined input field. The “key-ahead” feature stores keystrokes after the “input inhibited” annunciator appears. These are saved for the next field.
S
S
Insert mode
The keyboard inserts characters instead of overwriting them.
M
Message waiting
The host has a message waiting for the operator.
For information about annunciators that indicate battery condition and general operational status, refer to the terminal’s user manual.
Auto-Advancing through Fields
You can set up your Trakker Antares
R terminal to auto-advance through the fields on a 5250 TE screen. When you scan data into a field on a 5250
TE screen, a Field Exit command clears the rest of the field, advances to the next field, and triggers an auto-enter field to send an ENTER to the application and submit the data. You can just scan data and never touch the keyboard.
To set this up, you need to disable Auto Tab Scan in the TE configuration menus, and set the Postamble command to the 5250 Field Exit code.
There are three ways to configure the Postamble command:
S Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System.
S Download Postamble command from the Intermec
R to one or more terminals using UDP Plus protocol.
Application Server
S Download the Postamble command from a host using the TCP/IP direct connect protocol.
The first two configuration methods are listed in this chapter. The third method involves creating an application and then downloading the application to the terminals. For help creating the application, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
The 5250 Field Exit code is a character in the extended ASCII character set. The terminal supports the full and extended ASCII character sets. For a list of the full and extended ASCII characters, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
Note: You can also configure the postamble by scanning the Postamble command. However, you cannot scan in extended ASCII characters like the 5250 Field Exit code.
10 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 2
—
Using Terminal Emulation Applications
To disable Auto Tab Scan:
1
Configure the Auto Tab Scan setting to Disable. For help, see Chapter
4, “Using the Terminal Emulation Menus.”
With the Auto Tab Scan feature disabled, the terminal functions as if the field has a mandatory field exit turned on (an AS/400 activated feature known as Check FE). As a result, legacy AS/400 applications do not have to be modified to turn this field on properly for bar code support.
The default is Auto Tab Scan disabled.
2
Save your new TE configuration.
To add Field Exit to the postamble via Trakker Antares 2500 Menu System:
1
Access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System. For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
2
From the Main Menu, choose Configuration Menu > Terminal Menu
> Preamble/Postamble.
3
Move the cursor to the postamble field.
4
Type \x9A for the literal Field Exit code.
5
Press ; or choose OK to save your changes and exit the screen.
6
Exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System and save your new configuration to flash memory. For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
To download Field Exit as a postamble from the Intermec Application Server:
Configure the postamble to the Field Exit’s literal value using the download server on the Intermec Application Server. Use the download server on the Intermec Application Server:to configure one or more terminals in the network.
1
In the download server on the Intermec Application Server: select the terminal or group to receive the Postamble (AE) configuration command. For help on configuring a group of terminals, refer to the Inter-
mec Application Server User’s Guide (P/N: 072242).
You can continue running the 5250 TE application on the terminal while configuring a terminal from the Intermec Application Server.
2
Choose the option to enter a command.
3
Type the string $+AE and then enter the ASCII code 154 by holding down the Alt key while typing 154 on the numeric keypad. You should see an Ü to represent the literal Field Exit code in the edit box, which now shows this command and value: $+AEÜ
4
Download the commands to change the runtime configuration of the terminals selected. The changes are saved in RAM, but not in flash memory.
5
To save the configuration change in flash memory, download this command: .+1
You can also use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to save the configuration in flash memory. Refer to the terminal’s user manual.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
11
Chapter 2
—
Using Terminal Emulation Applications
You can set the postamble or preamble to any character from the extended
ASCII character set using these instructions. Type the literal ASCII value in step 3 instead of the Field Exit code. To set the preamble, use the syntax $+AD instead of $+AE. For more information about screen modes, see
Chapter 4, “Using the Terminal Emulation Menus.”
Special Function Keys
Special function keys are:
S Attention Identification (AID) keys
S Cursor movement keys
S Signal keys
S Field Exit key
S Special control keys
S Special host keys
To enter a special function key:
Press the keys listed in the chapter for the terminal. Or, scan the bar code in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning.”
The following pages describe the special functions keys. For complete descriptions, refer to the appropriate IBM 5250 reference manual.
AID-Generating Keys
AID-generating keys generate AID codes that go in the display data stream to the host system. They alert the host system that the Intermec Application Server or controller requires some action.
The terminal emulates all of the AID-generating keys on a 5291 Display
Station. The following lists the keys.
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1–F24
Help (nonerror state)
The system environment determines the results of this key. If the terminal is in session, [CLEAR] issues the AID code hex BD, which requests the host system issue a
Clear Unit command to the terminal to clear the display.
If not in session, [CLEAR] clears the entire display regeneration buffer.
Enters information.
User-defined command functions. Refer to your application’s user manual for detail on the functions.
Issues a hex F3 AID byte to the host system.
Tells the controller that the operator wants to print the contents of the present display. Issues hex F6 to the host system.
Record Backspace (Home) When pressed with the cursor in the home position, a record backspace is requested. The AID code hex F8 and cursor address are sent to the host system.
Roll Up and Roll Down Roll display up or down one page. Roll Up issues AID code hex F5. Roll Down issues AID code hex F4. For more information on the Roll keys, see next page.
12 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 2
—
Using Terminal Emulation Applications
Roll Keys
Cursor Keys
Field Exit Key
Roll Up and Roll Down are AID keys the terminal sends to the host to request and display additional screens. The host transmits a new screen in response to this command. The new screens allow you to view data either above or below what appears on the current screen.
5250 Terminals support the Roll command (hex 23) received from a host application. Using this command, a host application can roll an area of the screen up or down. The direction of the roll and number of lines to roll are specified in the command.
Do not confuse the Roll Up and Roll Down AID keys with the Roll command. The Roll keys cause the host to send down additional screens when you are at a Roll screen. A Roll screen typically has text in the lower righthand corner of the screen indicating that there are additional screens to view.
Note the following:
S A Roll command received from a host application moves the screen, but not the window/viewport. The screen scrolls through the window/viewport when you roll up or down, but the window/viewport remains stationary.
S Paging keys (window/viewport page up, window/viewport page down, window/viewport page right, window/viewport page left) move the viewport within one screen. They do not move the screen itself.
For help with the Roll command, see Chapter 6, “Display Data Stream.”
You can manually move the terminal’s window/viewport by using the cursor keys and paging keys. For more information about the window/viewport, refer to the terminal’s user manual.
Field Exit exits an input field and moves the cursor to the beginning of the next input field. If you press this key while the cursor is between characters, then all characters to the right of the cursor are erased.
Note: On Trakker Antares terminals, you can set the Postamble or
Preamble command to use characters from the extended ASCII character set such as the Field Exit code for 5250 TE. For help, see “Auto-Advancing
through Fields” earlier in this chapter.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
13
Chapter 2
—
Using Terminal Emulation Applications
Signal Keys
Signal keys cause a Signal command to go from the controller to the host system. The following describes the signal keys.
Attn The operator presses this key to alert the host system the function request (such as [ENTER]) is not honored. Attn is valid when the keyboard is locked or unlocked. It does not change the keyboard state or the cursor location.
Help (from error state) The operator uses this key to request that the host system send data about the error to the display.
Special Control Keys
Use special control keys to change operator-generated information in the display. The keys do not work when the keyboard is locked.
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
Deletes the character in the position where the cursor was located. All remaining characters in the field shift to the left to fill the column.
Clears all fields to nulls, and cursor moves to the first input position on screen. This command does not erase protected fields. If you press this key when the screen shows only protected fields, the cursor returns to the home position.
Restores the original data on the error line of the display and resets the state.
Enters hexadecimal codes from the keyboard to generate any EBCDIC characters needed for input or display.
Moves the cursor to the position specified by the insert cursor (IC) address.
Sets or turns off the insert mode for the input field the operator has the cursor in. The operator must reset the insert state before exiting it, by either pressing [RESET] or [INSERT] again.
Puts the keyboard into shift lock mode.
Special Host Key
The special 5250 host key is System Request.
Sys Req Data on the error line is saved, the error line is cleared, a column separator and underscore field attribute are supplied to column 1 of the error line, and the cursor is located under column 2 to begin polling keystrokes.
14 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 2
—
Using Terminal Emulation Applications
5250 Additional Functions
This table lists additional operations you can perform on your terminal.
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
Back Tab
Dup
(duplicate enabled fields only)
Field–
Field+
Field Mark
Forward Tab
Enters a cent sign.
Moves the cursor to the first unprotected character position of the first line in the screen. If the entire screen is a protected field, the cursor returns to the home position.
Enters a Not symbol.
Moves the cursor back to the most recent first field position. If the cursor is in the middle of a field, it moves it to the first position of the same field. If the cursor is at the first position of a field, it moves it to the first position of the preceding input field.
Controller repeats hex “1C” from the cursor position to the end of the field. This shows in the display as an overstruck asterisk.
For numeric fields, makes the input a negative number.
Advances cursor to the next input field. For numeric fields, makes the input a positive number.
This is valid within any unprotected entry input field in which the Dup or Field
Mark key is allowed (FFW bit 3 set to on). The Field Mark character (X‘1E’) is displayed as an overscore on IBM 5251 Display Stations and as a space on all other supported workstations. If an operator presses the Field Mark key in an entry field that does not allow the Dup or Field Mark key, operator error 0019 is posted. The Field
Mark code point is allowed in an outbound data stream.
Moves the cursor to the first position in the next input field.
System Messages
To enter an operation:
Press the keys listed in the chapter for the terminal. Or, scan the bar code in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning.”
The terminal’s display reserves a line for status information. The status line can display system (nonlocal) information such as a message waiting from the host computer, help messages in response to the [Help] key, or the system request state of the terminal.
System codes can also appear on the status line. System messages and codes are described in Chapter 6, “Display Data Stream.”
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
15
Chapter 2
—
Using Terminal Emulation Applications
5250 Serial Scanning
The following instructions explain how to set serial scanning options.
These instructions apply to the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X
Terminals.
1
Connect your terminal to a serial scanner.
2
Open the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System.
3
From the Main Menu, choose Configuration Menu > Communica-
tions Menu > Serial Port, then configure the serial port parameters. See the terminal’s user manual for help. Note that the baud rate, data bits,
stop bits, and parity for the serial scanner and the serial port must match.
Do the following to set the RS232 Stream option:
1
Open the TE configuration menus. For the correct key sequence, see
Chapter 1, “Getting Started.”
2
From the Main Menu, select 1) Set-up Parms, then enter “cr52401” at the Enter Password prompt.
3
Select 2) Barcode Parms > 4) RS232 Stream.
16 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
3
Using the Terminal’s
Keyboard
Your terminal has a special keyboard that contains most of the keys available on your 5250 terminal keyboard. Use the keyboard to enter data in the TE 2000 screens.
The keys on the keyboard have their main character or operation marked directly on the key itself. To access that character or operation, just press the key.
You can access TE commands and functions printed above the keys by pressing key combinations.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
17
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2415 Terminal
Function
Left Key
For help with using the keyboards, refer to the TRAKKER Antares 241X
Hand-Held Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 069538).
55-Key Keyboard
37-Key Keyboard
Function
Right Key
Function
Left Key
Function
Right Key
Control Key
Shift Key
Control Key
Shift Key
Your 2415 Terminal has either a 55-key (left) or a 37-key (right) keyboard as shown in this illustration.
2415 Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
Press the Keys
=
>
( >
( =
2415 Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
Press the Keys
( 9
( 3
( 6
( 4
2415 Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
Press the Keys
( ;
;
18 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2415 AID-Generating Keys
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
To Enter
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1
F16
F17
F18
F19
F12
F13
F14
F15
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Help (nonerror state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
) N
) O
) P
) W
( S
( 7
) 4
) 1
) F
) G
) H
) I
) J
) K
) L
) M
( @
( #
( $
) A
) B
) C
) D
) E
55-Key Keyboard
) 9
[
!
@
#
$
( !
Press the Keys
@
#
$ b
37-Key Keyboard
( 8
[
!
c d
? $
? b
? c
? d
? e
? f
? g
? h e f g h i
? !
? @
? #
? i
( h
( !
( 7
( 2
( 1
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
19
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2415 Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
2415 Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
2415 Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
2415 Special Host Key
To Enter
Sys Req
Press the Key
\
Press the Keys
55-Key Keyboard 37-Key Keyboard
) S
) W
( e
( h
Press the Keys
55-Key Keyboard
( .
) T
) Y
) R
( 7
( 0
( U
37-Key Keyboard
( .
( $
( i
( @
( 7
( 0
( d
Press the Keys
55-Key Keyboard 37-Key Keyboard
) V ( #
20 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2415 5250 Additional Functions
To Enter
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
Press the Keys
55-Key Keyboard 37-Key Keyboard
Not supported.
) Q
) .
( 5
) 8
( 8
( 2
Not supported.
( g
Not supported.
? 8
? >
? =
Not supported.
2415 Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix
A, “Bar Code Scanning”):
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
21
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2425 Terminal
For help with using the keyboard, refer to the TRAKKER Antares 2420
and 2425 Hand-Held Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 064024).
Function
Left Key
Shift Key
Function
Right Key
Control Key
This illustration shows the keyboard for the 2425 Terminal.
2425 Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
2425 Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
2425 Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
22
Press the Keys
) [
) {
) }
) ]
Press the Keys
) 9
) 3
) 6
) 4
Press the Keys
) <
<
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2425 AID-Generating Keys
F10
F11
F12
F13
F6
F7
F8
F9
F2
F3
F4
F5
To Enter
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1
F18
F19
F20
F21
F14
F15
F16
F17
F22
F23
F24
Help (nonerror state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
) #
) $
) %
( A
( B
( C
( D
( E
( F
( G
( H
( I
( J
( K
( L
( M
( N
( T
( 9
( V
( S
( R
Press the Keys
( W
;
!
@
#
$
%
) !
) @
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
23
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2425 Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
2425 Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
2425 Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
2425 Special Host Key
To Enter
Sys Req
Press the Key
y
or
z
Press the Keys
( X
( T
Press the Keys
) .
( Y
( d
( 5
( V
) 0
) Z
Press the Keys
( U
2425 5250 Additional Functions
To Enter
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
Press the Keys
) Y
( P
) O
) 5
( 8
) 8
) 2
24 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2425 Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, press ( % or scan the following bar code
(also in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning”):
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
25
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2435A Terminal
For help with using the keyboards, refer to the TRAKKER Antares 243X
Hand-Held Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 071791-001).
57-Key Keyboard
48-Key Keyboard
39-Key Keyboard
Your 2435A Terminal has a 57-key (left), 48-key (middle), or a 39-key (right) keyboard as shown.
Characters on the Keyboards
The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:
[Orange] Press Orange
> plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in orange on the overlay.
[Green]
Press Green
> plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in green on the overlay.
26 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2435A Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
2435A Paging Keys
57-Key Keyboard
l u l d l b l a
Press the Keys
48-Key Keyboard
Orange
>, A
Orange
>, B
Orange
>, F
Orange
>, E
39-Key Function
Numeric Keyboard
l u l d l b l a
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
2435A Tab Keys
57-Key Keyboard
r u r d r b r a
Press the Keys
48-Key Keyboard
Green
>, Q
Green
>, V
Green
>, W
Green
>, U
39-Key Function
Numeric Keyboard
r u r d r b r a
To Enter
Forward Tab
Back Tab
57-Key Keyboard
l b l a
Press the Keys
48-Key Keyboard
:
^
:
39-Key Function
Numeric Keyboard
l b l a
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
27
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
F10
F11
F12
F13
F6
F7
F8
F9
F14
F15
F16
F2
F3
F4
F5
To Enter
Clear
Enter
F1
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Help (non-error state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
2435A AID-Generating Keys
r F r G r H r I r J r K r L r M r N r O r P r Q r R
57-Key Keyboard
r 1 v g h i j k o r A r B r C r D r E r 2 r 8 r Z r 6 r 9
Press the Keys
48-Key Keyboard
Green
>, C e
Green
>, 7
Green
>, 8
Green
>, 9
Green
>, 0
Orange
>, :
Green
>, :
Orange
>, _
Green
>, _
Green
>, /
Green
>, P
Green
>, H
Green
>, F
Green
>, B
Orange
>, 1
Orange
>, 2
Orange
>, 3
Orange
>, 4
Orange
>, 5
Orange
>, 6
Orange
>, 7
Orange
>, 8
Orange
>, 9
Orange
>, 0
Green
>, 1
Green
>, 2
Green
>, 3
Green
>, 4
Green
>, 5
Green
>, 6
] r g r h r i r j r k r o r m r p r q r [ r \ r ] m p q
[
\ h i j k o
39-Key Function
Numeric Keyboard
r 1 v g r 2 r 8 r s r 6 r 9
28 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2435A Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
2435A Signal Keys
57-Key Keyboard
t
Press the Keys
48-Key Keyboard
Green
>, ^
39-Key Function
Numeric Keyboard
t
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
57-Key Keyboard
r 3 r 2
2435A Special Control Keys
Press the Keys
48-Key Keyboard
Green
>, C
Green
>, /
39-Key Function
Numeric Keyboard
r 3 r 2
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
57-Key Keyboard
r n r 4 r 0 r U r Z r 5 l r
2435A 5250 Additional Functions
Press the Keys
48-Key Keyboard
Green
>, D
Green
>, E
Green
>, R
Green
>, X
Green
>, H
Green
>, I
Green
>, ^
39-Key Function
Numeric Keyboard
r n r 4 r 0 r e r s r 5 l r
To Enter
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
57-Key Keyboard
r O r j
Not supported r o u t r t r T
Press the Keys
48-Key Keyboard
Not supported.
Orange
>, ;
Not supported.
Green
>, N
Orange
>, \
Green
>, \
Not supported.
39-Key Function
Numeric Keyboard
Not supported.
;
Not supported.
r ; u t r t
Not supported.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
29
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2435A Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, press r v on the 57-key keyboard and
39-key function numeric keyboards, press Green
>
,
; on the 48-key keyboard, or scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “Bar Code
Scanning”).
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
2435A 5250 Additional Functions
To access the TE configuration menus, press r l on the 57-key keyboard and 39-key function numeric keyboards, or press Green >,
Orange > on the 48-key keyboard.
30 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2455 Terminal
For help with using the keyboard, refer to the TRAKKER Antares 2455
Vehicle-Mount Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 067358).
Note: You must use the 2455 keyboard (P/N 067028) with the TE applications.
Backspace Key
Shift Key
Control Key
Function
Left Key
This illustration shows the keyboard for the 2455 Terminal.
2455 Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
2455 Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
2455 Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Press the Keys
) [
) {
) }
) ]
Press the Keys
) 9
) 3
) 6
) 4
Press the Keys
) <
<
Function
Right Key
31
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2455 AID-Generating Keys
F10
F11
F12
F13
F6
F7
F8
F9
F2
F3
F4
F5
To Enter
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1
F18
F19
F20
F21
F14
F15
F16
F17
F22
F23
F24
Help (nonerror state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
2455 Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
32
( E
( F
( G
( H
( I
( J
( K
( L
) ¢
) £
) §
) ¶
( A
( B
( C
( D
( M
( N
( T
( ¢
( V
( S
( R
Press the Keys
( W
;
¡
¢
£
§
¶
) ¡
Press the Key
( «
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2455 Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
2455 Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
2455 Special Host Key
Press the Keys
( X
( T
Press the Keys
) .
( Y
( d
( 5
( V
) 0
) Z
To Enter
Sys Req
2455 5250 Additional Functions
Press the Key
( U
To Enter
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
Press the Keys
) Y
( P
) O
) 5
( 8
) 8
) 2
2455 Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, press ( ¶ or scan the following bar code
(also in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning”):
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
33
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2475 and 248X Terminals
For help with using the keyboard, refer either to the Trakker Antares 2475
Vehicle-Mount Terminal User’s Manual (P/N: 072383) or to the TRAK-
KER Antares 248X Stationary Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 066960).
Control Key
Backspace Key
Shift Key
Function
Left Key
Function
Right Key
This illustration shows the keyboard for the 2475 and 248X Terminals.
2475 and 248X Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
Press the Keys
) ¥
) †
) ª
) –
2475 and 248X Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
2475 and 248X Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
Press the Keys
) 9
) 3
) 6
) 4
Press the Keys
) ø
ø
34 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2475 and 248X AID-Generating Keys
F10
F11
F12
F13
F6
F7
F8
F9
F2
F3
F4
F5
To Enter
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1
F18
F19
F20
F21
F14
F15
F16
F17
F22
F23
F24
Help (nonerror state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
2475 and 248X Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
( V
( B
( N
( T
( M
( W
( E
( R
( J
( K
( L
( r
(
[quotation mark]
( Z
( X
( C
) ¡
) ¢
) £
) §
) ¶
( F
( G
( H
¢
£
§
¶
Press the Keys
) b
;
¡
Press the Key
[Fld Ext]
35
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
2475 and 248X Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
2475 and 248X Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
2475 and 248X Special Host Key
Press the Keys
( U
( T
Press the Keys
) .
( O
( d
( 5
( W
) 0
)
[quotation mark]
To Enter
Sys Req
2475 and 248X 5250 Additional Functions
Press the Key
( Y
To Enter
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
Press the Keys
) C
( A
) D
) 5
( 8
) 8
) 2
2475 and 248X Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, press ( ¶ or scan the following bar code
(also in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning”):
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
36 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
6400 Computer
For help with using the keyboard, refer to the PEN*KEY Model 6400
User’s Guide (P/N 961-047-093).
51-Key Keyboard 41-Key Keyboard
Unlabeled Key Colors:
Blue
Gold
Your 6400 Computer has either a 51-key (left) or a 41-key (right) keyboard as shown.
Characters on the Keyboards
The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:
[Green] The Green [SHFT] puts the keyboard into green shift mode.
[Gold] Press [Gold] plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.
[Blue] Press [Blue] plus a key to do operations printed in blue on the overlay.
The 51-key keyboard has two gray, unlabeled keys in the bottom row.
These are the keys’ functions when they are unshifted (in primary plane):
Gray key with “FLDX” printed above it is the Field Exit key.
Gray key with “SP” printed above it is the Space key.
The 41-key keyboard has four gray, unlabeled keys near the bottom row.
Following are the key’s functions when they are in the primary plane:
Gray key with “DUP” printed above it is the Duplicate key.
Gray key with “ATN” printed above it is the Attention key.
Gray key with “RST” printed above it is the Error Reset key.
Gray key with “FLDX” printed above it is the Field Exit key.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
37
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
Using the 41-Key Keyboard
The 41-key keyboard has standard numeric keys, an [Enter] key, user-defined function keys in its primary plane, and alphabetic keys in its secondary plane. Because a 41-key keyboard does not have alphabetic keys, do the following to enter passwords and cold-start the 6400 Computer:
S To enter the password for the Set-Up Parms TE configuration menu, press [SHFT] [Blue] [3] or [SHFT] [F12] [3] to enter a “C”,
[SHFT] [Blue] [F8] or [SHFT] [F11] [3] to enter an “R,” then press
“52401.” Note that these are not case-sensitive.
S To initiate the COLD START? menu option, press [Blue] [F11] [RST] to answer “yes.”
You can use one of two methods to type letters on the 41-key keyboard: standard blue shift mode or alpha lock mode. When engaged, alpha lock switches the alphabetic keys with the function keys. That is, it moves lowercase alphabetic keys from their standard [Blue] plane to the primary plane. It moves uppercase alphabetic keys from their standard
[SHFT] [Blue] plane to the [SHFT] plane. Alpha lock provides a faster way to type a series of letters because it reduces the number of key presses.
To engage alpha lock mode press [Blue] [Gold]. Then, to type a series of letters, press the correct key combination. The keyboard stays in alpha lock mode until you press [Blue] [Gold] again to unlock it.
6400 Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
Press the Keys
[Gold] [Y]
[Gold] [B]
[Gold] ["]
[Gold] [A]
6400 Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
Press the Keys
[Blue] [Y]
[Blue] [B]
[Blue] ["]
[Blue] [A]
6400 Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
Press the Keys
|Í
Î|
38 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
6400 AID-Generating Keys
To Enter
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F1
F2
F3
F4
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Enter/Rec Adv
Help (nonerror state)
Clear
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
Press the Keys
51-Key Keyboard
41-Key Keyboard
(Standard Mode)
[Blue] [A]
[Blue] [B]
[Blue] [C]
[Blue] [D]
[Blue] [E]
[Blue] [F]
[Blue] [G]
[Blue] [H]
[Blue] [I]
[Blue] [J]
[Blue] [K]
[Blue] [L]
[Blue] [M]
[Blue] [N]
[Blue] [O]
[Blue] [P]
[Blue] [Q]
[Blue] [R]
[Blue] [S]
[Blue] [T]
[Blue] [U]
[Blue] [V]
[Blue] [W]
[Blue] [X]
[Enter]
[Blue] [7]
[Blue] [4]
[Blue] [6]
[Gold] [3]
[Gold] [B]
[Gold] [Y]
[F5]
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
[F9]
[F1]
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
[F10]
[F11]
[F12]
[SHFT] [F1]
[SHFT] [F2]
[SHFT] [F3]
[SHFT] [F4]
[SHFT] [F5]
[SHFT] [F6]
[SHFT] [F7]
[SHFT] [F8]
[SHFT] [F9]
[SHFT] [F10]
[SHFT] [F11]
[SHFT] [F12]
[Enter]
[Gold] [4]
[Gold] [3]
[Gold] [
←
]
[Gold] [7]
[Gold] [B]
[Gold] [Y]
When alpha lock mode is engaged on the 41-key keyboard, it switches the function keys with the alphabetic keys. That is, function keys normally in the primary plane ([F1] through [F12]) move to the [Blue] plane.
Function keys normally in the [SHFT] plane ([F13] through [F24]) move to the [SHFT] [Blue] plane.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
39
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
6400 Field Exit
To Enter
Field Exit
Press the Key
[FLDX]
6400 Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
6400 Special Control Keys
Press the Keys
51-Key Keyboard 41-Key Keyboard
[Blue] [8]
[Blue] [7]
[ATN]
[Gold] [4]
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
6400 Special Host Key
Press the Keys
51-Key Keyboard 41-Key Keyboard
[Blue] [Í]
[Blue] [3]
[Gold] [1]
[Gold] [4]
[Gold] [3]
[Blue] [5]
[Blue] [SHFT]
[Blue] [Í]
[Gold] [8]
[RST]
[Gold] [2]
[Gold] [7]
[Gold] [9]
[Blue] [SHFT]
To Enter
Sys Req
6400 5250 Additional Functions
Press the Keys
51-Key Keyboard
[Blue] [1]
41-Key Keyboard
[Gold] [1]
To Enter 51-Key Keyboard
(New Line)
[Gold] [5]
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only) [Blue] [9]
Field[Gold] [9]
Press the Keys
41-Key Keyboard
[SHFT] [0]
[DUP]
[Gold] [6]
Field+
Field Mark
[Gold] [8] [Gold] [5]
No key available. Scan bar code in Appendix A,
“Bar Code Scanning”.
40 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
6400 Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix
A, “Bar Code Scanning”):
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
41
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
5020 Data Collection PC
For help with using the keyboards, see the 5020 Data Collection PC User’s
Manual (P/N 068975-002).
55-Key Keyboard
43-Key Keyboard
Your 5020 Data Collection PC has either a 55-key (left) or a 43-key (right) keyboard as shown.
Characters on the 5020 Keypad
Characters, symbols, and functions are printed in four places on or above the keys and are also color-coded to make key combinations.
Position on Keypad
Printed on key
Printed in orange on left side above key
Printed in lime and centered above key
Printed in green on right side above key
Press the Keys
Press the key
A
, then the key
B
, then the key
C
, then the key
5020 Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
}
{
Press the Keys
55-Key Keyboard
[
]
43-Key Keyboard
[
]
}
{
42 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
5020 Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
5020 Standard Keys
To Enter
Numbers
Symbols
5020 Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
5020 Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
5020 Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
5020 Special Host Key
To Enter
Sys Req
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Press the Keys
55-Key Keyboard
C [
C
]
C
}
C {
43-Key Keyboard
B [
B
]
C
}
C {
Press the Keys
0 – 9
A
,
B
, or
C
, plus corresponding key.
Press the Keys
u r r
|
Press the Keys
C
(period)
C 2
Press the Keys
55-Key Keyboard
A t
43-Key Keyboard
B t
C 4
C 5
C
[Z]
A {
!
C [
C 4
C 5
C s
B {
!
C [
Press the Keys
C 7
43
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
5020 5250 Additional Functions
To Enter
(New Line)
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
55-Key Keyboard
C c
C 0
C d
C a
A
[Y]
Press the Keys
43-Key Keyboard
C c
C 0
C d
C a
Not supported.
5020 Top-Row Function Keys
Note: Intermec
R
Application Servers do not support the F5 (Break).
F12
F13
F14
F15
F8
F9
F10
F11
To Enter
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5 (Break)
F6
F7
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F16
F17
F18
F19
C
[H]
C
[I]
C
[J]
C
[K]
C
[L]
C
[M]
C
[N]
C
[O]
C
[P]
C
[Q]
55-Key Keyboard
C
[A]
C
[B]
C
[C]
C
[D]
C
[E]
C
[F]
C
[G]
C
[R]
C
[S]
C
[T]
C
[U]
C
[V]
C
[W]
C
[X]
Press the Keys
43-Key Keyboard
g h m n o p i j k l
C g
C h
C i
C j
C k
C l
[
C m
C n
C o
C p
B D
B E
B !
B c
44 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
5020 Caps Lock
To type all alphabetic characters as uppercase letters, either press u before typing each letter or enable the Caps Lock feature.
To enable Caps Lock:
Press u until a tone is emitted, or press B ? with the 43-key keyboard or C u with the 55-key keyboard. The Caps Lock icon will appear in the Notification Tray and remain enabled until you disable it.
To type a lowercase letter while Caps Lock is enabled:
Press u A and an alphabetic character key. For example, press u
A 6 to type a lowercase letter “f.”
To disable Caps Lock:
Press u until a tone is emitted, or press B u with the 43-key keyboard or C u with the 55-key keyboard.
5020 Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, press C r or scan the following bar code
(also in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning”).
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
45
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
5055 Data Collection PC
For help with using the keyboard, refer to the 5055 Data Collection PC
User’s Guide (P/N 961-054-017).
Unlabeled Key Colors:
Blue
Gold
This illustration shows the keyboard for the 5055 Data Collection PC.
Characters on the Keyboard
The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:
[Shift]
[Blue]
Press [Shift] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase.
The blue (Ctrl) key puts the keyboard into blue shift [Blue] mode. Press
[Blue] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in blue, or to send a control character.
[Gold] The gold (Alt) key puts the keyboard into gold shift [Gold] mode. Press
[Gold] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in gold.
[NumLk] The green (number lock) key puts the keyboard into [NumLk] mode. Press
[NumLk] plus a keyboard key to type green numbers or characters.
Note: These are on the keyboard but are not supported: Fn, Setup, Pause,
Break, End, and ScrLk.
5055 Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
Press the Keys
[Blue] [Ï]
[Blue] [Ð]
[Blue] [Î]
[Blue] [Í]
46 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
5055 Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
5055 Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
Press the Keys
[Gold] [Ï]
[Gold] [Ð]
[Gold] [Î]
[Gold] [Í]
Press the Keys
|Í
Î
|
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
47
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
5055 AID-Generating Keys
To Enter
F11
F12
F13
F14
F7
F8
F9
F10
F3
F4
F5
F6
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1
F2
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Help (nonerror state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
5055 Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
Press the Keys
[Blue] [F8]
[Blue] [F9]
[Blue] [F10]
[Gold] [F1]
[Gold] [F2]
[Gold] [F3]
[Gold] [F4]
[Gold] [8]
[Gold] [2]
[Home]
[Roll Dn]
[Roll Up]
[F3]
[F4]
[F5]
[F6]
[Gold] [7]
[Enter]
[F1]
[F2]
[F7]
[F8]
[F9]
[F10]
[Blue] [F1]
[Blue] [F2]
[Blue] [F3]
[Blue] [F4]
[Blue] [F5]
[Blue] [F6]
[Blue] [F7]
Press the Keys
[Gold] [5]
48 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
5055 Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
5055 Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
5055 Special Host Key
To Enter
Sys Req
5055 5250 Additional Functions
Press the Keys
[Gold] [9]
[Gold] [8]
Press the Keys
[Del]
[Gold] [4]
[Reset]
[Gold] [X]
[Home]
[Ins]
[Caps Lock]
Press the Keys
[Gold] [1]
To Enter Press the Keys
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
Not supported.
[Gold] [N]
¬ (Not symbol)
Not supported.
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only) [Gold] [0]
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
[Gold] [3]
[Gold] [6]
No key available. Scan bar code in Appendix A,
“Bar Code Scanning”.
5055 Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix
A, “Bar Code Scanning”).
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
49
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
59XX Terminal
For help with using the keyboard, refer to the 5900 Series User’s Guide
(P/N 961-047-121).
Unlabeled Key Colors:
Brown
Gold
This illustration shows the keyboard for the 59XX Terminal.
Characters on the Keyboard
The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are as follows.
[SHIFT] Press [Shift] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase.
[Brown] The brown key puts the keyboard into brown shift mode. Press [Brown] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in brown on the overlay.
[Gold] The gold key puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press [Gold] plus a keyboard key to type a special character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.
The [Field Exit], [Reset], and [Shift] keys have their operations printed to the right of them. The operations printed to the right are the unshifted values. The operations printed above [Reset] and [Shift] are the shifted values. [Field Exit] does not have a shifted value.
59XX Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
Press the Keys
[Brown] [Y]
[Brown] [B]
[Brown] ["]
[Brown] [A]
50 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
59XX Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
59XX Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
Press the Keys
[Gold] [Y]
[Gold] [B]
[Gold] ["]
[Gold] [A]
Press the Keys
[A]
["]
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
51
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
59XX AID-Generating Keys
To Enter
F13
F14
F15
F16
F9
F10
F11
F12
F5
F6
F7
F8
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1
F2
F3
F4
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Help (nonerror state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
59XX Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
Press the Keys
[F5]
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
[Brown] [7]
[Enter]
[F1]
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
[Brown] [F1]
[Brown] [F2]
[Brown] [F3]
[Brown] [F4]
[Brown] [F5]
[Brown] [F6]
[Brown] [F7]
[Brown] [F8]
[Gold] [F1]
[Gold] [F2]
[Gold] [F3]
[Gold] [F4]
[Gold] [F5]
[Gold] [F6]
[Gold] [F7]
[Gold] [F8]
[Brown] [8]
[Brown] [2]
[Brown] [Reset]
[B]
[Y]
Press the Key
[Field Exit]
52 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
59XX Signal Keys
59XX Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
59XX Special Host Key
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
To Enter
Sys Req
59XX 5250 Additional Functions
Press the Keys
[Brown] [9]
[Brown] [8]
Press the Keys
[Brown] [Í]
[Brown] [4]
[Reset]
[Brown] [Z]
[Brown] [Insert]
[Brown] [5]
[Brown] [Shift]
Press the Keys
[Brown] [1]
To Enter Press the Keys
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
Alternate character size
[Gold] [-]
[Brown] [Y]
[Gold] [ . ]
[Yellow] [Space]
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only) [Brown] [0]
Field[Brown] [3]
Field+
Field Mark
[Brown] [6]
No key available. Scan bar code in Appendix A,
“Bar Code Scanning”.
59XX Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix
A, “Bar Code Scanning”):
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
53
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
17XX Terminal
For help with using the keyboard, refer to the RT17XX Radio Data Termi-
nal User’s Guide (P/N 961-047-068).
57-Key Keyboard
37-Key Keyboard
Unlabeled Key Colors:
Black
Gold
Brown
Your 17XX Terminal has either a 57-key (left) or a 37-key (right) keyboard as shown.
Characters on the Keyboards
The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are as follows:
[Shift] Press [Shift] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. The [Shift] key is located near the top of the keyboard.
[Gold] The gold key puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press [Gold] plus a keyboard key to type a character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.
[Black] The black key puts the keyboard into black shift mode. Press [Black] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in black on the overlay.
The [Field Exit] key has its operation printed to the left of it. The operation to the left is its unshifted value. The operations printed above
[Field Exit] are shifted values.
54 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
37-Key Keyboard
The 37-key keyboard has standard numeric keys, an [Enter] key, and user-defined function keys in its primary plane. It has alphabetic keys in its secondary plane, and the special character “ . ” (period).
Because a radio terminal with a 37-key keyboard does not have alphabetic keys, follow these procedures when using its TE configuration menus and downloading software to it:
S To access password-protected menus, press [Gold], [Black], [F12],
[F11], then type “52401” for the password; or press [Black], [F3],
[Black], then type “52401” for the password.
S To initiate the COLD START? menu option, press [F10] to answer
“yes.”
S To download software, hold down the [F1] key as you power up the radio terminal to go into download mode. This is similar to holding down the [I] key on the standard 57-key keyboard.
17XX Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
Press the Keys
[Gold] [Y]
[Gold] [B]
[Gold] ["]
[Gold] [A]
17XX Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
Press the Keys
[Black] [Y]
[Black] [B]
[Black] ["]
[Black] [A]
17XX Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
Press the Keys
[A]
["]
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
55
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
17XX AID-Generating Keys
To Enter 57-Key Keyboard
F19
F20
F21
F22
F15
F16
F17
F18
F23
F24
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F3
F4
F5
F6
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1
F2
Help (nonerror state)
[Black] [2]
[Black] [8]
Record Backspace (Home) [Black] [SP]
Roll Down [Black] [6]
Roll Up [Black] [9]
[Black] [1]
[Enter]
[F1]
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
[F5]
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
[Black] [F1]
[Black] [F2]
[Black] [F3]
[Black] [F4]
[Black] [F5]
[Black] [F6]
[Black] [F7]
[Black] [F8]
[Gold] [F1]
[Gold] [F2]
[Gold] [F3]
[Gold] [F4]
[Gold] [F5]
[Gold] [F6]
[Gold] [F7]
[Gold] [F8]
Press the Keys
37-Key Keyboard
[Gold] [1]
[Enter]
[F1]
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
[F5]
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
[F9]
[F10]
[F11]
[F12]
[Gold] [F1]
[Gold] [F2]
[Gold] [F3]
[Gold] [F4]
[Gold] [F5]
[Gold] [F6]
[Gold] [F7]
[Gold] [F8]
[Gold] [F9]
[Gold] [F10]
[Gold] [F11]
[Gold] [F12]
[Gold] [2]
[Gold] [8]
[Gold] [SP]
[Gold] [6]
[Gold] [9]
17XX Field Exit Key
56
To Enter
Field Exit
Press the Key
[Field Exit]
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
17XX Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
17XX Special Control Keys
Press the Keys
57-Key Keyboard 37-Key Keyboard
[Black] [3]
[Black] [2]
[Gold] [3]
[Gold] [2]
17XX Special Host Key
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
Press the Keys
57-Key Keyboard
[Black] [Í]
[Black] [4]
[Black] [Shift]
[Black] [Z]
[Black] [SP]
[Black] [5]
[Black] [Gold]
37-Key Keyboard
[Gold] [Í]
[Gold] [4]
[Black] [Shift]
[Gold] [ . ]
[Gold] [SP]
[Gold] [5]
[Black] [Gold]
To Enter
Sys Req
17XX 5250 Additional Functions
Press the Keys
57-Key Keyboard 37-Key Keyboard
[Black] [7] [Gold] [7]
To Enter
Press the Keys
57-Key Keyboard 37-Key Keyboard
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
[Gold] [9]
[Gold] [5]
[Gold] [6]
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only) [Black] [0]
Field[Black] [Brown]
Field+
Field Mark
Not supported.
[SHFT] [0]
Not supported.
[Gold] [Í]
[Black] [Brown]
[Gold] [Brown] [Gold] [Brown]
No key available. Scan bar code in Appendix A,
“Bar Code Scanning”.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
57
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
17XX Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix
A, “Bar Code Scanning”):
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
58 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
11XX Terminal
For help using the keyboard, refer to the 1100 Series Data Terminal User’s
Guide (P/N 961-047-069).
Unlabeled Key Colors:
Black
Gold
Brown
This illustration shows the keyboard for the 11XX Terminal.
Characters on the Keyboard
The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are as follows:
[Shift] Press the brown [Shift] key plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. The
[Shift] key is located near the top of the keyboard.
[Gold] The gold key puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press [Gold] plus a keyboard key to type a special character or do an operation printed in gold.
[Black] The black key puts the keyboard into black shift mode. Press the [Black] key plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in black.
The [Field Exit] key has its operation printed to the left of it. The operation printed to the left is its unshifted value. Operations printed above [Field Exit] are shifted values.
11XX Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
Press the Keys
[Gold] [Y]
[Gold] [B]
[Gold] ["]
[Gold] [A]
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
59
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
11XX Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
11XX Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
Press the Keys
[Black] [Y]
[Black] [B]
[Black] ["]
[Black] [A]
Press the Keys
|Í
Î
|
60 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
11XX AID-Generating Keys
To Enter
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Help (nonerror state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
11XX Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Press the Keys
[Black] [S]
[Black] [T]
[Black] [U]
[Black] [V]
[Black] [W]
[Black] [X]
[Black] [2]
[Black] [8]
[Black] [SP]
[Black] [6]
[Black] [9]
[Black] [1]
[Enter]
[Black] [A]
[Black] [B]
[Black] [C]
[Black] [D]
[Black] [E]
[Black] [F]
[Black] [G]
[Black] [H]
[Black] [I]
[Black] [J]
[Black] [K]
[Black] [L]
[Black] [M]
[Black] [N]
[Black] [O]
[Black] [P]
[Black] [Q]
[Black] [R]
Press the Key
[Field Exit]
61
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
11XX Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
11XX Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
11XX Special Host Key
To Enter
Sys Req
11XX 5250 Additional Functions
Press the Keys
[Black] [3]
[Black] [2]
Press the Keys
[Black] [Í]
[Black] [4]
[Reset]
[Black] [Z]
[Black] [SP]
[Black] [5]
[Black] [Gold]
Press the Keys
[Black] [7]
To Enter Press the Keys
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
[Gold] [9]
[Black] [Y]
¬ (Not symbol)
[Gold] [6]
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only) [Black] [0]
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
[Black] [Brown]
[Gold] [Brown]
No key available. Scan bar code in Appendix A,
“Bar Code Scanning”.
11XX Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix
A, “Bar Code Scanning”):
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
62 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
700 Series Mobile Computer
For help with using the 700 Series Computer, refer to the 700 Series
Monochrome Mobile Computer User’s Manual (P/N 961-054-032) or the
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual (P/N: 961-054-031).
700 Series Software Input Panels
With the Software Input Panels (SIPs), you can change the color of up to ten keys, given four color choices (including the original gray. To change the color of the keys (only up to 10 keys):
1
Hold the LEFT Shift key down until it reverses back to normal.
2
Hold the RIGHT Shift key down until it reverses back to normal.
3
Select the letter that represents the color to which to switch.
4
Select from the three colors listed in the dialog box, or select the option to return all of the affected keys back to gray.
Main Keyboard
Function Keyboard
Shifted Keyboard
Uppercase keys with numbers
Lowercase keys with shifted characters
The illustration above shows the Software Input Panels (SIPs) for the VT/ANSI application.
S
Tap the Mn
G
key off the Shifted keyboard to get to the TE 2000 Setup Menus.
S
Tap the Shift
S
key to toggle between the Main and Shifted keyboards.
S
Tap the toggle key
}
to toggle between the Function and Main keyboards.
S
Tap the Cap
_ key to use uppercase keys with numbers.
S
Tap the Cap
_ key, then the Shift
S
key to use lowercase keys with shifted characters.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
63
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
700 Series Keypads
This illustration shows a 700 Series Monochrome Mobile Computer (left), a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer with a numeric keypad
(middle), and a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer with an alphanumeric keypad (right).
Note: The following key sequences are based on the SIP keyboards unless otherwise noted. Sequences provided are based on the assumption that you are starting with the Main Keyboard.
700 Series Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
700 Series Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
Tap the SIP Keys
} g
} k
} i
} m
Tap the SIP Keys
} h
} l
} j
} f
64 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
700 Series Standard Keys
Note: See the 700 Series Mobile Computer User’s Manual for information how to enter alpha characters using the 700 Series Computer keypads.
Keep in mind the Alpha key (F or d) and the Caps key (1 or g) are toggle keys — these remain on until pressed again to turn them off.
d f e b c j i k g h n o p l m s r q t u v w x y z
700 Series Alphanumeric Characters
To Enter
a
Press the Numeric Keys
F 2
F 2 2
F 2 2 2
F 3
F 3 3
F 3 3 3
F 4
F 4 4
F 4 4 4
F 5
F 5 5
F 5 5 5
F 6
F 6 6
F 6 6 6
F 7
F 7 7
F 7 7 7
F 7 7 7 7
F 8
F 8 8
F 8 8 8
F 9
F 9 9
F 9 9 9
F 9 9 9 9 d P d Q d R d S d T d U d V d W d X d Y d Z d H d I d J d K d L d M d N d O
Press the Alphanumeric Keys
d A d B d C d D d E d F d G
[v]
[w]
[x]
[y]
[z]
[q]
[r]
[s]
[t]
[u]
[l]
[m]
[n]
[o]
[p]
[g]
[h]
[i]
[j]
[k]
Tap the SIP Keys
[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]
[f]
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
65
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
T
U
V
W
R
S
P
Q
X
Y
Z
0 – 9
Symbols
N
O
L
M
J
K
I
H
F
G
D
E
B
C
To Enter
A
700 Series Alphanumeric Characters (continued)
Press the Numeric Keys
F 1 2
F 1 2 2
F 1 2 2 2
F 1 3
F 1 3 3
F 1 3 3 3
F 1 4
F 1 4 4
F 1 4 4 4
F 1 5
F 1 5 5
F 1 5 5 5
F 1 6
F 1 6 6
F 1 6 6 6
F 1 7
F 1 7 7 d g P d g Q
F 1 7 7 7 d g R
F 1 7 7 7 7 d g S
F 1 8
F 1 8 8
F 1 8 8 8
F 1 9 d g T d g U d g V d g W
F 1 9 9
F 1 9 9 9 d g X d g Y
F 1 9 9 9 9 d g Z
Press the Alphanumeric Keys
d g A d g B d g C d g D d g E d g F d g G d g H d g I d g J d g K d g L d g M d g N d g O
0 – 9 Z – Y
Symbol key, or
S plus corresponding key.
S
[M]
S
[N]
S
[O]
S
[P]
S
[Q]
S
[R]
S
[S]
S
[T]
S
[U]
S
[V]
S
[W]
S
[X]
S
[Y]
S
[Z]
Tap the SIP Keys
S
[A]
S
[B]
S
[C]
S
[D]
S
[E]
S
[F]
S
[G]
S
[H]
S
[I]
S
[J]
S
[K]
S
[L]
[0] – [9]
66 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
700 Series Function Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
Lock
Return
Shift
Space bar
Clear
700 Series Editing Keys
Tap the SIP Keys
S {
H
_
?
S
/
} £
To Enter
Clr
Del
Enter
Home
Insert
New Line (Return)
Reset
Tap the SIP Keys
}
[Clr]
} |
?
} (
} )
} ¤
!
Note: Pressing E on the 700 Series Numeric Keypad or pressing E on the 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad also performs the Reset function.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
67
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
700 Series Auxiliary Keys
To Enter
- (hyphen)
, (comma)
. (period)
_ (underscore)
Enter
Tap the SIP Keys
[–]
[,]
[.]
S
[–]
?
Note: For the F11–F24 keys, press either the uppercase sequence or the lowercase sequence (separated by the “or” conjunction), but not both.
Keep in mind the Alpha key (F or d) and the Caps key (1 or g) are toggle keys — these remain on until pressed again to turn them off.
To
Enter Press the Numeric Keys
F1
F2
A1
A2
F3
F4
F5
F6
A3
A4
A5
A6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
Press the
Alphanumeric Keys
aM aN aO aS aT aU
A7
A8
A9
A0 aW aX aY aZ
AF12 or
AF2
AF122 or
AF22 adgA or adA adgB or adB
AF1222 or
AF222 adgC or adC
AF13 or
AF3 adgD or adD
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
AF133 or
AF33 adgE or adE
AF1333 or
AF333 adgF or adF
AF14 or
AF4 adgG or adG
AF144 or
AF44 adgH or adH
AF1444 or
AF444 adgI or adI
AF15 or
AF5 adgJ or adJ
AF155 or
AF55 adgK or adK
AF1555 or
AF555 adgL or adL
AF16 or
AF6
AF166 or
AF66 adgM or adM adgN or adN
} [
} \
} ]
} ¨
} ©
} ª
} «
} u
} v
} w
} x
} y
} z
} V
} W
} X
} Y
} Z
Tap the
SIP Keys
} o
} p
} q
} r
} s
} t
68 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
700 Series Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
Press the Numeric Keys
Not supported.
700 Series Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
Press the Alphanumeric Keys
[Gold/White] b f
Tap the SIP Keys
} +
} .
700 Series Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
700 Series Special Host Key
To Enter
Sys Req
700 Series 5250 Additional Functions
Tap the SIP Keys
S |
} <
¥
¦
} (
} )
_
Tap the SIP Keys
} §
To Enter
(New Line)
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
Tap the SIP Keys
¤
} n
} ,
} -
Not supported.
Tap the SIP Keys
*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
69
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
700 Series Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, tap the SIP } @ keys or scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning”).
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
70 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CK30 Handheld Computer
Your CK30 has a 52-key, a 50-key, or a 42-key keyboard.
52-Key Keyboard 50-Key Keyboard
Green
Orange
Green
Orange
This illustration shows the CK30 52-Key Keyboard on the left and the 50-key keyboard on the right.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
71
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
For help with using the CK30, refer to the CK30 Handheld Computer
User’s Manual (P/N 073528).
Orange
Green
This illustration shows the CK30 42-Key Keyboard.
Characters on the Keyboards
The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:
[Green] Press C plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in green on the overlay.
[Orange] Press B plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in orange on the overlay.
CK30 Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
52-Key Keyboard
Y
B
B Y
B
B
Press the Keys
50-Key Keyboard
↑
↓
→
←
42-Key Keyboard
↑
↓
→
←
72 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CK30 Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
CK30 Tab Keys
To Enter
Forward Tab
Back Tab
52-Key Keyboard
C [W]
C [Y]
C [V]
C [U]
Press the Keys
50-Key Keyboard
C [Q]
C [V]
C [W]
C [U]
42-Key Keyboard
C
C
↑
↓
C
→
C
←
52-Key Keyboard
[Tab]
[Shift] [Tab]
Press the Keys
50-Key Keyboard
[Tab]
[Shift] [Tab]
42-Key Keyboard
[Tab]
[Shift] [Tab]
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
73
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CK30 AID-Generating Keys
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
To Enter
Clear
Enter
F1
F2
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
Help (non-error state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
52-Key Keyboard
C [B]
[Enter]
[F1]
[F2]
B [L]
B [M]
B [N]
B [O]
B [P]
B [Q]
B [R]
B [S]
B [T]
C [5]
C [4]
C [8]
[F3]
[F4]
B [F1]
B [F2]
B [F3]
B [F4]
B [E]
B [F]
B [G]
B [H]
B [I]
B [J]
B [K]
C Y
C B
Press the Keys
50-Key Keyboard
C [C]
[Enter]
[Func] [1]
[Func] [2]
[Func] [3]
[Func] [4]
[Func] [5]
[Func] [6]
[Func] [7]
[Func] [8]
[Func] [9]
[Func] [0]
C [1]
C [2]
C [3]
C [4]
C [5]
C [6]
C [7]
C [8]
C [9]
C [0]
C ←
C ↑
C
↓
C →
C [Esc]
C [P]
C [H]
C [F]
C [B]
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
C [7]
C [4]
C [8]
C [Alt]
C [Ctl]
[F3]
[F4]
[F5]
[F6]
[F7]
42-Key Keyboard
C [F6]
[Enter]
[F1]
[F2]
[F8]
[F9]
[F10]
[F11]
[F12]
Not Applicable (N/A)
N/A
N/A
N/A
74 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CK30 Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
CK30 Signal Keys
52-Key Keyboard
[Fld Exit]
Press the Keys
50-Key Keyboard
C
[Bksp]
42-Key Keyboard
C
[9]
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
CK30 Special Control Keys
52-Key Keyboard
C
[A]
C
[5]
Press the Keys
50-Key Keyboard
C
[A]
C
[Esc]
42-Key Keyboard
C
[F5]
C
[7]
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
52-Key Keyboard
C A
C
[3]
C
[0]
C
[1]
C
[8]
B
,
C
B
[A]
CK30 5250 Additional Functions
Press the Keys
50-Key Keyboard
[Func]
C
C
[E]
C
[R]
C
[Shift]
C
[H]
[Func] [Ctl]
[Func] [Shift]
42-Key Keyboard
C A
C
[F8]
C
[0]
C
[F10]
C
[8]
B
,
C
B
,
C
To Enter
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
52-Key Keyboard
Not Supported
C
[9]
Not supported
C
[D]
C
[.] (period)
C
[1]
C
[M]
Press the Keys
50-Key Keyboard
Not supported.
B
[Enter]
Not supported.
C
[D]
C
[L]
C
[G]
Not supported.
42-Key Keyboard
Not supported.
C
[9]
Not supported.
C
[F7]
C
[.] (period)
C
[1]
C
[F11]
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
75
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CK30 Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, press keyboards, press
C
[F4] on the 52-key and 42-key
C
[Enter] on the 50-key keyboard, or scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning”).
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
CK30 5250 Additional Functions
To access the TE configuration menus, press [Alt] [M] on the 52-key keyboard, press
C
[Ctl] [M] on the 50-key keyboard, or press [Alt]
B
[F3]
on the 42-key keyboard.
76 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CK31 Handheld Computer
Your CK30 has a 52-key keyboard. For help with using the CK31, refer to the CK31 Handheld Computer User’s Manual (P/N ??????).
Orange
Green
This illustration shows the CK31 52-Key Keyboard.
Characters on the Keyboards
The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:
[Green] Press C plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in green on the overlay.
[Orange] Press B plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in orange on the overlay.
CK31 Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
Press the Keys
Y
B
B Y
B
B
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
77
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CK31 Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
CK31 Tab Keys
To Enter
Forward Tab
Back Tab
Press the keys
C [W]
C [Y]
C [V]
C [U]
Press the Keys
[Tab]
[Shift] [Tab]
78 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CK31 AID-Generating Keys
To Enter
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F2
F3
F4
F5
Clear
Enter
F1
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F13
F14
F15
F16
F22
F23
F24
Help (non-error state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
CK30 Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Press the Keys
C [B]
[Enter]
[F1]
[F2]
[F3]
B [M]
B [N]
B [O]
B [P]
B [Q]
B [R]
B [S]
B [T]
C [5]
C [4]
C [8]
[F4]
B [F1]
B [F2]
B [F3]
B [F4]
B [E]
B [F]
B [G]
B [H]
B [I]
B [J]
B [K]
B [L]
C Y
C B
Press the Keys
[Fld Exit]
79
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CK31 Signal Keys
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
Press the Keys
C
[A]
C
[5]
CK31 Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
Press the Keys
C A
C
[3]
C
[0]
C
[1]
C
[8]
B
,
C
B
[A]
CK31 5250 Additional Functions
To Enter
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
¬ (Not symbol)
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
Field-
Field+
Field Mark
Press the Keys
Not Supported
C
[9]
Not supported
C
[D]
C
[.] (period)
C
[1]
C
[M]
CK31 Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, press
C
[F4] on the 52-key keyboard or scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning”).
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
CK31 5250 Additional Functions
To access the TE configuration menus, press [Alt] [M] on the 52-key keyboard.
80 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer
For help with using the CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer, refer to the
CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer User’s Guide (P/N 961-054-033).
Characters on the Keyboards
The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:
[Blue] Press [Blue] plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in blue on the overlay.
[Gold] Press [Gold] plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.
CV60 Software Input Panels
Software Input Panels (SIPs) are based on the 700 Series SIPs (page 63), with additional features. You can change the color of up to ten keys, given four color choices (including the original gray. To change the color of the keys (only up to 10 keys):
1
Hold the LEFT Shift key down until it reverses back to normal.
2
Hold the RIGHT Shift key down until it reverses back to normal.
3
Select the letter that represents the color to which to switch.
4
Select from the three colors listed in the dialog box, or select the option to return all of the affected keys back to gray.
You can change the size of the SIP to one-times, two-times or three-times the length and width of the original size. Thus, each SIP can be 240x80,
480x160, or 720x240 pixels (wide by tall). To change the size of the keys::
1
Hold the Left Shift Key down until it reverses back to normal.
2
Press and hold the “-” key until the Size Selection dialog appears.
3
Of the three options, select the sized keyboard of your choice.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
81
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
Main Keyboard
Shifted Keyboard
Function Keyboard
Uppercase keys with numbers
Lowercase keys with shifted characters
The illustration above shows the Software Input Panels (SIPs) for the VT/ANSI application.
S
Tap the Mn
G
key off the Shifted keyboard to get to the TE 2000 Setup Menus.
S
Tap the Shift
S
key to toggle between the Main and Shifted keyboards.
S
Tap the toggle key
}
to toggle between the Function and Main keyboards.
S
Tap the Cap
_ key to use uppercase keys with numbers.
S
Tap the Cap
_ key, then the Shift
S
key to use lowercase keys with shifted characters.
82 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CV60 Keyboard
Note: You must use the 5250 keyboard (P/N: 850-551-004) with the TE applications.
Gold Gold
Blue
This illustration shows the keyboard for the CV60 Data Collection PC.
Note: The following key sequences are based on the SIP keyboards unless otherwise noted. Sequences provided are based on the assumption that you are starting with the Main Keyboard.
CV60 Cursor Keys
To Enter
Window/viewport up
Window/viewport down
Window/viewport right
Window/viewport left
Press the Alphanumeric Keys
↑
↓
→
←
Tap the SIP Keys
} g
} k
} i
} m
CV60 Paging Keys
To Enter
Page up
Page down
Page right
Page left
Press the Keys
[Blue]
↑
[Blue]
[Blue]
[Blue]
↓
→
←
Tap the SIP Keys
} h
} l
} j
} f
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
83
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CV60 Tab Keys
To Enter
Back Tab
Forward Tab
Press the Alphanumric Keys
→
[Shift]
→
Tap the SIP Keys
S {
H
84 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CV60 AID-Generating Keys
F10
F11
F12
F13
F6
F7
F8
F9
F2
F3
F4
F5
To Enter
Clear
Enter/Rec Adv
F1
F18
F19
F20
F21
F14
F15
F16
F17
F22
F23
F24
Help (nonerror state)
Record Backspace (Home)
Roll Down
Roll Up
[Blue] [F4]
[Blue] [F5]
[Blue] [F6]
[Blue] [F7]
[Blue] [F8]
[Blue] [F9]
[Blue] [F10]
[Yellow] [F1]
[Yellow] [F2]
[Yellow] [F3]
[Yellow] [F4]
[Blue] [8]
[Blue] [2]
[Home]
[Blue] [9]
[Blue] [5]
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
[F5]
Press the Alphanumeric Keys
[Blue] [7]
[Enter]
[F1]
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
[F9]
[F10]
[Blue] [F1]
[Blue] [F2]
[Blue] [F3]
} v
} w
} x
} y
} z
} V
} W
} X
} Y
} Z
} [
} \
} ]
} ¨
} ©
} ª
} «
} .
}
[Prt]
} (
}
[R
↓]
}
[R
↑]
Tap the SIP Keys
}
[Clr]
?
} o
} p
} q
} r
} s
} t
} u
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
85
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CV60 Field Exit Key
To Enter
Field Exit
CV60 Signal Keys
Press the Alphanumeric Key
[Field Exit]
To Enter
Attn
Help (from error state)
Press the Alphanumeric Keys
[Attn]
[Blue] [8]
CV60 Special Control Keys
To Enter
Del
Erase Input
Error Reset
Hex
Home
Insert
Shift Lock
Press the Alphanumeric Keys
[Del]
[Blue] [6]
→
[Blue] [X]
[Home]
[Insert]
[Shift] [Caps Lock]
CV60 Special Host Key
To Enter
Sys Req
Press the Alphanumeric Key
[Blue] [1]
CV60 5250 Additional Functions
To Enter Press the Alphanumeric Keys
¢ (cent sign)
(New Line)
Not supported
[Return]
¬ (Not symbol)
Not supported
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only) [Blue] [0]
Field[Blue] [3]
Field+
Field Mark
[Blue] [4]
Not supported
86
Tap the SIP Key
*
Tap the SIP Keys
} +
} .
Tap the SIP Keys
S |
} <
¥
¦
} (
} )
_
Tap the SIP Keys
} §
Tap the SIP Keys
Not supported
¤
Not supported
} n
} ,
} -
Not supported
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
CV60 Auto-Login Restart
To enter Auto-Login Restart, press [Blue] [Menu], tap the } @ SIP keys, or scan this bar code (also in Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning”):
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
87
Chapter 3
—
Using the Terminal’s Keyboard
88 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
4
Using the Terminal Emulation
Menus
This chapter lists all TE 2000 parameters. If a certain parameter does not apply to your terminal, the parameter does not appear in the TE 2000 configuration menus.
The CFGLIT.DAT file specifies the text of the TE 2000 configuration menus. This chapter assumes you are using the default settings in
CFGLIT.DAT. To customize CFGLIT.DAT, see Chapter 5, “Customiz-
ing Your Configuration.”
Note: For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals with TE 2000
application versions 8.00 or greater, if a CONFIG.DAT file is present on your terminal, its settings are backed up in a CONFIG.OLD file, then written into a TE_SETTINGS.INI file. If the CONFIG.DAT file is not on your terminal, all settings are written to the TE_SETTINGS.INI file.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
89
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Function Keys
These paragraphs describe how to navigate through the TE 2000 configuration menus.
Enter Key
Press the terminal [Enter] key to return to a previous TE 2000 configuration menu. Press [Enter] several times to return to the Main Menu from a submenu. This key also accepts the displayed or keyed input.
Terminals
2415, 2425, 2455, 2475, 248X
2435A
6400
5020
5055
59XX
17XX, 11XX
700 Series
Related [Enter] Keys
[ or
\ keys v key (57-key keyboard) e key (48-key keyboard) v key (39-key function numeric keyboard)
[ENT] keys b or e keys
<Enter> via external keyboard
[ENTER] key
[ENTER] keys e key
Shift Keys
Use shift keys to put the keyboard in the desired shift mode. These shifted key functions are shown on the keyboard overlays in Chapter 3, “Using the
Terminal’s Keyboard.”
S For 6400, 5055
Yellow and Blue shift keys are required. For the 5055 PC, the Yellow shift key substitutes the <Alt> key and the Blue shift key substitutes the
<Ctrl> key on the external keyboard.
S For 17XX, 11XX
Gold and Black shift keys are required.
Y (“Yes”) Key
Several displays provide a warning that a certain action can cause your terminal to lose data stored in memory. Press the Y (“yes”) key to proceed as instructed. Press another key to exit the menu without executing your original choice.
90 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Up and Down Arrows
For 6400, 5055, 11XX, the up and down arrow keys are defined by the host computer.
For 59XX, the up and down arrow keys can be made to function more efficiently, in many cases, by pressing the FUNC or ALT key, then pressing the desired arrow key.
Use these keys to:
S Adjust the length and frequency of the audible buzzer, key click, and error tone.
S Set the display screen size (the number of rows displayed and characters per row) and contrast.
Number Keys [0] through [9]
Many menus have numbered options. Press the corresponding numeric key to make a selection.
Note: For the 700 Series, CK31, CV60 Terminals, you may tap an option to make a selection.
Once you make a selection and you remain at that menu screen, the option is highlighted, but you can select additional options. To deselect an enabled option, press the number corresponding to that option.
Pressing a number may bring up a submenu. Use the submenu to further modify the choice you made in the parent menu. After the modifications, you may return to the parent menu to make additional selections. (This depends on the menu and function.) Also, you may press a numeric key to exit a menu or cold start the terminal. These situations are covered later in this chapter.
Various menus require entering a number, but do not necessarily have simple choices such as 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. Instead, you may have to enter a number from a range of numbers, such as 0–32.
These instances are detailed in the text that applies to those menus, or in the menu displays.
Note: There are situations where pressing [6] does cause the terminal to exit from a submenu or to reboot.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
91
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Display Annunciators
For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, annunciators show the current status or operation in progress. Some of the more common annunciators are:
Note: The following symbols appear larger than actual size on your terminal display. All individual letter annunciators are five pixels in height, except T (temperature) and B (bad battery) which are seven pixels.
Display Position 0
Radio (6400, 5055)
The radio is transmitting data to the base station.
T
X
R
X
C
L
X
Display Position 1
If the radio icon is displayed in position 0, then position 1 shows the status of the radio transmission (as receiving, sending, communication loss, or message waiting). If there is no radio icon shown in position 0, then this position is blank and position 1 shows the active session number 1 or 2.
Message
A message is received and was not read.
Specific for 6400, 5055, 59XX Terminals
Sending
Radio is sending data to the base station.
Receiving
Radio is receiving data from the base station. This annunciator appears only when the information is for this particular computer’s address.
Communication Loss
No communication with the host computer has occurred for at least 60 seconds. The radio computer may be out of radio range, the base station may not have power, or communications from the host computer to the base station may not be properly set up.
Specific for 17XX, 11XX Terminals
Transmitting data
The terminal is transmitting data to the host computer.
Receiving data
The terminal is receiving data.
Communication Loss
The terminal cannot communicate with the host computer. The terminal may be out of radio range, the base radio may not have power, or communication from the host to the base may not be properly set up.
Display Position 2
Input Inhibited
The keyboard accepted enough information for the current input field. If the “key ahead” feature is on, the terminal stores the keystrokes made after
“input inhibited” appears. The host may also inhibit (lockout) the keyboard on certain errors or when sending more information to the terminal.
92 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
^
Insert Mode
Characters are inserted, not overwritten.
A
c
Y
Display Position 3
Alphabet Character Shift Mode (59XX, 17XX, 11XX,
Green for 6400, 5055)
The keyboard is in the alphabet character shift mode — any alphabet character keystrokes are entered as uppercase characters.
A
Shift Mode (Blue for 6400, 5055; Black for 11XX, 17XX; varies for 59XX)
The keyboard is in a colored shift mode — keystrokes enter the symbol or perform the function shown on the overlay to the upper left of the key.
"
Shift Mode (Yellow or Gold for 6400, 5055, 11XX, 17XX; varies for 59XX)
The keyboard is in a colored shift mode — keystrokes enter the symbol or perform the function shown on the overlay to the upper right of the key.
Display Position 4
Alpha Lock (6400)
This symbol is used only for the 6400 Computer 41-key keyboard model.
Battery is charging (17XX, 11XX)
The terminal is connected to a charging source. This does not necessarily mean the terminal is charging since this is dependent on battery state, temperature, and other conditions.
CL
S
C
A
N
NL
E
Display Position 5
Error (17XX)
The terminal is connected to a charging source, but charging is not possible.
B
T
Display Position 6
Bad Battery (17XX)
The battery pack you are currently using is bad.
Temperature (17XX)
The terminal is currently out of the battery charging temperature range, which is 5
° to 40° C.
Display Positions 1 through 3
Laser scanner in use (17XX, 11XX)
Observe caution labels on laser scanners.
Display Positions 4 and 5
Caps Lock (5055)
If [Caps Lock] is pressed (activated) on the 5055 external keyboard, the terminal types all capital letters regardless of how the text is entered.
Num Lock (5055)
If [Num Lock] is activated on the 5055 external keyboard, the terminal will enter numbers as pressed via the right-hand pad on the keyboard.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
93
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
+
--
XX/YY
Display Positions 4 through 6
Low battery condition (17XX, 11XX)
A Low Battery indication is very important to the operation of the terminal, letting you know that your terminal will stop operating shortly. Your terminal should continue to operate 30 minutes to 2 hours depending on how you use it. Data stored in RAM is saved for approximately 30 days.
However, you should avoid testing this limit.
Your terminal does retain its RAM data storage for up to 5 minutes with the battery pack removed. It is always a good idea to replace the battery pack with a fresh recharged pack immediately after removing the discharged pack. Without battery power, your terminal does not operate, and your display will be blank.
Display Positions 4 through 8
Current Row/Column Position (59XX)
Shows the current location of the cursor, with “XX” as the row position and “YY” as the column position. For example, if the cursor is at row 5, column 12, the annunciators will show “05/12” in positions 4–8.
Display Positions 5 through 8
Battery Pack Gas Gauge Icons (6400)
These battery icons represent the charge level in your main battery pack.
Four icons (positions 5–8) indicates more than 76% charge level
Three icons (positions 5, 6, and 7) indicates between 51–75%
Two icons (positions 5 and 6) indicates between 26–50%
One icon (position 5) indicates between 21–25%
When the terminal gets below 20%, the icons are replaced by Ls and after the charge level is less than 10% your terminal emits a series of beeps.
Four Ls indicates 16–20% charge level
Three Ls indicates 11–15%. At the 15% charge level, your terminal beeps once. The sound duration and frequency are at levels you have set for your terminal.
Two Ls indicates 6–10%. At the 10% and 7% charge levels, your terminal beeps once.
The sound duration and frequency are at levels you have set for your terminal.
One L indicates 0–5%. At this charge level, your terminal beeps three times at its current setting level for both duration and frequency.
Note: If you have the beeper turned off, you will not hear any of the low battery beep warnings.
The battery pack icons on your terminal display reflect the same status as the LEDs on the battery pack. However, there may be a one minute delay for updating the icons on the display when the battery pack is replaced.
94 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Configuration Menus (700 Series, CK31, CV60)
When a user taps the Menu Settings button (”M” circled in this illustra-
tion) on the toolbar, the following menu appears:
S Select Menu Settings to configure the contents of this menu. Enter a password, the default being cr52401. See page 156 for more information.
S Select TE2000 Menus to access the TE2000 Main Menu. Information about this is described later in this chapter.
S Select SIP Settings to select which Software Input Panel (SIP) you want to use with the TE 2000 application:
S Select Session Menu to change the current session:: See page 174 for information.
S Select Toolbar Options to configure the options that appear in the toolbar on the terminal. See page 157 for more information.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
95
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S Select Scanner Test to scan bar codes and view the bar code read and its length. The first character of the bar code is the bar code type character.
Select ok or press Enter to exit this test.
S Select Keyboard Test to view the hex value of the pressed key and the actual key value. Press Enter to exit this test.
96
S Select any of the Session 1 through Session 4 to go to that session.
S Select SIP Toggle to enable or disable the SIP keyboard.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Dialog Boxes
For the 700 Series and CV60 Terminals, dialog boxes appear in a row just above the task bar and system tray at the bottom of the screen and show the following information. See the illustration at the bottom of the screen.
S Radio (or Received) Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
This displays the RSSI frequency retrieved from the radio module. The color scheme is set up as follows:
Color Scheme
Dark Green
Light Green
Yellow
Orange
Red
RSSI Status
Excellent signal (100%)
Favorable signal (80%)
Good signal (60%)
Poor signal (40%)
Bad signal (20%)
S Term:
This displays the IP address assigned to this terminal. Up to 64 characters may appear in this box. Note that dialog boxes for the CV60 Terminal
also includes a Host name or IP addresss.
S SIP Toggle:
Tap this box to enable or disable the Software Input Panel (SIP) onscreen keyboard.
Exit
RSSI
Terminal IP address
SIP Toggle
Sample 700 Series Status Toolbar
To close these dialog boxes, tap [Exit], then enter a password to continue.
The default password is: cr52401
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
97
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Configuring TE Parameters
This chapter contains the TE configuration menus for the following terminals: 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX,
17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 unless otherwise noted. Additional information is available for each of the following:
S Trakker Antares (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X) page 177
S 6400 Computer page 177
S 5055 Data Collection PC page 178
Note: Screens are shown with all of the available options.
S If an option is not assigned to a specific terminal, then that option is available for all of the terminals addressed in this publication.
S If an option is specific towards a terminal, this option does not appear on the display, or will be blank, for all other terminals.
Key Sequence to Open Main Menu
To configure TE parameters on your respective terminal, at the initialization screens or anywhere in a TE session, access the Main Menu by pressing the following key sequence:
Terminal
2415
2425
2435A
2455, 2475, 248X
6400
5020
5055
59XX
17XX, 11XX
700
CK30
CK31
CV60
Key Sequence
) !
(55-key keyboard)
( 5
(37-key keyboard)
( !
r l
(57-key keyboard)
Green >, Orange > (48-key keyboard) r l
(39-key function numeric keyboard)
( ¡
[Gold] [Blue]
C A
[Blue] [M] or [ALT] [M]
[Brown] [Black]
[Gold] [Black]
Tap twice on the upper-right corner of the display; or via the Software Input Panel (SIP) keyboard, tap
S G
.
[Alt] [M] (52-key keyboard)
C
[Ctl] [M] (50-key keyboard)
[Alt]
B
[F3] (42-key keyboard)
Tap twice on the upper-right corner of the display; or via the external keyboard, press [Alt] [M].
Tap twice on the upper-right corner of the display; or via the external keyboard, press [Alt] [M].
98 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Note: You can also scan this bar code label to access the Main Menu.
TE configuration menus
*/ETECFG*
*%TECFG*
Opening the Main Menu
The Main Menu is the first screen displayed when you open the computer menus. All other menus are accessed from the Main Menu. At the initialization screens or anywhere in a TE session, press the appropriate keys to access the Main Menu (defined within each terminal’s specific information).
After the Main Menu appears, enter a number (1–7) to make a selection.
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Menus
The following menus pertain to the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and
248X Terminals.
To return to the Main Menu, press [Enter] several times, then select
6) Exit Menus, to return to the operating system.
Main Menu
1) Set-up Parms
2) LCD Parms
3) Beeper Setup
4) Tests
5) Version Info
6) Exit Menus
7) More
5) Radio Comm is blank for 2415,
2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X
Terminals without either an 802.1x
supplicant radio driver or UDP
Plus.
Set-up Parms
1) Communication
2) Barcode Parms
3) Protocol Opts
4) Display Opts
5) Radio Comm
6) Cold Start
7) More
Beeper Setup
1)
2) Error Tone
3) Beeper Select
[1] [2]
LCD Parms
1)
2) Screen Size
3) Screen Mode
4) Annunciators
5)
6) Key Uppercase
7) Scroll Window
[3] [4]
Tests
1) Peripherals
2)
3)
4)
5) Numbers
6) Timed Numbers
<TE Program Name>
Version
Date
Version Info
Firmware
<number>
<ddmmyy>
[5] [7]
Main Menu 2
1) Keyboard Opts
2) Save Parms
3)
4)
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
99
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
1) Set-up Parms (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X)
This is password-protected to prevent unauthorized users from changing parameters. You can customize the parameter’s CONFIG.DAT setup file to change the password. See Chapter 5, “Customizing Your Configuration.”
Changed parameters apply to the current session. If more than one session is available, use the 7) More > 2) Save Parms > 4) Session Menu to verify or change the current session before going to the next session. To open the
1) Set-up Parms menu, press [1], [Enter], then type “cr52401” at the prompt to access the following menus.
1) ITC Server is for
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,
248X with TE/UDP Plus
2) RTC/WTP
is for 2415, 2425,
2435A, 2455, 2475,
248X with RTC
3) Direct Connect
is for 2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X with
TE/IP
Controller Type
1) ITC Server
2) RTC/WTP
3) Direct Connect
Set-up Parms
1) Communication
2) Barcode Parms
3) Protocol Opts
4) Display Opts
5) Radio Comm
6) Cold Start
7) More
[1] [2]
5) Radio Comm is blank for 2415,
2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals without either an 802.1x supplicant radio driver or UDP Plus.
Barcode Parms
1) Code 39 Encoded
2)
3) Concatenate
4) RS232 Stream
5) Stream Scan
6) Scan All Flds
7) Native is blank if UDP Plus or
TCP/IP
Protocol Opts
1) Host View Sze
2) Data Stream
3) Extended Cmds
4) 5250
5) 3270
6) VT220
7) Native
[3]
[4]
Display Opts
1) Backlight
2) Cursor Mode
3)
3) Security ID is for Proxim radios
Protocol
1) SST
2) SST-Diag Mode
3) Security ID
[5] [6]
Cold Start
Enter “Y”
To Cold Start terminal:
3) COM Select is for
248X
Set-up Parms
1) Menu Password
2)
3) COM Select
[7]
100 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Menus
The following menus pertain to the 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, and 11XX
Terminals.
To return to the Main Menu, press [Enter] several times, then select
6) Exit Menus, to return to the operating system.
Main Menu
1) Set-up Parms
2) LCD Parms
3) Beeper Setup
4) Tests
5) Version Info
6) Exit Menus
7) More
3) Beeper Select
is for 6400, 5055,
17XX, 11XX
Set-up Parms
1) Communication
2) Barcode Parms
3) Protocol Opts
4) Display Opts
5) Radio Comm
6) Cold Start
7) More
Beeper Setup
1) Key Click
2) Error Tone
3) Beeper Select
[1] [2]
LCD Parms
1) LCD Contrast
2) Screen Size
3) Screen Mode
4) Annunciators
5) Backlight
6) Key Uppercase
7) Scroll Window
[3] [4]
Tests
1) Peripherals
2) Converters
3) Memory View
4) Packet Driver
5) Numbers
6) Timed Numbers
1) LCD Contrast and
5) Backlight
is for 59XX, 17XX
4) Annunciators
is blank for
17XX, 11XX
2) Converters
is for 59XX
MLID Name
and MLID ver are for 6400,
5055
<TE Program Name>
Version
Date
Version Info
Firmware
MLID Name
MLID ver
(mac address)
<number>
<ddmmyy>
ZZZZZZ xx.xx
[5] [7]
Main Menu 2
1) Keyboard Opts
2) Save Parms
3) Cloning Opts
4) Session Menu
3) Cloning Opts
is for 59XX, 17XX,
11XX
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
101
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
1) Set-up Parms (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
This is password-protected to prevent unauthorized users from changing parameters. You can customize the parameter’s CONFIG.DAT setup file to change the password. See Chapter 5, “Customizing Your Configuration.”
Changed parameters apply to the current session. If more than one session is available, use the 7) More > 2) Save Parms > 4) Session Menu to verify or change the current session before going to the next session. To open the
1) Set-up Parms menu, press [1], [Enter], then type “cr52401” at the prompt to access the following menus.
Set-up Parms
1) Communication
2) Barcode Parms
3) Protocol Opts
4) Display Opts
5) Radio Comm
6) Cold Start
7) More
2) RTC/WTP
is for 6400, 5055,
59XX, 11XX, 17XX with RTC
3) Direct Connect
is for 6400, 5055 with
TE/IP
Controller Type
1)
2) RTC/WTP
3) Direct Connect
7) Native is blank if UDP Plus or
TCP/IP
1) Backlight is for 6400, 17XX,
11XX
3) Remote Disp is for 17XX
Protocol Opts
1) Host View Sze
2) Data Stream
3) Extended Cmds
4) 5250
5) 3270
6) VT220
7) Native
Display Opts
1) Backlight
2) Cursor Mode
3) Remote Disp
[1] [2]
Scanner Type
1) No Scanner
2) Wand
3) Laser
4) Wand Emulate
5) Auto Detect
[3]
[2]
Scan Options
1) Redundancy
2) MOD 10 Check
3) Concatenate
4) BC Type Char
5) Stream Scan
6) Scan All Flds
7) More
[4]
[5]
Protocol
1) SST
2) SST-Diag Mode
3) Security ID
2) Wand,
4) Wand Emulate,
5) Auto Detect are for 59XX, 17XX,
11XX
1) Redundancy is for 6400, 59XX,
17XX, 11XX
3) Concatenate is for 6400, 5055
4) BC Type Char is for 6400, 59XX,
17XX, 11XX
3) Security ID is for Proxim radios
Cold Start
Enter “Y”
To Cold Start terminal:
[6] [7]
Set-up Parms
1) Menu Password
2) Print Device
3) COM Select
2) Print Device is for 6400
3) COM Select is for
5055
102 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Menus
The following menus pertain to the 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and
CV60 Terminals.
To return to the Main Menu, press [Enter] several times, then select
6) Exit Menus, to return to the operating system.
6) Cold Start is for
5020
6) Exit TE2000 is for 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60
Set-up Parms
1) Communication
2) Barcode Parms
3) Protocol Opts
4) Display Opts
5)
6) Cold Start
6) Exit TE2000
7) More
Beeper Setup
1) Key Click
2) Error Tone
3) Beeper Select
Main Menu
1) Set-up Parms
2) LCD Parms
3) Beeper Setup
4) Tests
5) Version Info
6) Exit Menus
7) More
3) Beeper Setup is for CK30, CK31
[1] [2]
LCD Parms
1)
2) Screen Size
3) Screen Mode
4) Annunciators
5)
6) Key Uppercase
7) Scroll Window
7) More
7) Scroll Window is for 5020
7) More is for
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
[3] [4]
Tests
1) Peripherals
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
<TE Program Name>
Version
Date
Version Info
Firmware
<number>
<ddmmyy>
[5] [7]
Main Menu 2
1) Keyboard Opts
2) Save Parms
3)
4) Session Menu
1) Set-up Parms (5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
This is password-protected to prevent unauthorized users from changing parameters. For 5020 Terminals and 700 Series, CK30, CV60 Terminals
with TE 2000 application versions older than 8.00, you can customize the parameter in the CONFIG.DAT setup file to change the password. For
700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals with TE 2000 application
version 8.00 or greater, you can customize the parameter in the
TE_SETTINGS.INI setup file. See Chapter 5, “Customizing Your
Configuration.”
Changed parameters apply to the current session. If more than one session is available, use the 7) More > 2) Save Parms > 4) Session Menu to verify or change the current session before going to the next session. To open the
1) Set-up Parms menu, press [1], [Enter], then type “cr52401” at the prompt to access the menus on the next page.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
103
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Set-up Parms
1) Communication
2) Barcode Parms
3) Protocol Opts
4) Display Opts
5)
6) Cold Start
6) Exit TE2000
7) More
For 5020
6) Cold Start is for 5020.
6) Exit TE2000 is for 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60.
1) ITC Server is for
5020, 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 with TE/UDP
Plus
3) Direct Connect
is for 5020, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60 with
TE/IP
Controller Type
1) ITC Server
2)
3) Direct Connect
[1] [2]
Barcode Parms
1) Code 39 Encoded
2)
3) Concatenate
4)
5) Stream Scan
6) Scan All Flds
For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
1) Backlight is for
700 Series
6) Font Quality is for CK30, CK31
Protocol Opts
1) Host View Sze
2) Data Stream
3) Extended Cmds
4) 5250
5) 3270
6) VT220
7)
[3] [2]
Scan Options
1)
2) MOD 10 Check
3) Concatenate
4) BC Type Char
5) Stream Scan
6) Scan All Flds
7) More
For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
Display Opts
1) Backlight
2) Cursor Mode
3) Select Font
4)
5) Display Colors
6) Font Quality
7) More
[4] [4]
For 5020
Display Opts
1)
2) Cursor Mode
3)
For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
[6] [6]
Exit TE2000
Enter “Y”
To Exit TE2000:
For 5020
Cold Start
Enter “Y”
To Cold Start terminal:
Set-up Parms
1) Menu Password
2) Print Device
3)
[7]
104 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
1) Set-up Parameters
The following setup parameter information pertains to all terminals unless otherwise noted.
1) Communication
The communication option for the terminals are broken down as follows:
S 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 with UDP Plus
1) ITC Server via the next paragraph.
S 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X with RTC
2) RTC/WTP on page 107.
S 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX with RTC
2) RTC/WTP on page 109.
S 6400, 5055 Terminals with TCP/IP
3) Direct Connect on page 111.
S 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020 with TCP/IP, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
3) Direct Connect on page 113.
1) ITC Server (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020 with TE/UDP Plus,
CK30, CK31, CV60)
ITC (Intermec Technologies Corporation) Server options are as follows.
To set the options, select 1) ITC Server, 2) Host/Srvr, then the Server
Setup option (Server A, B, or C).
Controller Type
1) ITC Server
2)
3)
[1]
ITC Server
1)
2) Host/Srvr
[2]
Server Setup
1) Server A
2) Server B
3) Server C
Server <A, B, or C>
Server IP
<IP address>
Host Setup<A, B, or C>
1) Host Name
2) Upline Prot
3) Port Number
4) Emulation
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
105
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Server IP <A, B, or C>
The Server <A> IP address is read from either the CONFIG.DAT or
TE_SETTINGS.INI file (if one is saved) or the terminal firmware. When an IP address is entered, it is written to the terminal’s firmware for the next boot.
If using the Server <B> or Server <C> option as a fallback Intermec Application Server, enter the server’s IP address or DNS name. The boot sequence will continue to try Server <A>, <B>, then <C> in order by filling the firmware controller slot with the IP values entered for each server.
Host Setup <A, B, or C>
Menu options are as follows:
Host Setup<A, B, or C>
1) Host Name
2) Upline Prot
3) Port Number
4) Emulation
Host<A, B, or C>
<3270, 5250, or VT/ANSI>
Host Name
<host name>
[1] [2]
Upline Prot<A, B, or C>
1)Telnet
2)SNA
Port Number<A, B, or C>
<port number>
[3]
[4]
Emulation<A, B, or C>
1)
2) 3270
3) 5250
4) VT/ANSI
1) Host Name
The host name can be 64 or fewer characters in length. Enter spaces or punctuation where needed. Note that the TE 2000 application performs an
auto-enter when the 64th character is entered. It is case-sensitive and must match a host name in the list of available hosts defined on the Intermec
Application Server, or remain blank. The name can also be the IP address of the host to which you want to connect. Enter the IP address as four decimal numbers separated by periods.
If a terminal was linked with a host name on the Intermec Application Server, or a default host was configured on this Intermec Application Server, you do not need to enter a host name on this screen.
106 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
The terminal displays a list of available hosts if these conditions are met.
The user can then select the host from the list.
S The Intermec Application Server contains multiple hosts.
S The terminal is not linked with a host name on the Intermec Application Server.
S The host name is blank.
2) Upline Prot
When enabled, upline protocol options do the following:
S Telnet (Default)
Forces the Intermec Application Server to create a Telnet connection to the host.
S SNA
Forces the Intermec Application Server to create an SNA connection to the host.
3) Port Number
This option overrides the port number set for the upline if you have entered a host name and selected Telnet as your upline protocol. Default port
number is 23. The maximum port number is 65535.
4) Emulation
Use this option to tell the terminal each host computer type. Default is
VT/ANSI.
Note: You can also set the type through the 2) Data Stream option on the
3) Protocol Opts menu.
2) RTC/WTP (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X)
Use 2) RTC/WTP to set, view, or change the terminal ID. This number allows the host computer to identify individual terminals in the radio data network. Each terminal must have a unique number in the same network.
Use the numeric keys on the terminal keyboard to modify its ID. Enter a number between 0–126, then press [Enter] to go to 2) Host/Cntl menus.
The 1) Radio Setup and 2) Host/Cntl menus are shown on the following pages. Pending on which option you are exercising you will either advance to the WTP Stack settings or the TCP/IP Stack settings. 1) Radio Setup is done in the firmware with the RTC stack.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
107
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
WTP Stack Options
Controller Type
1)
2) RTC/WTP
3)
[2]
Host/Cntl
1)
2) Host/Cntl
DONE
ENTER
Host/Cntl
1) CNTL A
2) CNTL B
3) CNTL C
[2]
ENTER
Controller (x)
Enter Unit
Number xxx
ENTER
Controller (x)
(cust emulation) unit # xxx
Host Name
Enter up to 16 characters/Numbers for a name.
ENTER
Emulation (x)
Enter Unit
1) Native
2) 3270
3) 5250
4) VT/ANSI
ENTER
Telnet (x)
1) Enabled
2) Disabled
ENTER
108 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
2) RTC/WTP (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Use 2) RTC/WTP to set, view, or change the terminal ID. This number allows the host computer to identify individual terminals in the radio data network. Each terminal must have a unique number in the same network.
The 1) Radio Setup and 2) Host/Cntl menus are shown on the following pages. Pending on which option you are exercising you will either advance to the WTP Stack settings or the TCP/IP Stack settings.
WTP Settings
Use the numeric keys on the terminal keyboard or 5055 external keyboard to modify its ID. Enter a number between 0–126, then press [Enter] to go to the 2) Host/Cntl menus.
The LAN ID number can be 0–255 depending on the radio being used.
With the RM60/70 radio, the number can be 0–255; with the RM80/90 radio, the range is 0–15. Your terminal only communicates with equipment using the same ID number that you assigned to your LAN.
If you enter a LAN ID number different from what is configured in the
NET.CFG file you get the following message. If this happens, the system modifies NET.CFG, which is used by WTPPKT.EXE on initializing the terminal.
LAN ID changed
Need to reboot to take effect.
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
109
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
WTP Stack Options
Controller Type
1)
2) RTC/WTP
3)
[2]
Host/Cntl
1) Radio Setup
2) Host/Cntl
[1] [2]
For 802.11 Radios Only
Radio Setup
Network Name xxxx
Enter up to 34 characters for a name
ENTER
For Non 802.11 Radios
Radio Setup
LAN xx
Radio Setup
Radio Config#
Only if a “radio cfg“ file is present on the terminal.
Go to Host/Cntl on the next page
Set Mode/Channel
is for RM60
(902 MHz) radios
Set Mode/Channel
Use Cursor Up and Down Keys
To Adjust
DS xxxx channel xx
ENTER (5055 -- continue to Host/Cntl setups)
Set Frequency
Use Cursor Up and Down Keys
To Adjust xxxxxxxxx
ENTER (continue to Host/Cntl setups)
Set Frequency is for
Synthesized UHF radios
110 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Host/Cntl Settings
ENTER
Host/Cntl
1) CNTL A
2) CNTL B
3) CNTL C
ENTER
DONE
ENTER
Controller (x)
Enter Unit
Number xxx
ENTER
Controller (x)
(cust emulation) unit # xxx
Host Name
Enter up to 16 characters/Numbers for a name.
ENTER
Emulation (x)
Enter Unit
1) Native
2) 3270
3) 5250
4) VT/ANSI
Telnet (x)
1) Enabled
2) Disabled
ENTER
ENTER
3) Direct Connect (6400, 5055)
The first option if exercising TCP/IP stack is 1) Radio Setup. Once selected, enter your network name or LAN ID.
If using a 902 MHz radio module, use the up and down arrows to pick the
Direct Sequence (DS) and Channel configuration. If using a Synthesized
UHF radio, select possible frequencies for your radio module from the list.
The 2) Host/Cntl option changes the host setting to designate up to three host computers for each 6400 Computer or 5055 PC. Each host is assigned a separate priority level (1, 2, or 3). When powered on, the 6400
Computer or 5055 PC seeks host A. If host A is not available, then the unit seeks host B; if host B is unavailable, the unit then logs onto host C.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
111
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
When designating additional hosts for the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC, you must:
S Tell the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC the host type of each host computer: (3270, 5250, or VT/ANSI).
S Tell the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC the name of each host.
Note: Selections in these menus apply only to the current session. Use
4) Session Menu to verify or change the current session.
TCP/IP Stack Options
Direct
1) Radio Setup
2) Host Setup
[1] [2]
For 802.11 Radios Only
Radio Setup
Network Name xxxx
Enter up to 34 characters for a name
ENTER
For Non 802.11 Radios
Radio Setup
LAN xx
Radio Setup
Radio Config#
Only if a “radio cfg“ file is present on the terminal.
Host
1) Host A
2) Host B
3) Host C
ENTER
Host Name (x)
Host emulation
Host Name
Enter up to 64 character/numbers for a name
ENTER
Emulation (x)
1)
2) 3270
3) 5250
4) VT/ANSI
Set Mode/Channel
is for RM60
(902 MHz) radios
ENTER (5055 -- continue to Host/Cntl setups)
Set Mode/Channel
Use Cursor Up and Down Keys
To Adjust
DS xxxx channel xx
Set Frequency
Use Cursor Up and Down Keys
To Adjust xxxxxxxxx
Set Frequency is for
Synthesized UHF radios
ENTER (continue to Host/Cntl setups)
112 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
3) Direct Connect (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 with TE/IP)
To set these options, select 3) Direct Connect > 2) Host Setup > 1) Host
A. Use the Emulation (A) option to tell the terminal the type of each host computer. Default is 3270.
Note: You can also set the emulation type through the 2) Data Stream option on the 3) Protocol Opts menu.
Controller Type
1)
2)
3) Direct Connect
[3]
Direct Connect
1)
2) Host Setup
Host
1) Host A
2) Host B
3) Host C
[2]
2) Host B and
3) Host C are for
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
ENTER
Host Name (x)
Host emulation
Unit # xxx
Host Name
Enter up to 64 character/numbers for a name
ENTER
Port Number (x)
Unit # xxx is for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 and appears if RTC over TCP is enabled.
If you want to use a port other than 23, enter that port here. Range is 0–65535.
Note: If the Native protocol is selected,
RTC over TCP cannot be disabled.
23
These two boxes are for
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
ENTER
Emulation<A, B, or C>
1) Native
2) 3270
3) 5250
4) VT/ANSI
ENTER
Emulation<A, B, or C>
1) RTC over TCP
ENTER
Emulation<A, B, or C>
Enter Unit
Number: xxx
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
113
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
2) Barcode Parms (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020)
The 2) Barcode Parms (parameters) menus designate whether you are using a bar code scanner and scan options.
Barcode Parms
1) Code 39 Encoded
2)
3) Concatenate
4) RS232 Stream
5) Stream Scan
6) Scan All Flds
4) RS232 Stream is blank for 5020
114
1) Code 39 Encoded
By default, 1) Code39 Encoded is disabled. When you enable this option, the key press sequences for Encoded Code 39 are used. For more information, see Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning.”
3) Concatenate
Each bar code read is added to the end of the previous bar code read until the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, or 5020 Terminal meets a condition forcing transmission to the host.
When this option is OFF, each bar code read is placed at the beginning of the current input field. After a bar code is placed in a field, any subsequent read replaces the first read.
Note: If you access the TE configuration menus when 4) RS232 Stream is enabled, all RS-232 data received during this time is lost. Only the data arriving from the COM1 port on the hand-held terminal is received.
4) RS232 Stream (blank for 5020)
If this option is enabled, the terminal watches the RS-232 port for activity in which the terminal reads in the RS-232 data and sends it to the host.
This enables support for fixed-station scanners or scales that send only
RS-232 data without having the host send an extended command to enable the RS-232 port. Default for 4) RS232 Stream is disabled. For information about setting scanner options when this is enabled, see Chapter 2,
“Using Terminal Emulation Applications.”
5) Stream Scan
If the scanned bar code is too big for the input field, the overflow information appears in the next field and continues until the entire bar code is entered. When this option is OFF, and the scanned bar code is too big for the input field, the overflow information is dropped.
6) Scan All Flds
When this option is selected, the scanner is enabled when the cursor is in an input field. When this option is OFF, the host computer must enable the scanner for each input field that requires scanned data.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
2) Barcode Parms (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31,
CV60)
Selecting 2) Barcode Parms displays either the Scanner Type menu or the
Scan Options menu, pending on your terminal:
S For the 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals,
Selecting 2) Barcode Parms displays the Scanner Type menu.
S For the 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals,
Selecting 2) Barcode Parms displays the Scan Options menu.
Scanner Type (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Use the Scanner Type menu to designate the type of bar code scanner. To make a selection, press the numeric key corresponding to the desired option, then press [Enter] to access the Scan Options menu.
Note: If 1) No Scanner is chosen, the remaining scanner and bar code options can be set. Then, if a scanner is used at a later time, only the scanner type needs to be designated. Selected options are highlighted on the display. Press a key corresponding to that option to deselect a selected option.
Scanner Type
1) No Scanner
2) Wand
3) Laser
4) Wand Emulate
5) Auto Detect
2) Wand,
4) Wand Emulate, and
5) Auto Detect
are for 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
Scan Options
Use the Scan Options menu to assign scan options, enable bar code symbologies to use (the terminal can only decode the enabled symbologies), and set options for each enabled bar code symbology, such as the bar code lengths. Press [Enter] to advance to other Scan Options menus.
Scan Options
1) Redundancy
2) MOD 10 Check
3) Concatenate
4) BC Type Char
5) Stream Scan
6) Scan All Flds
7) More
1) Redundancy is for 6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
3) Concatenate is for 6400, 5055, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60
4) BC Type Char is for
6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
1) Redundancy (6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
This option requires two identical scans of a bar code, one right after another, before the terminal accepts the scan as valid.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
115
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
2) Mod 10 Check
When you select this option, a check digit is added at the end of the bar code after a good read for transmission to the host. The host can then validate the transmitted data using the check. This feature is not needed with modem transmission protocols.
The bar code number is divided by 10, until the number (or modulus) is less than 10. If the modulus subtracted from 10 (remainder) is equal to zero, then the bar code number is valid.
3) Concatenate (6400, 5055, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Each bar code read is added to the end of the previous bar code read until the 6400, 5055, or 700 Series Terminal meets a condition forcing transmission to the host.
When this option is OFF, each bar code read is placed at the beginning of the current input field. After a bar code is placed in a field, any subsequent read replaces the first read.
4) BC Type Char (6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
This adds a character associated with the bar code type at the beginning of the scanned bar code. See page 366 for bar code type characters.
5) Stream Scan
If the scanned bar code is too big for the input field, the overflow information appears in the next field and continues until the entire bar code is entered. When this option is OFF, and the scanned bar code is too big for the input field, the overflow information is dropped.
6) Scan All Flds
When this option is selected, the scanner is enabled when the cursor is in an input field. When this option is OFF, the host computer must enable the scanner for each input field that requires scanned data.
7) More
This brings you additional scanning options that adjust scanning timeout and characters sent before and after the scanned data.
S 1) Scan Timeout (59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Use this option to adjust the scanning timeout period from 1 to 200 seconds. When using a proximity-detect scanner, you can shorten the timeout period to speed up scanning while also reducing the duration of errant scans. With a long-range scanner, you may want to increase the timeout period to ensure sufficient aiming time.
Scan Timeout
Seconds
XXX
116 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S 2) Scan PreChar and 3) Scan PostChar
Enter a hexadecimal value from 00–FF for the character to be sent preceding the scanned data or after the scanned data. The value of 20h means that pre- or post-characters are not sent.
S 4) ParmsBySession (5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
When enabled, the symbology parameters under 1) Set-up Parms >
2) Barcode Parms configure Windows CE terminal scanning devices on a per-session basis.
When disabled (default), the 2) Barcode Parms option is ignored. The
TE 2000 application does not configure symbology parameters for Windows CE terminal scanning devices. The settings selected via the Windows CE System Data Collection applet are used for both TE 2000 sessions. You can configure the symbology parameters under 1) Set-up
Parms > 2) Barcode Parms , however these are not used.
S 5) Use Wedge Mode (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
This causes the TE 2000 application to use the system Scanners and
Symbologies settings. All scanned data will come into the TE 2000 application from the system Virtual Wedge per the Virtual Wedge settings as if the scanned bar code characters were typed into the keyboard.
When Use Wedge Mode is enabled, none of the TE 2000 menu options for scanning will function, such as the following:
S Auto Tab Scan, Aut Entr Scn, BRT Auto Enter, ANY Auto Enter,
Scan PreChar, Scan PostChar, symbology enable, disable, mix-max or fixed lengths, drop leading, or trailing characters.
Scanner data will not be inhibited when in a non-scannable field in TE
2000 3270 or TE 2000 5250.
When Use Wedge Mode is enabled, all of the system Scanners and
Symbologies capabilities will be available. This means that all of the symbology options and grid options for special edits can be used.
Use Wedge Mode can be enabled in TE_SETTINGS.INI by session but only the setting for Session 1 will be used. The Session 1 setting will be propogated across all sessions. If you enable Use Wedge Mode in TE
2000 menus and then save the parameters, you will see the
TE_SETTINGS.INI contains the same Use Wedge Mode value for all sessions.
Scan Options
1) Scan Timeout
2) Scan PreChar
3) Scan PostChar
4) ParmsBySession
5) Use Wedge Mode
1) Scan Timeout is for 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
4) ParmsBySession is for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
5) Use Wedge Mode is for 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
117
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Sys 1 UPCE is for
6400, 17XX, 11XX,
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
3) Extended is blank for 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
6) Relax Std is for
59XX, 17XX, 11XX
UPC
1) Enabled
2) Add-On 2
3) Add-On 5
4) Sys 1 UPCE
5) Sys 0 UPCE
6) Expand E To A
Code 39
1) Enabled
2) Chk Digit
3) Extended
4) Encoded
5) Auto-Encoded
6) Relax Std
7) Full ASCII
[6]
RELAX CODE 39
1) Quiet zone
2) Data Decode
3) Element Decode
4) START Decode
Scan Options to Enable Bar Codes
There are menus of options to enable (or disable) various bar code symbologies. To enable a bar code, press the numeric key corresponding to the number of the bar code symbology (shown on menu), then press [Enter].
After enabling a particular bar code, options may have to be selected for the bar code. After selecting the desired options, set the length requirements (such as minimum and maximum length, fixed lengths, leading and trailing character options, etc.).
Once the length requirements are set, the terminal returns to the same
Scan Options menu. Choose another bar code symbology from that menu or press [Enter] to advance to the next Scan Options menu.
Scan Options
1) UPC
2) EAN
3) Code 39
4) Code 128
5) Codabar
[1] [2]
EAN
1) Enabled
2) Add-On 2
3) Add-On 5
4) Expand 8 To 13
[3] [4]
Code 128
1) Enabled
2) UCC/EAN
3) No UCC Type
4) UCC F1 Value
[5]
Codabar
1) Codabar
2) ABC Codabar
2) Add-On 2 and
3) Add-On 5
if using 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, or
CV60, see the follow-
ing note.
2) ABC Codabar
is for 59XX, 17XX,
11XX
Note: For the 700 Series, CK30, CK31, or CV60 Terminal, this implementation of the TE 2000 application processes EAN 8 and UPC E bar codes in the same manner. The type character for EAN 8 with Add-On 2 or Add-On 5 will decode as UPC E with Add-On 2 or Add-On 5, respectively. The bar code type character will also indicate UPC E with Add-On
2 or Add-On 5, respectively. Consequently, the drop leading and trailing
UPC options will be used when an EAN 8 with Add-On 2 or Add-On 5 is decoded.
118 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Scan Options 2 (Additional Bar Codes)
This menu offers additional bar code selections. After enabling a bar code symbology, various options, including length can be set.
When all options are set, the display returns to the Scan Options 2 menu.
This menu and the bar code symbologies to be enabled are shown below.
When all needed bar code symbologies are enabled, press [Enter] to return to the Scan Options menu. Press [Enter] again to back out and return to the 1) Set-up Parms menu.
5) Code 11 is for
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60
Scan Options 2
1) Plessey
2) Str 2of5
3) Int 2of5
4) CI 2of5
5) Code 11
6) Code 93
3) MOD11 Chk is blank for 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
4) Allow Alpha is for
59XX, 17XX, 11XX
Plessey
1) Enabled
2) MOD10 Chk
3) MOD11 Chk
4) Allow Alpha
[1]
[2]
Str 2of5
1) Enabled
2) Disabled
Int 2of5
1) Enabled
2) Chk Digit
[3] [4]
CI 2of5
1) Enabled
2) Disabled
Code 11
1) Enabled
2) Chk Dig 1
3) Chk Dig 2
[5]
[6]
Code 93
1) Enabled
2) Disabled
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
119
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
120
Lengths Options
The Lengths Options menus determine the maximum and minimum length for a specific bar code symbology. Setting the length of enabled bar codes helps the terminal determine if a scanned bar code is valid and improves response time. The length options must be set for each enabled bar code. Enter this information in the order listed.
1
Key in the maximum length (0–99), then press [Enter]. For the 700 Se-
ries Computer, the CK30 Handheld Computer, or the CV60 Vehicle Mount
Computer, set this as high as you intend to set the minimum length.
2
Key in the minimum length (0–99), then press [Enter].
3
Fixed-length entries override the maximum and minimum length entries (minimum and maximum are used for chosen codes). If fixed lengths are not needed for the enabled bar code, enter zero (0).
Enter the fixed length (0–99), then press [Enter]. Up to four prompts to set another fixed length will appear. Enter zero (0) for the unused fixed lengths. Note that I 2 of 5 only supports fixed lengths 1 and 2. Entries
in 3 and 4 are ignored.
4
Enter the number of characters (0–15) to drop from the front (leading) edge of the scanned bar code, then press [Enter].
5
Enter the number of characters (0–15) to drop from the rear (trailing) edge of the scanned bar code, then press [Enter].
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Exceptions
The following exceptions apply only to the 700 Series, CK30, CK31, or
CV60 Terminals:
S Codabar, Str 2of5, Int 2of5, and CI 2of5 bar code symbologies set the length, if fixed-length 1 is non-zero, to three fixed-length entries equal to the first three fixed-lengths (fourth fixed-length is ignored). Otherwise, the length is set to greater than or equal to the minimum length.
S Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, and Plessey set the length to any length greater than or equal to the minimum length.
S UPC/EAN and Code 11 lengths are not used — ANY is allowed.
S Codabar options will not decode less than two data characters (four characters including Start and Stop).
S CI 2of5 options override Str 2of5 options, if both CI 2of5 and Str 2of5 are selected.
S EAN Add-on settings override UPC add-on settings, if both UPC and
EAN options are selected.
S If “Sys 1 UPCE” or “Sys 0 UPCE” is selected, then both UPCE number system 0 and 1 are enabled.
S Code 11 does not support “No check digits.” Select either 1 check digit
(Chk Dig 1) or 2 check digits (Chk Dig 2) according to your bar codes.
If neither check digit option is selected, then 2 check digits will be used as a default.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
After all of the length options are set for the enabled bar code, the display returns to either the Scan Options menu or the Scan Options 2 menu
(pending on from which menu the bar code was enabled).
(bar code type)
Max Length xx
(bar code type)
Max Length xx
Min Length xx
(bar code type)
Max Length xx
Min Length xx
Fix Length 1 xx
(bar code type)
Max Length xx
Min Length xx
Fix Length 1 xx
Fix Length 2 xx
Fix Length 3 xx
(bar code type)
Max Length xx
Min Length xx
Fix Length 1 xx
Fix Length 2 xx
Fix Length 3 xx
Fix Length 4 xx
(bar code type)
Drop Leading xx
(bar code type)
Max Length xx
Min Length xx
Fix Length 1 xx
Fix Length 2 xx
(bar code type)
Drop Leading xx
Drop Trailing xx
3) Protocol Opts
Use the 3) Protocol Opts menu to designate the type of terminal emulation the host supports. You can also use it to designate additional commands and command sets.
Protocol Opts
1) Host View Sze
2) Data Stream
3) Extended Cmds
4) 5250
5) 3270
6) VT/ANSI
7) Native
7) Native is blank if UDP Plus or TCP/IP
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
121
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
1) Host View Sze
The 1) Host View Sze option tells the terminal the format of display information sent from the host. The display viewing size equals 1920 (the number of rows times the number of columns). The exception is with
5250 Terminal Emulation which has an additional row for error messages and therefore has 2000 characters.
The default setting for Native Terminal Emulation is 120 columns by 16 rows (equals 1920). The default for VT/ANSI Terminal Emulation is 80 columns by 24 rows (equals 1920). The default for 5250 Terminal Emulation is 80 columns by 24 rows (25 with error messages).
The default for 3270 Terminal Emulation depends on what the original setting was before changing to the 3270 Terminal Emulation. Remember that the total characters must equal 1920 (number of rows by the number of columns) unless using 5250 Terminal Emulation with error messages.
Enter a number between 1–80 to change the width. Press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu. “xx” is the width.
Host View Sze
Width xx
2) Data Stream
Enter the number corresponding to the type of host computer to specify the data stream used. Press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu.
Data Stream
1) Native
2) 3270
3) 5250
4) VT/ANSI
1) Native is blank if UDP Plus or TCP/IP
Note: For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals, you can also set the emulation type through the 1) ITC Server or 3) Direct Connect options.
122 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
For information about TE 2000 3270, VT/ANSI, or Native terminal emulation, see these manuals:
S TE 2000 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
(P/N 977-055-003)
S TE 2000 VT/ANSI) Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
(P/N 977-055-005)
S Native Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
(P/N: 977-055-006)
3) Extended Cmds
Use 3) Extended Cmds to enable or disable extended commands. By default, extended commands are disabled. For more information about extended commands, see Chapter 7, “Extended Commands.”
When this option is enabled, the host computer can change or use RS-232 communications (such as printers), bar code options, display screen and font size, and error tone features of the unit. Press [1] to enable or press
[2] to disable the extended command list. Press [Enter] to return to the
3) Protocol Opts menu.
Extended Cmds
1) Enabled
2) Disabled
4) 5250 (Options)
The 4) 5250 menu enables the following features if the 5250 communica-
tion protocol is used. Press the appropriate number to enable an option, then press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu.
1) Beep On Error
Causes the buzzer to emit when an error condition occurs; does not lock up the keyboard.
2) Auto Tab Scan
Causes the cursor to automatically tab forward to the next input field when a good scan is obtained.
3) Telnet (blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Handles the telnet option negotiations to establish a session with an appropriate telnet server.
Note: 3) Telnet is not changeable if TCP/IP is used.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
123
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Device Name
Enters a physical name for a device. This is 1–10 characters with allowable values of A–Z, a–z, 0–9, the pound symbol (#), the dollar sign ($), the ampersand (@), and an underscore ( _ ). 5250E RFC 1572 Support.
Note: The first character of 4) Device Name cannot start with a number
(0–9).
The following screen displays after a physical name is entered.
S 1) 5250 Allow Alias
If this is enabled, and your current device name returns an error in use, then the terminal attempts to append a “$” (dollar sign) to the end of your device name to initiate a session to your host. When disabled, the device name is resent to the host for the host to send a FIN packet to the terminal, causing the terminal to reboot. This continues until the device name is no longer in use.
Allow Alias
1) 5250 Allow Alias
124
5) Allow NAWS (Negotiate About Window Size)
When enabled, the terminal will support Telnet option 31 if prompted.
When disabled, this option will return a “won’t do” message.
6) Skip FldExit
When this option is enabled, a field that would generate an error code of
“0020” (field exit required) when [Enter] was pressed will now send the field data.
The legacy TE application would send the entire field so a “7” entered into a 3-character blank-filled field would transmit as “7bb”, a “12” would transmit as “12b”. The TE 2000 application strips the field fill characters so “7” transmits as a “7”, “12” transmits as a “12” and so forth.
Note A “b” indicates a one-byte space.
7) More
Select 7) More to modify the function of the period key or backspace key.
S 1) Period–Comma (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X)
Select 1) Period–Comma to change the period key ( . ) to a comma.
S 2) Destructive BS
Press [2] to use the backspace key to remove (delete) any previouslykeyed data characters. When disabled, the backspace key goes back one character, but does not delete that character.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S 3) Lock Error Msg
The TE 2000 cursor modes ensure that the cursor location of the screen and its surrounding data is visible. The 5250 error message line is typically not visible because the error message line 24 is too far away from the cursor location. Enabling this option causes a 5250 Write Error
Code command error message to be visible by placing the cursor on the error message line. When the RESET key is pressed, the cursor is restored to where it would have been if this option was not enabled (the location specified by a 5250 Insert Cursor command) and the cursor mode option then causes that area of the screen to be visible.
Disabling this option causes normal behaviour for the 5250 Write Error
Code command error message. The Write Error Code command error message is displayed on the error message line of the screen and the cursor is placed at the location specified by the host Insert Cursor command. The cursor mode then causes the cursor area of the screen to be visible.
S 4) Use Color
When enabled, the TE 2000 5250 application emulates single byte
IBM-5292-2 and double byte IBM-5555-C01 terminals. Monochrome was and still emulates single byte IBM-5291-1 and double byte
IBM-5555-B01 terminals.
The 5250 Column Separator attribute is emulated using the ExtraLight font attribute which may not be noticeable on some terminals.
5250
1) Beep On Error
2) Auto Tab Scan
3) Telnet
4) Device Name
5) Allow NAWS
6) Skip FldExit
7) More
[7]
5250
1) Period-Comma
2) Destructive BS
3) Lock Error Msg
4) Use Color
3) Telnet is blank for 5020,
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
1) Period-Comma is for
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,
2475, 248X
5) 3270 (Options)
The 5) 3270 menu enables the following features if the 3270 communica-
tion protocol is used. Press the appropriate number to enable an option, then press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu.
1) Keybrd Unlock
Unlocks the keyboard after the [PA1], [PA2], or [CLEAR] keys are pressed. (Normally the keyboard remains locked, until unlocked or the terminal is reset by the host, after any of these keys are pressed.) When using Token Ring on your host, the tab key also unlocks the keyboard.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
125
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
126
2) Auto Tab Scan
Causes the cursor to tab forward to the next input field when a good scan is obtained.
Note: 2) Auto Tab Scan cannot be enabled at the same time as 3) Auto
Entr Scan.
3) Auto Entr Scan
Actuates the <Enter> function when a good scan is obtained. Note that this
cannot be enabled at the same time as Auto Tab Scan.
Note: 3) Auto Entr Scan cannot be enabled at the same time as 2) Auto
Tab Scan.
4) Emulate 3210 (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
The Intermec 3210 emulation option allows the 3270 keyboard to emulate an RT3210 Hand-Held Computer, performing the same functions. For full 3210 compatibility, disable buffering the keyboard, set cursor to lazy mode, and set the LCD Parms to Key Uppercase.
5) Telnet (blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Handles telnet option negotiations to establish a session with an appropriate telnet server.
Note: 5) Telnet cannot be changed if you are using TCP/IP.
6) Origin Set
When enabled, resets the screen origin when an exclamation mark is found in the data stream.
7) More
Select 7) More for additional features.
S 1) Device Name
Enters a physical name for a device. This is 1–10 characters with allowable values of A–Z, a–z, 0–9, the pound symbol (#), the dollar sign ($), the ampersand (@), and an underscore ( _ ). 3270E RFC 2355 Support.
Note: The first character of 1) Device Name cannot start with a number (0–9).
S 2) Allow NAWS (Negotiate About Window Size)
When enabled, the terminal will support Telnet option 31 if prompted.
When disabled, this option will return a “won’t do” message.
S 3) BRT Auto Enter
When enabled, if the last field on a screen has the reverse video attribute set, then when that field is exactly filled, the terminal will automatically send the data for this screen back to the host with an “Enter AID” code.
If disabled, the screen will wait for the user to hit the AID key prior to sending data back to the host. Default is disabled.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S 4) Any Auto Enter
When enabled, an automatic “enter” occurs when a reverse video attribute field is filled by keying or scanning data. Any extra scanned data is discarded. If disabled, the screen waits for the user to hit the AID key prior to sending data back to the host. Default is disabled.
3270
1) Keybrd Unlock
2) Auto Tab Scan
3) Auto Entr Scn
4) Emulate 3210
5) Telnet
6) Origin Set
7) More
[7]
3270
1) Device Name
2) Allow NAWS
3) BRT Auto Enter
4) Any Auto Enter
4) Emulate 3210 is for
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
5) Telnet is blank for
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
6) VT/ANSI
The 6) VT/ANSI menu enables the following features if the VT/ANSI
communication protocol is used.
VT/ANSI
1) DEL To BS
2) CR To CRLF
3) Auto Entr Scn
4) Auto Tab Scan
5) Local Echo
6) AnswerBack
7) More
1) DEL to BS (Delete to Backspace)
Causes the [CLEAR] key to delete the character to the left of the cursor position, and moves the cursor back one space. When this option is not enabled, the [CLEAR] key deletes the character at the cursors position.
Default is disabled.
2) CR to CRLF (Carriage Return to Carriage Return/Line Feed)
Causes <Enter> to perform a carriage return and a line feed. When this option is not enabled, <Enter> performs a carriage return only. Default is
disabled.
3) Auto Entr Scn (Auto Enter Scan)
Actuates the <Enter> function whenever a good scan is obtained. Default is
enabled for version 6.60 or greater, otherwise the default is disabled.
Note: 3) Auto Entr Scn cannot be enabled at the same time as 4) Auto
Tab Scan.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
127
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Auto Tab Scan
Causes the terminal to automatically tab to the next input field when a good scan is obtained. Default is disabled.
Note: 4) Auto Tab Scan cannot be enabled at the same time as 3) Auto
Entr Scan.
5) Local Echo
Allows characters to be displayed from terminal memory but not from host memory. Default is disabled.
6) AnswerBack
Enables you to enter a character string that is sent to the host in response to an inquiry (hexadecimal 05). The range is 0–30. Default is null string for
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX,
11XX Terminals and the terminal’s serial number for 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 Terminals.
AnswerBack
Message
128
If you enter any of the following control characters, it is sent out. Note that
control strings count as one character.
<ACK>
<BEL>
<BS>
<DC2>
<DC3>
<EOT>
<ESC>
<GS>
<HT>
<DC4> <ETB> <LF>
<SI>
<SO>
<SOH>
<CAN> <DLE> <ETC> <NAK> <STX>
<CR> <EM> <FF> <NUL> <SUB>
<DC1> <ENQ> <FS> <RS> <SYN>
<US>
<VT>
7) More
Calls up the following VT/ANSI More Options screen.
VT/ANSI More Options
1) Screen Lock
2) DiscreteBells
3) UserKey Locked
4) RS232 Setup
5) VT220 Mode
6) Lock Mode
7) More
2) DiscreteBells is for 6400,
5055, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
4) RS232 Setup is for 6400,
5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX,
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
S 1) Screen Lock
Sets and locks the screen to a specified size. Any characters outside this screen size are ignored by the hand-held unit. Default is disabled.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S 2) DiscreteBells (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
If enabled, the terminal beeps for each bell character the host sends. If disabled, the unit ignores the bell characters if it is already beeping. De-
fault is disabled.
S 3) UserKey Locked
If set, the host ignores a host command defining the Function keys. De-
fault is disabled.
S 4) RS232 Setup (6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60)
When using the media copy command, use this option to set up the communications port, then press [Enter] to return to 3) Protocol Opts.
S 1) RS232 Baud Rate
Select 1200, 2400, 4800 (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX),
[9600], 19200, 38400,
57600, or 115200 (5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
S 2) RS232 Parity (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Select from Odd, Even, or [None].
S 3) RS232 Stop Bits (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Select either [1]- or 2-bits.
S 4) RS232 Data Bits (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Select either 7- or [8]-bit.
S 5) RS232 Flow (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Select from [None], DTR or XON/XOFF.
RS232 Setup
1) RS232 Baud Rate
2) RS232 Parity
3) RS232 Stop Bits
4) RS232 Data Bits
5) RS232 Flow
2) RS232 Parity,
3) RS232 Stop Bits,
4) RS232 Data Bits, and
5) RS232 Flow are for 6400, 5055,
59XX, 17XX, 11XX
1) 1200,
2) 2400, and
3) 4800 are for 6400,
5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
7) 57600 and
8) 115200 are for
5020, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60
RS232 Baud Rate
1) 1200
2) 2400
3) 4800
4) 9600
5) 19200
6) 38400
7) 57600
8) 115200
RS232 Stop Bits
1) 1
2) 2
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
RS232 Parity
1) Odd
2) Even
3) None
RS232 Data Bits
1) 7
2) 8
RS232 Flow
1) None
2) DTR
3) XON/XOFF
[5]
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
129
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S 5) VT220 Mode
Selects operating in character or block mode. Select a choice, then press
[Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu. Default is 1) Char.
S 1) Char (Default)
Sets the mode to Character mode. The terminal sends each character as it is pressed.
S 2) Block
Sets the mode to Line Edit (block) mode. The terminal sends a block of characters when a terminating key is pressed.
S 3) Transmit BS
When enabled, pressing the backspace key sends a backspace to the host for the host to echo back to the terminal. When disabled, the backspace key is handled locally on the terminal by doing a destructive backspace to the printed data characters on the display.
VT220 Mode
1) Char
2) Block
3) Transmit BS
S 6) Lock Mode
Use the Mode key on the terminal’s keyboard or keypad to toggle between Line Edit (block) mode and Character mode. Use the Lock Mode option to disable the Mode key in the VT/ANSI data stream. By default,
Lock mode is disabled.
S 7) More
Selects the telnet option for the VT/ANSI data stream.
VT/ANSI
1) Telnet
2) Term Setup
3) Send XON
4) Keypad Mode
5) VT Cursor Mode
6) Terminal Mode
7) More
1) Telnet is blank for 5020, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60
S 1) Telnet (blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Handles telnet option negotiations to establish a session with an appropriate telnet server. Note this cannot be changed if using
TCP/IP.
130 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S 2) Term Setup
Selects the compliance level of the terminal being emulated. Default is
VT340 to support all commands. Make a selection, then press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu.
Term Setup
1) ANSI
2) VT100
3) VT220
4) VT320
5) VT340
6) IBM 330X
S 3) Send XON
Default is enabled which indicates that when an RIS is received from the host, the XON character is returned after compliance of this command. Default is enabled.
S 4) Keypad Mode
Determines what is returned to the host when keys are pressed.
Default is 2) Numeric.
S 1) Application
Generates application ESC sequences for the key code. For help, refer to your VT manual.
S 2) Numeric
Generates ANSI cursor control ESC sequences that correspond to what appears on the face of the keys.
Keypad Mode
1) Application
2) Numeric
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
131
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S 5) VT Cursor Mode
Determines what is returned to the host when cursor keys are hit.
Default is 2) Cursor.
S 1) Application
Generates application ESC sequences for the key code. For help, refer to your VT manual.
S 2) Cursor
Generates ANSI cursor control ESC sequences that correspond to what appears on the face of the cursor key.
VT Cursor Mode
1) Application
2) Cursor
S 6) Terminal Mode (VT220/320 only)
Sets the terminal mode to 7-bit or 8-bit. This option sets the mode
VT-series terminals used to exchange escape sequences, control commands, and status reports with an application. Default is 1) 7-Bit.
Terminal Mode
1) 7-Bit
2) 8-Bit
132
S 7) More
Below are the additional options:
VT/ANSI
1) Use PC Char Set
2) Allow NAWS
3) Terminal ID
4) Auto Wrap
5) Allow LineMode
6) Do Gold Key
7) More
S 1) Use PC Char Set
Select this option to default the font character to the terminal’s character set instead of a DEC terminal character set.
S 2) Allow NAWS (Negotiate About Window Size)
When enabled, the terminal supports Telnet option 31 if prompted. When disabled, this option returns a “won’t do” message.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S 3) Terminal ID
This enables the entry of a character string sent back to the host in response to IAC SB terminal type SE. The range is 0 through 30, with null string as the default. If set to null, then ANSI, VT100,
VT220, VT320, or VT340 is returned as selected.
Terminal ID
Terminal Type
S 4) Auto Wrap
If enabled, graphic display characters received when the cursor is at the right margin appear on the next line. The screen scrolls up if the cursor is at the end of the scrolling region.
If disabled (default), graphic characters received when the cursor is at the right margin replace previously displayed characters.
S 5) Allow LineMode
When enabled, the terminal prompts to negotiate to the default
LineMode RFC 1184. When disabled, the terminal does not negotiate to LineMode RFC 1184.
S 6) Do Gold Key
When enabled, the F1 key acts as the Gold key on a VT/ANSI terminal. This sends the F1 key value, which then “hides” the next key pressed, but puts its value into a buffer to send to the host (default).
When disabled, the F1 key acts as a function key.
Note: The Gold key action is only invoked when the terminal is executing in block mode.
S 7) More
Select this for more menu options:
1) Do UTF8
Select this option to enable UTF-8 encoding as defined by RFC
2279. If the character is between 0 and 0x7f, then nothing changes. If the character is between 0xc0 and 0xfd, then convert the character to a displayable character using the following formula where x is the first character in the string and y is the second character.
(x – 0xc0) *2**6 + (y – 0x80)
If disabled (default), then characters are translated regularly as defined by the current gl, gr character sets selected.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
133
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Note: 7) Native is enabled by default to preserve backwards compatibility.
7) Native (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, and 5055 with WTP,
59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
S For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X with WTP:
When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing [FnL] [7]
(Home), while pressing [F2] is equivalent to pressing [F1], etc. When disabled, [F1] is equivalent to [F1], [F2] is equivalent to [F2], etc.
S For 2435A Terminals with 48-key keyboards:
When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing Green
>
,
H
.(Home), while pressing [F2] is equivalent to pressing Orange
>
,
1
, etc. When disabled, [F1] is equivalent to pressing Orange
>
,
1
,
[F2] is equivalent to pressing Orange
>
,
2
, etc.
S For 6400 Computers with WTP on a 51-key keyboard:
When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [0], while pressing [F2] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [1], etc. When disabled,
[F1] is equivalent to [Blue] [1], [F2] is equivalent to [Blue] [2], etc.
S For 6400 Computers with WTP on a 41-key keyboard:
When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [Space].
S For 5055 Terminals with WTP:
When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [0], while pressing [F2] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [1], etc. When disabled,
[F1] is equivalent to [Blue] [1], [F2] is equivalent to [Blue] [2], etc.
S For 59XX, 17XX, 11XX,
When enabled, pressing [F1] is equal to [Black] [0] and [F2] is equal to
[Black] [1], etc. When disabled, [F1] is equal to [Black] [1], [F2] is equal to [Black] [2], etc.
Native Mode
1) F1 is FUNC-0
134 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Display Opts (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020, 6400, 59XX,
17XX, 11XX)
4) Display Opts adjusts the backlight timer, the cursor appearance on the display, or the remote display.
Display Opts
1) Backlight
2) Cursor Mode
3) Remote Disp
1) Backlight is for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,
2475, 248X, 6400, 17XX, 11XX
3) Remote Disp is for 17XX
1) Backlight (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 17XX, 11XX)
Use the up and down arrows to select “Off” or a number from “1–60” for
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X Terminals or from “1–255” for 6400, 17XX, and 11XX Terminals. This would dictate the number of seconds that the backlight stays on after a key is pressed.
Backlight Timer
Use Cursor Up
And Down Keys
To Adjust xxx
2) Cursor Mode
Selects the cursor style. After making a selection, press [Enter] to return to the 4) Display Opts menu. The cursor shape is shown between “>” and
“<”.
1) Underline Blink (blank for 5020)
Causes the underline character to appear and disappear in its current location.
2) Block Blink (blank for 5020)
Causes the block (J) character cursor to appear and disappear in its current location.
3) Underline (6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
This option provides a solid underline character to display the cursor’s current location.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
135
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Block (6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
This provides a reverse or highlighted block (J) character displaying the cursor’s current location.
Cursor Mode
1) Underline Blink
2) Block Blink
3) Underline
4) Block
> <
1) Underline Blink and
2) Block Blink
are blank for 5020
3) Underline and
4) Block
are for 6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
3) Remote Disp (17XX)
This menu allows communication to a remote display.
1) Enabled
Press this option to enable the remote display function.
2) Screen Size
Use this option to set the screen size of the remote display.
3) Remote Baud
Select the appropriate baud rate for the remote display: 9600, 19200, or
38400.
4) Remote Type
Use this option to identify the remote terminal: VT100, VT220, or ANSI.
Remote Display
1) Enabled
2) Screen Size
3) Remote Baud
4) Remote Type
136 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Display Opts (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
4) Display Opts adjusts the backlight timer, the cursor appearance on the display, or the remote display.
Display Opts
1) Backlight
2) Cursor Mode
3) Select Font
4)
5) Display Colors
6) Font Quality
7) More
1) Backlight is for 700 Series
6) Font Quality is for CK30,
CK31
Display Opts
1) Code Page
1) Backlight (700 Series)
Use the up and down arrows to select “Off” or a number from “1–60” for
700 Series Terminals. This would dictate the number of seconds that the backlight stays on after a key is pressed.
Backlight Timer
Use Cursor Up
And Down Keys
To Adjust xxx
2) Cursor Mode
Selects the cursor style. After making a selection, press [Enter] to return to the 4) Display Opts menu. The cursor shape is shown between “>” and
“<”.
1) Underline Blink
Causes the underline character to appear and disappear in its current location.
2) Block Blink
Causes the block (J) character cursor to appear and disappear in its current location.
3) Underline
This option provides a solid underline character to display the cursor’s current location.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
137
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Block
This provides a reverse or highlighted block (J) character displaying the cursor’s current location.
Cursor Mode
1) Underline Blink
2) Block Blink
3) Underline
4) Block
> <
3) Select Font
Selects a font type to appear on the display.
1) Lucida
This displays the font type in Lucida:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
2) Courier New
This displays the font type in Courier New:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
3) Courier New Bold
This displays the font type in Courier New with bold applied:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
4) Tahoma
This displays the font type in Tahoma:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Select Font
1) Lucida Console
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRXTUVWXYZ
2) Courier New
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
3) Courier New Bold
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
4) Tahoma
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
5) Display Colors
Adjusts foreground (text) or the background colors of the display.
Display Colors
1) Foreground RGB
2) Background RGB
3) Swap Fore/Back
138 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
1) Foreground RGB
Assigns a color setting for the foreground (text). Select a color in the first screen, which is then displayed in the second screen. In the second screen, enter a numeric value from 0–255.
Foreground RGB
1) Red
2) Blue
3) Green
Foreground RGB
Red
XXX
(or Blue or Green)
2) Background RGB
Assigns a color setting for the background. Select a color in the first screen, which then is displayed in the second screen. In the second screen, enter a numeric value from 0–255.
Background RGB
1) Red
2) Blue
3) Green
Background RGB
Red
XXX
(or Blue or Green)
3) Swap Fore/Back
Renders the original foreground color as the new background color and the original background color as the new foreground color.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
139
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
6) Font Quality (CK30, CK31)
Selects either a standard font quality or a clear type font quality to appear on the display.
1) Standard
This displays the font in standard quality.
2) Clear Type
This displays the font in the clear type quality.
Font Quality
1) Standard
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRXTUVWXYZ
2) Clear Type
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
7) More
Select this for more menu options:
1) Code Page
Selects a language in which the code page is to appear.
S 1) English
This displays text in the English language, — code page 37.
S 2) Cyrillic (Russian)
This displays text in the Cyrillic (Russian) language — code page 855.
S 3) Greek
This displays text in the Greek language — code page 1253.
S 4) Hebrew
This displays text in the Hebrew language — code page 862.
S 5) Central Europe
This displays text in the Polish language — code page 1250.
S 6) Latin 2
This displays text in the Latin language — code page 8859-2.
Code Page
1) English
2) Cyrillic
3) Greek
4) Hebrew
5) Central Europe
6) Latin 2
140 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
5) Radio Comm (Blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, and for 2415,
2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals without either an 802.1x Supplicant
Radio Driver or UDP Plus)
Note: Diagnostic modes disable data compression and are reserved for engineering tests.
Menus for 5) Radio Comm specify the communication protocol and speed in certain instances. Depending on circumstances, one of the two menus appear.
For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals with either an
802.1x Supplicant Radio Driver or UDP Plus
The following menu appears:
Radio Comm
1) User Auth
2) Disconnect Val
1) User Auth is for 2415, 2425,
2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals with an 802.1x supplicant radio
2) Disconnect Val is for 2415,
2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X
Terminals with UDP Plus
1) User Auth (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals with 802.1x supplicant radio driver)
When enabled, the terminal prompts for a user name and password before sending any radio data. When disabled, the terminal will use the machine authentication as set up in the firmware menus.
2) Disconnect Val (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals with UDP Plus)
The length of time in minutes that the terminal, after receiving an error from the network status, will continue to look for network errors before restarting. Enter a value from 1–10. Default is 2.
Disconnect Val
Minutes
X
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
141
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals
This menu enables or disables the SST diagnostic mode.
Protocol
1) SST
2) SST-Diag Mode
3) Security ID
3) Security ID is for Proxim radios
3) Security ID (Proxim radios)
This changes the radio security identification. Enter the new security ID
(up to 16 characters) twice. If the old security ID is not correct or if the second new security ID was not entered correctly, you will see the “unchanged” message on the bottom line of the display.
Protocol
Security ID
New Security ID
New Security ID
If the new security ID is entered correctly, the following will appear.
Protocol
Security ID changed.
Save parms then reboot terminal for change to take affect.
6) Cold Start (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX,
17XX, 11XX)
This resets all TE values to the stored configuration in CONFIG.DAT
and performs a cold-start on the terminal. Press [Y] to reboot the terminal, or press any other key to return to the 1) Set-up Parms menu.
Depending on the setting in the firmware menu of the terminal, after rebooting, the terminal opens to the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System.
Cold Start
Enter ‘Y’ to Cold Start terminal:
142 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
6) Exit TE2000 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
This returns control to the Windows operating system. The 700 Series and
CV60 Terminals prompt you for a password before displaying the Exit dialog. Either press [Y] or tap Yes to exit the TE 2000 application and return to the Windows operating system.
Exit TE2000
Enter ‘Y’ to Exit TE2000
CK30 700 Series, CK31, CV60
7) More
7) More provides the following additional setup parameters:
Set-UP Parms
1) Menu Password
2) Print Device
3) COM Select
2) Print Device is for 6400, 5020,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
3) COM Select is for 248X, 5055
1) Menu Password
This parameter enables menu password protection for the TE configuration menus. This provides added protection because once enabled, the password must be entered before any further activity can occur within the terminal emulation menu screens. The default is to have this option disabled.
To enable the password, press [1], then type “3193693” for the fixed password set by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The “1)” will change to
reverse video to indicate it is enabled. With this enabled, enter this password when you access the terminal emulation menu screens. Press [Enter] until you reach the Main Menu, then press 6) Exit Menus to return to the main terminal screen.
To disable the password, press [1] to display in normal viewing text. You do not need to enter a password to disable this function. Note that the
menu password can be set via a custom configuration. See Chapter 5, “Customizing Your Configuration,” for help on creating a custom configuration file.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
143
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
2) Print Device (6400, 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Establishes extended commands for the RS-232, IrDA, RF, or Pan printer drivers. Press [1] for the RS-232 driver (default), press [2] for the IrDA driver (6400, 5020, 700 Series, CV60), press [3] for the RF driver (5020); or press [4] for the Pan driver (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60).
Print Device
1) RS232 Print
2) IRDA Print
3) RF Print
4) Pan Print
1) RS232 Print is for 6400, 5020, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60
2) IRDA Print is for 6400, 5020, 700 Series,
CV60
3) RF Print is for 5020, 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
4) Pan Print is for 700 Series, CK30, CK31,
CV60
3) RF Print (5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Enter the IP address of the RF Printer to which the 5020 Terminal is to communicate. If you want to use a serial port other than port “23”, you may select from the range of 0–65535.
RF Print
Printer Address
RF Print
Printer Port
23
4) Pan Print (700 Series, CK30, CV60)
When selected, the print data is sent to the Bluetooth device specified in the registry. The registry is updated by using the Bluetooth Device Manager application to discover other Bluetooth devices.
Note: The TE 2000 application only supports Bluetooth devices attached to COM6.
144 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
3) COM Select (248X, 5055)
Selects which communications port to use for extended commands,
RS-232 communications, or media copy commands.
COM Select
1) COM 1
2) COM 2
2) LCD Parms (Parameters)
2) LCD Parms adjusts these Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) features:
S The screen size (number of rows displayed, and the number of characters displayed on each row).
S The screen mode (how the cursor positions itself on the display).
S Making all alphabetic character keystrokes uppercase characters.
S Scrolling window parameters.
LCD Parms
1) LCD Contrast
2) Screen Size
3) Screen Mode
4) Annunciators
5) Backlight
6) Key Uppercase
7) Scroll Window
1) LCD Contrast is for 59XX, 17XX
2) Screen Size is blank for 2480, 2485
4) Annunciators is blank for 17XX
5) Backlight is for 59XX, 17XX
1) LCD Contrast (59XX, 17XX)
Use this option to adjust the contrast of the display to a more readable level (range 0–255). The terminal uses this setting as a baseline, automatically readjusting contrast as necessary, based on temperature changes. Use the up and down arrow keys to adjust the contrast, then press [Enter] to return to the LCD Parms screen.
LCD Contrast
Use Cursor Up and Down Keys
To Adjust xxx
Note: 2) Screen Size is available for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475,
2481, and 2486 Terminals on TE 2000 application version 7.00 or greater and with Double-Byte Country Code equal to 00 (USA).
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
145
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
2) Screen Size (blank for 2480, 2485)
2) Screen Size selects the number of lines and characters in each line to be viewed on the display. To change the screen size:
1
Press the arrow keys. Each key press moves the word On one position in the direction of the arrow key pressed. The word On indicates the current setting.
2
When the word On appears in the position corresponding to the desired screen size, press [Enter].
2415 and 2425 Terminal Screen Sizes
Choices for the 2415 and 2425 Terminals include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 16 x 20)
S 4 rows, with 10, 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 6 rows, with 10, 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 8 rows, with 10, 12, 17, 20, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 10 rows, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 12 rows, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 16 rows, with 12, 17, 20, 22, 26, or 32 characters per row
S 21 rows, with 12, 17, 22, 26, or 32 characters per row
4
6
8
10
12
16
21
10
Off
Off
Off
12
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off off
Screen Size
17
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off off
20
Off
On
22
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off off
Off
26
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
32
Off
Off
146 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
2435A Terminal Screen Sizes
For 2435A Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.60 or greater and
TE 2000 application version 7.10 or greater, if icons are enabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the following screen sizes.
If the icons are disabled in the firmware (default), then the 2435A Terminal uses the screen sizes as shown on page 146 for the 2415 and 2425 Terminals. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 16 x 19)
S 4 rows, with 9, 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 6 rows, with 9, 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 8 rows, with 9, 12, 17, 19, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 10 rows, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 12 rows, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row
S 16 rows, with 12, 17, 19, 22, 26, or 31 characters per row
S 21 rows, with 12, 17, 22, 26, or 31 characters per row
4
6
8
10
12
16
21
9
Off
Off
Off
12
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off off
Screen Size
17
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off off
19
Off
On
22
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off off
Off
26
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
31
Off
Off
2455 Terminal Screen Sizes
Choices for the 2455 Terminal include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 25 x 80)
S 8 rows, with 33 or 40 characters per row
S 12 rows, with 40, 53, or 80 characters per row
S 20 rows, with 80 characters per row
S 25 rows, with 80 characters per row
8
12
20
25
Screen Size
33 40
Off Off
Off
53
Off
80
Off
Off
On
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
147
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
For 2455 Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.73 or greater and
TE 2000 application version 7.15.09 or 7.15.77 or greater, the 2455 Terminals use the following screen sizes. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 25 x 80)
S 8 rows, with 20, 33, or 40 characters per row
S 12 rows, with 20, 33, 40, 53, or 80 characters per row
S 16 rows, with 20, 33, 40, or 53 characters per row
S 20 rows, with 80 characters per row
S 25 rows, with 80 characters per row
8
12
16
20
25
20
Off
Off
Off
Screen Size
33
Off
Off
Off
40
Off
Off
Off
53 80
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
2475, 2481, and 2486 Terminal Screen Sizes
Note: This information does not apply to the 2480 and 2485 Terminals.
Choices for the 2475, 2481, and 2486 Terminals include the following.
Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 25 x 64)
S 12 rows, with 20, 26, 40, 53, or 64 characters per row
S 20 rows, with 40 characters per row
S 25 rows, with 40, 55, or 64 characters per row
12
20
25
20
Off
26
Off
Screen Size
40 53
Off
Off off off
64
On
148 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
For 2475, 2481, and 2486 Terminals with Terminal Emulation version
6.73 or greater and TE 2000 application version 7.15.09 or 7.15.77 or great-
er, the 2475, 2481, and 2486 Terminals use the following screen sizes.
Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 25 x 64)
S 12 rows, with 20, 26, or 40 characters per row
S 16 rows, with 20 or 26 characters per row
S 20 rows, with 40 characters per row
S 25 rows, with 40, 53, or 64 characters per row
12
16
20
25
20
Off
Off
Screen Size
26
Off
Off
40
Off
Off
Off
53
Off
64
On
6400 Computer Screen Sizes
Choices for the 6400 Computer include the following. It is also possible to have selected 5, 8, 10, and 16 for number of rows. This depends on what size of display you have selected. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 18 x 20)
S 6 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row
S 9 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row
S 12 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row
S 18 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row
Screen Size
10 13 16 20 23* 26 32
6
9
12
18
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off off
Off
Off
Off
Off
With 1.23 of BIOS 5.36 of Terminal Emulation
Off
Off
Off
Off
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
149
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
5020 PC Screen Sizes
Choices for the 5020 PC include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 16 x 20)
S 8 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row
S 10 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row
S 12 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row
S 14 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row
S 16 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row
8
10
12
14
16
10
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
13
Off
Off
Off
Off off
Screen Size
16
Off
Off
Off
Off off
20 off
Off
Off
Off
On
23
Off
Off
Off off
Off
26
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
32
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
5055 PC Screen Sizes
Choices for the 5055 Data Collection PC include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 25 x 80)
S 8 rows, with 20 columns per row
S 10 rows, with 20 columns per row
S 12 rows, with 20 or 40 columns per row
S 16 rows, with 20, 40, or 80 columns per row
S 21 rows, with 40 or 80 columns per row
S 25 rows, with 40 or 80 columns per row
8
10
12
16
21
25
Screen Size
20 40
Off
Off
Off Off
Off Off
Off
Off
80
Off
Off
On
150 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
59XX Terminal Screen Sizes
Choices for the 59XX Terminal includes the following. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 12 x 40)
S 8 rows, with 40, 60, or 80 columns per row
S 10 rows, with 40, 60, or 80 columns per row
S 12 rows, with 40, 60, or 80 columns per row
S 16 rows, with 40, 60, or 80 columns per row
S 21 rows, with 80 columns per row
S 25 rows, with 80 columns per row
8
10
12
16
21
25
Screen Size
40 60
Off
Off
Off
Off
On Off
Off Off
80
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
17XX Terminal Screen Sizes
Choices for the 17XX Terminal include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 8 x 22)
S 4 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line
S 6 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line
S 8 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line
S 10 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line
S 12 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line
S 16 lines, with 12, 17, 22, 26, or 31 characters per line
S 21 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line
4
6
8
10
12
16
21
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off off
17
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off off
Screen Size
22 26
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off off off off off off off off off
31 off
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
151
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
11XX Terminal Screen Sizes
Choices for the 11XX Terminal include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 9 x 16)
S 4 rows, with 12 or 16 characters per row
S 6 rows, with 12 or 16 characters per row
S 8 rows, with 12 or 16 characters per row
S 9 rows, with 12 or 16 characters per row
8
9
4
6
12
Select Size
16
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminal Screen Sizes
Choices for the 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time. (Default is 10 x
20)
S For 700 Series Computers, enter a value between 8–20 for rows and a value between 10–32 for columns.
S For CK30 and CK31 Handheld Computers, enter a value between 8–20 for rows and a value between 10–32 for columns.
S For CV60 Vehicle Mount Computers, enter a value between 8–24 for rows and a value between 16–80 for columns.
Sample screen from CV60 Terminal
152 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
3) Screen Mode
3) Screen Mode selects the cursor position and movement as you scroll through data in the display buffer. This buffer stores data in a standard
CRT format (as sent from the host computer). Since the terminal display is smaller than a CRT, these 3) Screen Mode options optimize your view of information (data) on the display. Default is 2) Corner Mode.
Use arrow keys to scroll (or “move”) the screen’s view port on the display.
Screen Mode
1) Center Cursor
2) Corner Mode
3) Page Mode
4) Lazy Mode
5) Locked Mode
6) Define Origin
1) Center Cursor
In this mode, the cursor begins near the center of the display and attempts to remain there as you scroll through the data. Upon reaching an outside boundary of the full CRT screen, the display stops advancing while the cursor moves beyond the center of the screen. When the cursor reaches the boundary of the CRT screen, an error tone sounds, such as a “beep.” The cursor does not wrap to the next line in the display.
2) Corner Mode
Starts the display at the upper-left corner of the full CRT screen and keeps the cursor in the lower-right corner of the display. As you scroll, the cursor remains there as data advances in the scrolled direction (up, down, right, or left) until an outside boundary of the full CRT screen is reached. Then the screen stops moving in relation to the display and the cursor moves in the scrolled direction (the cursor no longer remains in the corner of the display). When the cursor reaches the CRT screen boundary it stops moving. The cursor does not wrap to the next line in the display. An error tone sounds if you try to move the cursor beyond the boundary.
This option is recommended when your application uses only the upperleft corner of the full CRT screen.
3) Page Mode
Divides the full CRT screen into predefined “pages,” and starts the terminal display on page 1. The cursor first appears in the upper-right corner of the display. As you scroll, only the cursor moves (the data on the screen does not appear to move). When you scroll off the edge of the displayed page, the display snaps to the next (or previous) page. Upon reaching the boundary of the CRT screen, the cursor stops moving and an error tone sounds each time you attempt to move beyond the boundary.
Some “pages” in 3) Page Mode overlap each other (the same information is shown on both pages). This overlap occurs because the 24-row by
80-column CRT screen cannot be divided equally.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
153
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Lazy Mode
Starts the cursor in the upper left corner of the terminal display. The cursor moves across the display in the scrolled direction. When the cursor goes beyond the edge of the display, the data begins to move in the opposite direction that the cursor is moving in and the cursor remains at the edge of the display. When you reach an outside boundary of the full CRT display, an error tone sounds each time you try to move beyond the boundary.
5) Locked Mode
When this is selected the screen view is locked to the upper left-hand corner of the display. Any characters selected outside of the display window size are written to the screen but are not visible. The windowing keys do not move the visible window.
Note: In 5250 emulation, the err_row is mapped to the last row of the screen size selected.
6) Define Origin
.
Use this option to specify the “X,Y” origin of the terminal display. Enter a number from the range of 0–79 for the “X” origin and a number from the range of 0–23 for the “Y” origin. Default is 0 for both “X” and “Y” origins
Define Origin
1) X Origin
2) Y Origin
X Origin
0
Enter number from 0–79
[1]
Y Origin
[2]
0
Enter number from 0–23
4) Annunciators (Blank for 17XX, 11XX)
4) Annunciators selects and changes the location of the annunciators on the display screen. Press the up or down arrows to position the annunciators around each of the four display corners, once as a line and once as a box. You can also select “Stealth Mode” which displays the annunciators only when you make a change and then hides it when you press a key.
Default is “Stealth Mode.”
Annunciators
Use cursor up and down keys to
Adjust.
154 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
5) Backlight (59XX, 17XX)
This adjusts the intensity (brightness) of the display backlight. The intensity can be set from 0 (off) to 15 (fully on). Keep in mind that the backlight uses considerable battery power. To conserve battery power, keep the intensity and duration of the backlight as low as possible. Use the up and down arrow keys to adjust the intensity of the backlight. Press the up arrow key to increase the intensity, the down arrow key to decrease. Press
[Enter] when finished to return to the LCD Parms screen.
BLight Intensity
Use cursor up and down keys to
Adjust.
xx
6) Key Uppercase
When enabled, 6) Key Uppercase causes the alphabetic keys (A–Z) to display as uppercase characters regardless of the shift or caps lock mode settings.
7) Scroll Window (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055,
59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
7) Scroll Window defines the cursor movement, just how far it moves with each press of the arrow keys. Default is 1) Tab Size.
1) Tab Size
Moves the cursor by the amount configured for 3) Define Width and
4) Define Height.
2) Screen Size
Causes the cursor to move by the virtual screen size selected in
2) LCD Parms under the Main Menu.
3) Define Width and 4) Define Height
These options customize the x-axis and y-axis (up and down) movement of the cursor when 1) Tab Size is selected. Default is 8.
Scroll Window
1) Tab Size
2) Screen size
3) Define Width
4) Define Height
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
155
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
7) More (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Select 7) More to access the following screen:
LCD Parms
1) Scroll Window
2) Menu Settings
3) Toolbar Options
1) Scroll Window (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
1) Scroll Window defines the cursor movement, just how far it moves with each press of the arrow keys. Default is 1) Tab Size.
2) Menu Settings (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
When you select this option, you are prompted for a password. The default password is cr52401.
156
The set up current menu settings are listed on the right in the Current
Items box The available items that you can add to the current menu settings are listed on the left in the Available Items box. To select an item, tap that item, then tap either >> or << button to move the item.
To rearrange the order the items are displayed in the Current Items box, select an item from the list, then use the Up or Dn buttons to move the selected item up or down the list.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
This configures the way menu options are listed when the user taps the
Menu Settings button created by the toolbar settings. When this button is pressed, the following menu would appear. See page 95 for information.
3) Toolbar Options (700 Series, CK31, CV60)
When you select this option, you are prompted for a password. The default password is cr52401.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
157
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
In the Current Items box on the right, are the set toolbar values. The items you can include in the toolbar are listed under Available Items on the left.left hand side is the available items that you can add to the toolbar.
To select an item, tap that item, then tap the appropriate >> or << buttons to move the item to the other box.
To rearrange the order that items are displayed in the toolbar, select an item from the Current Items list, then use the Up or Dn buttons to move the selected item up or down the list of items shown in the toolbar.
As you select an item, Item Width shows the default width value and the current row width is recalculated. On 700 Series and CK31 Terminals, the maximum toolbar width is 240 pixels. On a CV60 Terminal, the maximum toolbar width is 800 pixels.
Note: We do not test for the maximum width of terminal displays. If the toolbar exceeds the maximum width of your display, then the items in the toolbar that go past the maximum width are not shown and the data that is not visible is not checked for errors.
Under Available Items:
S Select “Host IP” to display the current IP address of the host or DNS name for the host in the toolbar.
S Select “Power Indicator” to display (in a graphical form) the percentage of the battery life still available in the toolbar. Below is a color chart:
Color
Green
Yellow
Red
Brown
Percentage of Available Battery Life
Above 66%
Between 33% and 66%
Below 33%
Unknown
158 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S Select “Menu Settings” to add an “M” button to your toolbar. Tap this to access the menu settings selected from the menu settings screen in option two under LCD parms. Default settings bring up this screen:
S Select “Switch Session” to add an “S” button to your toolbar. Tap this to access Session Switching. See page 174 for more information on session switching. Note that if you tap this button while in the TE menus, no
action will occur.
S Select “Exit” to add an “EXIT” button to your toolbar. Tap this button to exit the TE 2000 application. Enter the password (default is
cr52401), then tap Yes to continue.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
159
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S Select “Signal Indicator” to show the RSSI (Radio or Ready Signal
Strength Indicator) which displays the RSSI frequency retrieved from the radio module. The RSSI indicator is updated every 200 milliseconds. The color scheme is set up as follows.
Color
Dark Green
Light Green
Yellow
Orange
Red
Status of RSSI
100% Excellent
80% Favorable
60% Good
40% Poor
20% Bad
S Select “Term IP” to display the IP address of the terminal. If the IP address is not known because the DCHP address is not assigned to the terminal, then the literal “unknown” is displayed in this area.
S Select “SIP Toggle” to add a “T” button to your toolbar. Tap the “T” button to toggle the SIP to its new state without regard to the SIP
Toggle setting in the TE menus.
S Select “Empty” to include a set number of blank pixels on the toolbar.
S Select “New Row” to divide your toolbar into two rows. All items after the new row then shows the new width of the toolbar in the selected row. Use the Up and Dn arrows to position where in your current toolbar menus you want to split the toolbar.
S Select “Session 1,” “Session 2,” “Session 3,” or “Session 4” to reserve space on the toolbar to display the session name first if entered or the IP address or DNS name of the host that to which that session is connected. Then, tap on this toolbar section to switch to that session. If no session name, IP address or DNS name is entered, then space is reserved on the toolbar and is left empty.
160 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Example
In this example, the toolbar has an “Exit” option, is set to “Session 1,” displays the RSSI status, and is also set to “Session 2.” Session 1” is definted to have the session name “CFNK” and Session 2 shows the IP address
“136.179.84.175.”
Exit
Session 1 set to session name
RSSI
Session 2 set to IP address
Note: Press Defaults to reset the toolbar to its default values.
3) Beeper Setup (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, CK30, CK31)
The 3) Beeper Setup menus adjust the beeper tones for key clicks (presses) and error conditions. For 17XX Terminals, 3) Beeper Select directs the audio output to the internal buzzer or to a headset.
Beeper Setup
1) Key Click
2) Error Tone
3) Beeper select
1) Key Click is for
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
3) Beeper Select
is for 6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX
1) Key Click (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Use 1) Key Click to adjust the frequency and length (duration) of the sound made when you press a key.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
161
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
To adjust the key click tone, press the appropriate Key Click option, then press the up or down arrow keys to make the desired adjustment. Each key press is accompanied by a tone at the new frequency or length. Press
[Enter] to confirm the selection and return to the 1) Key Click screen.
1) Volume (59XX)
Press [1], then the up/down arrow keys to adjust the volume from 0 to 32.
2) Length
Press [2], then the up/down arrow keys to adjust the length from 0 to 10.
3) Frequency (6400, 17XX, 11XX)
Press [3], then the up/down arrow keys to adjust the tone frequency in steps from 0 to 32.
Volume
Use Cursor Up
And Down Keys
To Adjust
Key Click> xx
Frequency
Use Cursor Up
And Down Keys
To Adjust
Key Click> xx
Key Click
1) Volume
2) Length
3) Frequency
[1]
1) Volume is for 59XX
3) Frequency is for
6400, 17XX, 11XX
[2]
Length
Use Cursor Up
And Down Keys
To Adjust
Key Click> xx
[3]
162 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
2) Error Tone
2) Error Tone adjusts the length and frequency of the tone made when an error occurs (for example, pressing an invalid key). The 2) Error Tone adjustments, and the procedures for making them are identical to the
1) Key Click adjustments. Press 2) Length to set the length. The range is
1 through 10, which equates to a 500 to 5000 ms beep for all errors. De-
fault error tone length is 3 (or 1500 ms).
For version 6.73 or greater, the range is 1 through 10, but now equates to a
50 to 500 ms beep for all errors. The default error tone length is still 3
(but for 150 ms).
Error Tone
1) Volume
2) Length
3)
1) Volume is for
59XX
Volume
Use Cursor Up
And Down Keys
To Adjust
Error Tone> xx
[1]
[2]
Length
Use Cursor Up
And Down Keys
To Adjust
Error Tone> xx
3) Beeper Select (6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX)
For 17XX, 11XX, both buzzers are not allowed to beep simultaneously when using a headset. If both options are enabled, the head set buzzer will beep first before the internal buzzer. If you are using the RS-232 port for communications, enable 1) Beep Internal and disable 2) Beep Head Set.
1) Beep Internal
Press [1] to direct the audio to the internal beeper. Default is enabled.
2) Beep Head Set (11XX)
Press [2] to direct sound to the headset.
Beeper Setup
1) Beep Internal
2) Beep Head Set
2) Beep Head Set is for 17XX,
11XX
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
163
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Tests
Intermec Systems Engineers use the 4) Tests menus to verify terminal operation during environmental stress tests, peripherals, the display, RF communications, and memory.
Tests
1) Peripherals
2) Converters
3) Memory View
4) Packet Driver
5) Numbers
6) Timed Numbers
2) Converters is for 59XX
3) Memory View and
4) Packet Driver
are for 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX,
11XX
5) Numbers and
6) Timed Numbers
are blank for 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
164
1) Peripherals
1) Peripherals tests terminal peripheral devices, such as radio, RS-232, display, keyboard, and scanner. Detailed descriptions of each peripheral test follows.
Peripherals
1) Radio Test
2) RS232 Test
3) Display Test
4) Keyboard Test
5) Scanner Test
1) Radio Test is for
6400, 5055
802.11 (Lucent) radios
2) RS232 Test,
3) Display Test, and
4) Keyboard Test are for
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
1) Radio Test (802.11 (Lucent) Radios — 6400, 5055)
Several factors influence the rate at which a frame is transmitted. First, the radio’s transmission rate is configured in the net.cfg file. The keyword
Transmit_Rate in net.cfg holds a numeric value for the transmission rate.
The transmission rate is also affected by the characteristics of the RF link.
If the radio encounters problems sending a higher transmission rate because the RF link is weak, busy, or noisy, the radio may retry the transmission at a lower data rate. Thus, the TxRate reported may be lower than the configured transmission rate. Only the transmission rate of the most recent and successful transmission is reported.
Transmit_Rate values and their respective supported transmission rates available in the high speed Lucent radios are as follows:
1
Fixed Low (1 Mb/s)
5
Fixed High (11 Mb/s)
2
Fixed Standard (2 Mb/s)
4
ARS Standard (2 Mb/s)
3
ARS High (11 Mb/s default)
4
ARS Medium (5.5 Mb/s)
4
Fixed Medium (5.5 Mb/s)
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S PRI
The primary version of low-level radio firmware.
S SEC
The secondary version of the low-level radio firmware.
S RFLINK
A general description of the RF connection overall quality between Lucent radios in the terminal and radios in the Access Point. The Lucent radio grades the RF link on a scale from 0–92, representing the RF channel Signal-to-Noise Ratio. The RF link quality descriptions are assigned as: 0–23 “Adequate,” 24–47 “Good,” or 48–92 “Excellent.”
S SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio)
Calculated by dividing the RF signal level by the RF noise level. The result is a number that indicates the overall communications quality of the RF link and is expressed in dBm.
S SSID (Service Set ID)
A 32-character, alphanumeric string that identifies the service set, or infrastructure, with which the terminal is currently associated. The
SSID is a user-configurable parameter and is configured by the keyword
“WaveLAN_Network_Name” in the net.cfg file. Setting the keyword to
“ANY” allows the station to associate with any service set.
S B SSID (Basic Service Set ID)
The 6-byte MAC address of the Lucent radio in the Access Point with which the station is associated. The Lucent radio in the terminal may associate with a non-Lucent (but 802.11-compliant) radio in an Access
Point. Looking at the first three bytes of the MAC address (OUI) can help identify the Access Point radio’s manufacturer.
Example
An OUI of “00601D” points to a Lucent radio, while “0020A6” indicates a Proxim radio.
S TxRate
The data rate (in Mb/s) of the last message transmitted by the Lucent radio. The default TXRate of 2 Mb/s and will be displayed when the terminal starts up and has not transmitted a frame yet. High speed Lucent radios are capable of data rates of 1 Mb/s, 2 Mb/s, 5.5 Mb/s, and
11 Mb/s. The TxRate 5.5 Mb/s data rate is displayed as 6 Mb/s. This occurs because the Lucent radio reports an integer value for current transmission data rate, so the data rate of 5.5 Mb/s is rounded up to 6
Mb/s.
Radio Test
PRI:
SEC: v4.0
v4.52
RFLINK: Excellent
SNR: 99dBm
SSID: xxxxxxx
B SSID: xxxxxxxxxxxx
TxRate:xMb/s std
Primary version of Lucent driver
Secondary version of driver
RF link quality
Signal-to-Noise ratio
Network name in use
MAC address of access point
Data rate
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
165
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
2) RS232 Test (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Tests the data communication port on the terminal, requiring a special loop-back connector that links the following input and output pins on the data connector:
S TX output to the RX input
S DTR output to the DSR input
S CTS output to the RTS input
To run the test, select 2) RS232 Test, attach the loop-back connector to the port connector on the terminal, then press [Enter]. The display changes to the second RS232 Test menu shown below. The condition of each line-pair displays as passing or failing the test. If any test fails, return the terminal for service.
RS232 Test
Attach RS232
Loopback
Connector
Press Enter
RS232 Test
RTS-CTS: PASS
DTR–DSR: PASS
TX-RX: PASS
Any Key To Stop
3) Display Test (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
3) Display Test tests the operation of and activates each element in the terminal LCD panel. If a line appears broken, or there are gaps in the display, replace the LCD panel.
1
From the Display Test menu, press [Enter] to start the test. The display screen is painted with a series of vertical lines. Visually inspect the lines.
All lines should appear clear and complete (no broken segments).
2
Press [Enter] to move to a screen drawn with horizontal lines. Visually inspect the lines using the same criteria.
3
Press [Enter] to move to the final screen. Visually inspect the painted black lines which should be uniformly black for monochrome displays and uniformly white for color displays.
4
Press [Enter] to return to the 1) Peripherals menu.
166 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Keyboard Test (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Tests each key on the terminal keypad or 5055 external keyboard. Press each key, except the [Enter] key, and a character corresponding to the pressed key should appear on the display.
Keyboard Test
Press a key.
ENTER To exit
Key = hex(0033) = 3
5) Scanner Test
This option tests the operation of an attached bar code scanner. From this menu, scan an enabled bar code. The bar code and the bar code length should appear on the display to pass. Press [Enter] to exit the test.
Scanner Test
Scan Code>
TEST-SHEET
Length>10
2) Converters (59XX)
Use this option to test the analog-to-digital (A to D) and the digital-toanalog (D to A) converters. The RSSI Test (not available on all radios) offers a choice of graphics displays of the received radio signals. Press any key to exit.
Converters
1) A to D
2) D to A
3)
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
167
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
3) Memory View (6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX)
This menu is reserved for engineering test and evaluation. Press [F1] to exit out of this test, [F2] to view the heap, [F3] to view the far heap, or
[F4] to do a memory dump.
Memory View
F1 - Exit
F2 - Heap
F3 - Far Heap
F4 - Memory Dump
Address: xxxxxx
4) Packet Driver (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
4) Packet Driver tests accuracy of data transmissions to and from the terminal.
Packet Driver
1)
2)
3) Packet Stats
4) Histogram
5)
6)
3) Packet Stats is for 6400,
5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
3) Packet Stats (Statistics) (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Shows the number of packets sent and received, number of errors, and number of packets dropped.
Receive Statistics
Pkt
Chr
Err
Lost xxx xxx xxx xxx
Transmit Statistics
Pkt
Chr
Err xxx xxx xxx
Transaction Statistics
Qty
Sec
Qty/Min xxx
Ops xxx xxx xxx
* See Text
’Histogram Options’
RTC Statistics
168 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
4) Histogram
An Intermec engineer may ask you to access this menu if your terminal has problems. From this menu you can provide the Intermec system engineer with vital information about your unit.
The actual menus are not shown in this manual, however some of the general terminology is shown below. Several of the menu options, such as
“Clear. . ., ” are password-protected and are only accessible if the engineer provides you with the correct password. An Intermec system engineer will work with you on these selections. Terminology you might see:
S avg tx time
S avg trans time
S send retries
S rcv retries
S ptt (push-to-talk) count S reset count
S addrs on list S interval time
S poll no data S time bucket #
Histogram
1) Start
2) Stop
3) View
5) Numbers (blank for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
5) Numbers checks the operation of the terminal microprocessor. During the test, the terminal display is filled with hexadecimal numbers that move across the screen horizontally and scroll vertically. Character movement indicates that the processor is still running. To stop the test, press any key.
This test is helpful in detecting lockups during severe operating conditions.
6) Timed Numbers (blank for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
6) Timed Numbers does the same thing as 5) Numbers except that it keeps track of the time in seconds that it took to run the test. The test terminates when a key is pressed or when 65,536 numbers are displayed.
5) Version Info (Information)
5) Version Info shows the name, version, and release date of the program you are using, the version of the radio driver, and the MAC address of the
6400, 5055, or 11XX Terminal. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for TE program names.
MLID Name and MLID ver are for 6400, 5055
Version Info
Firmware
<TE Program Name>
Version
Date
MLID Name
MLID ver
(mac address)
<number>
<ddmmyy>
ZZZZZZ xx.xx
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
169
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
6) Exit Menus
Note: If direct connect is used, the terminal may reboot upon exiting the
TE configuration menu.
Use 6) Exit Menus to exit the TE configuration menus. If you changed any parameter settings, the terminal displays the following when you exit the menus.
Save Parms
Enter ’Y’ to save parms
If you press [Y] (“yes”), you are prompted for a password. “cr52401” is the default password.
Save Parms
Enter
Password
> .......
After you enter the correct password, your settings are saved to Flash, and the terminal may reboot. (Some changes automatically reboot the terminal.) If you press a key other than [Y], you exit the menus and the new settings are not saved. In this case, the new settings are lost when you reboot your terminal. When you exit the TE configuration menus, the following information appears:
<TE program name> <version>
Session: <number>
Host:
<data stream>
170 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
7) More (Main Menu 2)
Select 7) More to open the Main Menu 2 screen.
Main Menu 2
1) Keyboard Opts
2) Save Parms
3) Cloning Opts
4) Session Menu
3) Cloning Opts is for 59XX, 17XX, 11XX
4) Session Menu is for 2415 (WTP), 2425
(WTP), 2435A (WTP), 2455 (WTP), 2475 (WTP),
248X (WTP), 6400, 5020 (TCP/IP), 5055, 17XX,
11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
1) Keyboard Opts
Use 1) Keyboard Opts > 1) Type-Ahead to key in information when the terminal cannot immediately send data to the host computer.
1) Type-Ahead enters information when the terminal cannot immediately send data to the host.
Keyboard Opts
1) Type—Ahead
This stores keystrokes after the Input Inhibited annunciator (below) appears on the status line, and then saves them for the next input field.
Type-ahead is enabled by default.
X
Input Inhibited annunciator
2) Save Parms (Parameters)
Use 2) Save Parms to retain the changes made to TE configuration settings. When saved, changes become the default settings for the terminal.
Note: Use this option sparingly. Each time it is used, additional memory space is occupied because previously saved changes are not erased. The memory cannot be recovered on 59XX, 17XX, and 11XX Terminals without reflashing.
Ensure that the parameters are correct before choosing 2) Save Parms.
When selected, you are prompted to enter a seven-character password. The default password is “cr52401,” which can be altered with a custom configuration to be a string of 1 to 10 characters long. After you enter the correct password, your changes are written to Flash.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
171
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
If an error is made or the incorrect password is entered, the terminal will return to 2) Save Parms screen without saving your entries.
Save Parms
Enter
Password:
> . . . . . . .
Save Parms
Working
Please Wait
........
3) Cloning Opts (59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Note: 3) Cloning Opts is disabled for 59XX Terminals.
These options transfer the application program or parameter settings from one terminal to another. All three choices are password-protected, with
“cr52401” as the default password. To perform this function you need a cloning cable and both terminals set for cloning.
Cloning Opts
1) Clone Prgms
2) Clone Parms
3) Receive Parms
1
Connect the two terminals together using the cloning cable. Use cable
P/N: 216-911-001, with radio terminals containing 12-volt Flash (see
illustration on page 173) for connecting with the NC1100 Power Supply and Charger (see illustration on page 173).
2
Plug the NC1100 Power Supply and Charger into an ac outlet. Use cable P/N: 216-909-001, with radio terminals containing 5-volt Flash.
You may use the 12-volt Flash cable, but this is optional.
3
Turn on the source terminal from which to copy the application.
4
Press 3) Cloning Opts, then 1) Clone Prgms.
5
Key in the password.
172 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
6
Hold down the [I] key while turning on the terminal receiving the program. The application program will copy into the receiving terminal.
To Source
Terminal
To NC1100
Charger
To Receiving
Terminal
12-Volt Cable (P/N: 216-911-001)
5-Volt Cable (P/N: 216-909-001)
To Source Terminal
To Receiving
Terminal
This illustrations shows the FLASH cloning cable connections as they pertain to step 1 on the previous page.
To clone parameters from one terminal to another, first ensure the desired parameters are already set in the terminal you wish to transfer from. Then:
1
Connect the terminals together using the cloning cable. Data Terminals with 12-volt FLASH use P/N: 216-911-001. Data Terminals with
5-volt FLASH use P/N: 216-909-001.
2
With both terminals turned ON, press 3) Cloning Opts on both.
3
On the source terminal (the terminal with the parameters from which to
copy), press 2) Clone Parms.
4
On the receiving terminal, press 3) Receive Parms. If using the cable that requires the NC1100 Power Supply and Charger, make sure it is connected to the NC1100 Power Supply and Charger.
Follow the alignment from the NC1100 power supply to the cloning cable connection. This illustration pertains to step 1 on page 172.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
173
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
Note: For 700 Series, CK31, and CV60 Terminals, the following menu appears after double-tapping the upper-left corner of your display.
4) Session Menu (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X with WTP, 700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60 with TCP/IP, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Note: 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 700 Series, CK30, and
CK31, CV60 Terminals with UDP Plus do not allow multiple sessions.
4) Session Menu defines different host communication sessions, designates a “hot key” that switches quickly between sessions, and assigns sessions customizable host names (or, friendly names).
1) Switch
Use this option to change the current session. The current (or intended) session must be identified (or designated) before setting Parameters.
2) Set Hot Key (available on units supporting session-switching)
Displays the current hot key. Use the up and down keys to view the available choices. Press [Enter] to designate a key for the hot key.
3) Copy Setup (password -protected)
For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX,
17XX, 11XX Terminals, this copies parameters from the background session to the current session.
For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals, this copies parameters from the current session to the session chosen. The copied data is grayed out and the chosen session is outlined with a box, like in this example:
Sample screen from CV60 Terminal
4) Session Name (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Use this to assign customizable host names (or, friendly names) to each session. Enter a name for Session 1, then press [Enter] to return to the Session Menu. You may use up to 64 characters for each name.
174
Sample screen from CV60 Terminal
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
To assign a name to another session, press [1] to switch to that session, return to the Session Menu, then press [4] to assign a name to that session.
Session Menu
1) Switch
2) Set Hot Key
3) Copy Setup
4) Session Name
4) Session Name is for
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,
2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055,
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, CK31
Select Session
Use Cursor Up
And Down Keys
To Adjust
[1]
Session: X
<datastream>
Host: xxxx
[1]
For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60
1
2
3
Set Hot Key
Use Cursor Up
And Down Keys
To Adjust
< xx >
[2] [3]
1
3
Session 1
Session Name
[4]
1 Cursor left or right, then press [Enter]; or press a number to pick a session.
2 The IP address or DNS name assigned to the selected session.
3 The terminal emulation assigned to the selected session.
Restarting Terminal Emulation
Note: The reset firmware bar code is not supported on the 5020, 59XX,
17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, or CV60 Terminals. Instead, do the cold-start function to exit the TE 2000 application and return to the
Windows CE main menu.
You need to restart your TE 2000 application if you are having problems or if you want to reconnect to the host with a new configuration. Restarting your TE 2000 application also clears the auto-login information, preventing another user from establishing a TE 2000 session using your login information.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
175
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
You can restart your TE 2000 application by either scanning the following
Reset Firmware bar code or by using the 6) Cold Start option in the TE
2000 configuration Main Menu. Both methods reset all terminal firmware and the application and run the application in a new session.
Reset Firmware
*/M.*
*-.*
The terminal restarts your TE application using the configuration saved in
CONFIG.DAT, or follow this procedure:
1
At the third initialization screen or anywhere in a TE 2000 session, access the Main Menu by pressing the appropriate key combination (see
page 4).
COPR. 1991-2005
INTERMEC. ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED
V<version number>
<release date>
TE 2000(TM)
176
<program name> <version>
Host: <host name>
<emulation type>
<program name> <version>
<emulation type>
Host: <host name>
<program name> <version>
Session: <current session number>
<session name>
<emulation type>
Host: <host name>
<device name>
For Version 8.00 or greater For Version 7.26 or greater
Note: If you are not connected to the Intermec Application Server or host, or have problems accessing the Main Menu, reset your terminal to go to the initialization screens.
2
Select 1) Set-up Parms, then enter the “cr52401” password. Do not press
Enter.
3
Select 6) Cold Start, press [Y] when prompted to restart, then start using the application or change the TE configuration.
See the terminal’s user guide or manual for information on how to recover from a lock-up condition.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals
The following instructions are specific for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,
2475, and 248X Terminals.
You can configure several options for TE 2000 5250 on your Trakker Antares
R
Terminal, including:
S UDP Plus or TCP/IP communications
S VT/ANSI options
S Main Menu password
Note: You can also set the password for UDP Plus Terminals from the Intermec Application Server.
You can access the TE 2000 configuration menus when the initialization screens appear or once you establish a TE 2000 session. The TE 2000 initialization screens appear each time you reboot the terminal or restart your application.
Note: Some parameters for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X
Terminals are available through the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System. They are not reproduced in the TE 2000 configuration menus. See the terminal’s user manual for information about the menu system.
6400 Computer
The terminal emulation screens support terminals running Intermec Terminal Emulation or 6400 TCP/IP software. This describes the menus used to set operating and scanning parameters for the hand-held computer.
Additional information can be found in the technical overview for your emulation program.
Note: Ensure there is a fully-charged battery pack in the 6400 Computer before setting parameters.
Opening the Main Menu
The Main Menu is the first screen displayed when you open the computer menus. All other menus are accessed from the Main Menu. To open the
Main Menu, press [Yellow], then [Blue]. Briefly, these keys generally operate as:
S [Blue] for functions labeled by blue legends above the keys.
S [Green] for functions labeled by green legends above the keys.
S [Yellow] for functions labeled by yellow legends above the keys.
S [Blue], then [Green] shift is CAPS LOCK.
S [Blue], then [Yellow] shift is Alphabetic Lock (6400 Computer 41-key
units).
S [Yellow], then [Blue] shift is Terminal Emulation menus; your particular emulation software probably treat the keys for contrast control, backlighting and other functions differently.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
177
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
To Exit Emulation Mode and Return to DOS
Do a cold-restart to exit the current emulation program and return back to the DOS keyboard layout. Press [Y], press [Enter] several times to put you at the DOS C:\ prompt. To exit to the beginning of the current emulation, press and hold [Blue] and [Yellow], and both [ENT] keys to do the hard reset.
5055 Data Collection PC
If you are running terminal emulations and ever update the DOS load on the internal SanDisk IDE drive on the 5055 PC, be aware that when updating 50DS1000, avoid copying the CONFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT files. The new versions of these two files may interfere with existing applications, such as Terminal Emulations. If affected, Terminal Emulations will automatically run on boot up.
In all other situations, do copy the CONFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT files.
This contains information about the terminal emulations with keyboards supported for the Intermec
R
5055 Data Collection PC.
The 5055 PC supports terminal emulations with rugged keyboards.
FWP650H0 is DOS-based and is not compatible with Windows DOS prompts.
An external PS/2-compatible keyboard is required for configuring and using terminal emulations.
Terminal emulation font files are needed to generate the various character fonts. See the related terminal emulation programmer’s reference guide for additional information.
Programs to Create Terminal Emulation Menus
The Terminal Emulation Menu Screens are provided to support terminals running Intermec Terminal Emulation software. This describes the menus that set operating and scanning parameters for the 5055 PC. Additional information can be found in the programmer’s guide or technical overview for your emulation program.
When you power on the 5055 PC, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file executes the following programs, in sequential order, to create the terminal emulation menus. Listed are their descriptions.
S LSL
Creates the link layer for the protocol stack.
S rl2pcm
Includes the Proxim radio driver for the Proxim RangeLAN2 radio, or
wvlan43
Includes the WaveLAN/IEEE radio driver for the 802.11b HR radio.
S 6500ikps
Installs multitasking, beeper, and key remapping TSRs.
178 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
S wtppkt
Includes the WTP Packet driver program if a WTP link accesses the host computer, or
ethdrv and odipkt
Includes the Ethernet and ODI Packer driver programs if a TCP/IP link and a controller are used to gain access to the host computer.
S 65scn7b -c1
Activates the scanner driver.
S 6500dbcs
Intercepts INT10 and display characters on the display.
S fwp650h0
Activates the terminal emulation program.
Press <Alt>, then [M] on the external keyboard to access the setup menus.
Note: On terminal emulation keyboards, use [Yellow] in place of <Alt>.
For example, to access the Setup Menus, press [Yellow] [M].
Opening the Main Menu
The Main Menu is the first screen displayed when you open the computer menus. All other menus are accessed from the Main Menu.
To open the Main Menu, press the yellow shift, then the blue shift
(MENU) key. Briefly, these keys generally operate as:
S [Blue] for functions labeled by blue legends above the keys.
S [Green] for functions labeled by green legends above the keys.
S [Yellow] for functions labeled by yellow legends above the keys.
S [Blue], then [Green] shift is CAPS LOCK.
S [Yellow], then [Blue] is Terminal Emulation menus; your particular emulation software probably treat the keys for contrast control, backlighting and other functions differently.
To Exit Emulation Mode and Return to DOS
Do a cold-restart to exit the current emulation program and return back to the DOS keyboard layout. Press [Y], then press [Enter] several times to arrive at the DOS C:\ prompt. To exit to the beginning of the current emulation, press and hold [Blue] and [Yellow], and both [ENT] keys to do the hard reset.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
179
Chapter 4
—
Using the Terminal Emulation Menus
180 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
5
Customizing Your
Configuration
This chapter describes the procedures you can use to customize the standard TE 2000 5250 program by Intermec Technologies Corporation. You customize the TE 2000 program by creating or modifying configuration files, and then downloading them to your terminal to do the following:
S Use the auto-login feature to send the same login information each time you login to the host (page 182).
S Display double-byte characters (page 192).
S Create a custom parameter set-up file to download a customized file to all terminals so they have the same setup information (see note below).
S CUSTOM.DAT Settings (page 194)
S TE_SETTINGS.INI Settings (page 217)
S Change the text of TE 2000 configuration menus or system messages
(page 232).
S Preinitialize the TE 2000 VT/ANSI program (page 233).
S Remap the terminal’s keys (page 234).
S Remap characters (page 240).
S Implement ITCCOLOR.DAT attribute colors (page 241).
S Customize EBCDIC to ASCII translation. (page 243).
S Substitute national characters (page 246).
Note: For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals with TE 2000
application versions 8.00 or greater, if a CONFIG.DAT file is present on your terminal, its settings are backed up in a CONFIG.OLD file, then written into a TE_SETTINGS.INI file. If the CONFIG.DAT file is not on your terminal, all settings are written to the TE_SETTINGS.INI file.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
181
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Using the Auto-Login Feature
Use the auto-login feature to send the same login information each time you login to the host. When you start the TE 2000 application, the terminal checks for an auto-login script file. If a script file exists, the terminal runs the login commands from the auto-login script file before the TE
2000 program starts.
To use the auto-login feature, you need to develop an auto-login script file and load the auto-login script file on the terminal. These steps are covered on the following pages along with a list of the necessary control characters and the procedure for disabling the auto-login feature.
Developing Auto-Login Script Files
A typical auto-login script file consists of Input and InputHidden commands followed by a HostName command, followed by a series of Wait-
For and Send commands. A very simple script file may not have any input commands if all of the terminals are using the same account.
Note: The auto-login script must be an ASCII text file with
AUTOLOG.SCR as the required file name or the file is not processed.
Commands
You can use several commands to create auto-login script files. All commands are case-sensitive. For example, WaitFor is a command, but
Waitfor is not a valid command. For examples of script files, see “Sample
Auto-Login Script Files” on page 189.
S Input
This is called with two parameters. The first one is a character string enclosed in quotes used as a prompt to the user. The second one is a string variable name indicating where to store the text string.
S InputHidden
Same as the Input script command except that user input is echoed as a string of asterisks.
S HostName
This command is case-sensitive and must be presented as mixed-case letters. HostName is followed by a character string enclosed in quotes.
The character string can be a host name or an asterisk. The HostName command acts as an IF clause. If the host name matches, the following section of the script file is executed up to the next HostName command. If an asterisk is used, it matches any host name.
Note: If a session name (friendly name) is entered, then this is used in place of the host name or server IP name to section off the autologin script.
S WaitFor
Wait for a list of up to ten strings. The strings must be enclosed in quotes and must be separated by a comma. The strings cannot exceed
20 characters in length.
182 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
S Send
This command sends a character string enclosed in quotes or a string variable to the host. The character string enclosed in quotes can have an embedded control key in the TE 2000 5250 application.
S Pause “xxxxx”
Delays the terminal for x milliseconds, halts terminal operation from receiving and processing for the duration specified.
S PromptSessionStart
This command is a predefined variable. If this variable is defined and set to any value other than 0, the application prompts the user to press
[Enter] before starting a Telnet session with the host. Do not put quotes around the variable.
S Restart “x”
Restarts the autologin script file. The “x” is a dummy argument.
S Keyboard “0”
Disables the keyboard. Key presses are ignored. For additional information, see Note below.
S Keyboard “1”
Enables the keyboard. Key presses are processed. The keyboard is enabled by default. For additional information, see Note below.
S # (pound symbol)
Documents the script file. Text following a # (pound) symbol is considered a comment unless the # symbol is in a quoted string.
Note: Input the Keyboard “0” or Keyboard “1” command into the autologin script file after the PromptSessionStart command (if present) and the HostName command (if present). Also turn on the keyboard command before another HostName command is found in the file.
Search Strings
Some auto-login search string limitations are as follows. You can use line wrapping to look for unique strings.
S The searches are case sensitive.
S The maximum search string length is 20 characters.
S Each WaitFor command searches the entire screen from the top.
If a screen from the host has multiples of the word you are looking for, you can use the preceding spaces to identify a unique string.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
183
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Example
If the screen sent to the terminal is:
Linux rlogin 2.4.6
login
The autologin script would be:
PromptSessionStart=1
HostName “*”
#wait for host login screen and send login and password
WaitFor “login”
Send “billy<ENTER>”
WaitFor “password”
Send “letmein<ENTER>”
In this example, you can search for the three leading spaces from the end of the previous line to make a unique search string.
Control Characters
You can include control characters in your auto-login script file. The control character must be enclosed by < > (angle brackets) in
AUTOLOG.SCR. This table lists control characters for the TE 2000
5250 application.
Note: Some control characters may be represented by their hexadecimal values. For a description of control characters and hexadecimal equivalents, see the full ASCII chart in Appendix C, “Conversion Tables.”
Control Characters for Auto-Login Script File
Control Character Definition
<ATTN>
<CLEAR>
Attention
Clear
<CUR_DN>
<CUR_LF>
<CUR_RT>
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
<CUR_UP>
<DEL>
<ENTER>
<ERS_EOF>
<F1> – <F24>
Cursor Up
Delete
Enter
Erase Input
Function keys
Control Character Definition
<HOME>
<INS>
Home
Insert
<LTAB>
<NEWLN>
<RESET>
Left Tab
New Line
Error Reset
<ROLL_DOWN> Roll Down
<ROLL_UP> Roll Up
<RTAB>
<SPACE>
Right Tab
Space
Loading the Auto-Login Script File
Follow these procedures to download an auto-login script file to your terminal. The method depends on the type of terminal you are using.
184 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals
You can download more than one script file to a 2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, or 248X Terminal, but immediately name the file to be used as AUTOLOG.SCR and name any other script files with different names ending with .SCR. To learn more about transferring files, refer to your terminal’s user manual. Use one of the following download utilities to copy your completed AUTOLOG.SCR file to the terminal.
Using Serial Port to Download File
1
Connect the terminal to the development personal computer or host.
For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual or your accessory documentation.
2
Load the AUTOLOG.SCR file into drive C, where the TE 2000 application is stored. For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
3
Use T24XCOPY.EXE (from the developer’s kit) to copy the file directly to drive C: on the terminal; or use LOADER.EXE (from the flash upgrade) to copy the file to the terminal in flash mode using the following command: loader AUTOLOG.SCR
Using RF Communications to Download File
Note: Loading the AUTOLOG.SCR file from the Intermec Application
Server is supported.
1
Copy the AUTOLOG.SCR file to the Intermec Application Server.
2
Configure the download server on the Intermec Application Server to send AUTOLOG.SCR to the terminals in groups of 10 or less.
3 Start the download.
When the terminal is reset, it clears the auto-login information, such as the password and user’s name. Cancel the auto-login process by pressing any key during the auto-login sequence. When a host session is broken, you can restart the auto-login sequence by rebooting your terminal.
5020 Data Collection PC
The 5020 Data Collection PC User’s Manual (P/N: 068975) has comprehensive information regarding 5020 file management. Below is an excerpt:
Downloading a File
1
From the host computer or PC, connect to the 5020 Terminal using a web browser and start the Unit Manager application. For help, see the
5020 PC User’s Manual.
2
Click File Manager to access the main File Manager screen.
3
Click the option button next to the parent directory where the file to download is located, then click Go To to access its contents. To download a file to the current directory on the 5020 Terminal, do step 4.
4
Go to the File Upload form at the bottom of the main File Manager screen on the host computer and click the Browse button.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
185
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
186
5
From the Choose File box on the host computer, select the file to be downloaded to the 5020 Terminal, then click Open to place the path and file name on the File Upload form.
6
On the host, click Upload File to continue, or click Clear to clear the form and start again. The screen with the parent directory is refreshed.
If successful, the following confirmation message will appear on the host computer, where “Filename” is the file that was downloaded to the
5020 Terminal: Uploaded file “Filename”
Copying a File
Use the File Manager from the host computer to make a copy of a file.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 of “Downloading a File”, then do the following:
1
Click the option button next to the file you want to copy, then click the
Copy button to access the Copy File screen.
2
To save the copied file to the same directory as the original file, enter a unique file name in the New Name field, then click Copy File to create a copy of the file. The screen showing the parent directory is refreshed.
If successful, the following confirmation message will appear on the host computer, where “Filename” is the original file and “New Filename” is the copy: “Filename” copied to “New Filename”
6400, 5055 Terminals
Use INTERLNK/INTERSVR communications to connect your terminal to a personal computer. For help, see “Downloading Files” on page 251.
Load AUTOLOG.SCR into drive C, where the TE application is stored.
59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals
The download process requires flash and utility files.
1
Using FLSHCONV.EXE from the TOOLS.EXE file from the flash program, append the AUTOLOG.SCR file to the end of the .HEX program. For help, see“Downloading Files” on page 251. Below are sample command lines for each terminal type:
S 11XX Terminal with 256K flash (this uses 1180, but applies to all radio types)
: flshconv –eC000 –a fwp118c0.hex AUTOLOG.scr
–oNEW1180.HEX
S 11XX Terminal with 512K flash (this uses 1180, but applies to all radio types): flshconv –eFFC0 –a fwp118h0.hex AUTOLOG.scr
–oNEW1180.HEX
S 17XX Terminal (example uses 1780, but applies to all radio types); flshconv –eFFC0 –a fwp178h0.hex AUTOLOG.scr
–oNEW1780.HEX
S 59XX Terminal (example uses 5980, but applies to all radio types): flshconv –eE000 –a fwp598h0.hex AUTOLOG.scr
–oNEW5980.HEX
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
2
Using PROGDUX.EXE from the flash files, load the NEW.HEX file onto the terminal. Below is a sample command line using the 1780 Terminal:
PROGDUX –e NEW178H0.HEX
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals
This procedure requires that you have Microsoft ActiveSync installed on your desktop and that you establish a remote connection to your terminal.
See the 3-paragraph note on the next page.
1
On the terminal, tap Start > ActiveSync > Sync.
2
From your desktop, access the Microsoft ActiveSync, then click Explore to access the contents of the terminal via its “Mobile Device” directory or folder. Browse to the appropriate location where files are to install.
3
Also from your desktop, select Start > Windows Explorer, then browse for the files that are to be transferred to your terminal.
4
Drag those files from the desktop Windows Explorer to the ActiveSync
“Mobile Device” window.
5
From the terminal, tap Start > Programs > File Explorer, then browse to the location where to place the files. If missing, then ensure all connections and locations are accurate before attempting this procedure.
Note: Always store files such as the AUTOLOG.SCR, REMAP.CFG,
CONFIG.DAT (for TE 2000 application versions older than 8.00),
TE_SETTINGS.INI (for TE 2000 application versions 8.00 or greater),
CFGLIT.DAT, or other such files, in the directory where the TE 2000 executable is stored. This is the root directory on the CV60 Computer, and is the “\CK_FFS” directory on the CK30 or CK31 Computer.
On 700 Series Computers, if a Secure Digital card is present, the
“\SDMMC Disk\TE2000” directory contains the executable if installed from a CAB file. If there is no SecureDigital card, the next choice is the
Flash File Store. Finally, if neither is present, then the TE 2000 executable is stored in the “\Program Files” directory.
These extra files are either in the directory with the executable, in the root of the Secure Digital card if present or the Flash File Store if present, or at the very root of the machine, which is the order of precedence. Thus, the root directories are not the default — not the first choice. If the user created a new one of these files and placed it at the root, and another file of the same name existed somewhere else, higher in priority, then the user’s file is ignored. Thus, it is best to place it in the directory with the
TE 2000 executable file.
Disabling the Auto-Login Feature
To disable auto-login, you may rename or delete the AUTOLOG.SCR
file. Renaming the file ensures that you can use the same auto-login script file later by changing the name back to AUTOLOG.SCR. If you want to enable a new script file, you can use the instructions in this section to rename a different script file to AUTOLOG.SCR.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
187
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
188
Follow these procedures to disable (or delete) the auto-login script file.
The method depends on the type of terminal you are using.
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals
1
Press the appropriate key sequence or scan the following bar code to access the TRAKKER Antares
R
2400 Menu System’s Main Menu:
Enter Test and Service Mode
*../M.*
*..-.*
2
Choose System Menu and then choose File Manager.
3
Select drive C. Press Y or B to highlight AUTOLOG.SCR.
4
Press [FnL .] to delete the file or press [F7] to rename the file.
5
Exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to return to your current TE session. Restart the TE application to use TE without the autologin.
You can also rename the auto-login script file from your host. For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals
Via your web browser, access the IP address at http://<IP address>, doubleclick the File Manager desktop icon, select File, then press the [Del] key to remove the auto-login feature.
For the terminal, using Microsoft ActiveSync, browse for the auto-login file, right-click the file for a pop-up menu, then select Delete to remove the file from the terminal.
6400, 5055 Terminals
1
Reboot the terminal to a DOS prompt.
S For the 6400 Computer: press and hold the yellow, blue, and both green enter keys until the terminal resets. Watch the screen as the terminal boots and press 0
(zero) when the prompt appears.
S For the 5055 Data Collection PC: power-cycle the terminal and select the minimum DOS prompt from the boot menu.
2
Rename or delete the AUTOLOG.SCR file.
3
Reboot the terminal again and allow it to complete the boot into terminal emulation.
59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals
To disable auto-login on a 59XX, 17XX, or 11XX Terminal, reload the terminal with unmodified flash, then perform a cold start to flush the memory. The flash file does not allow selective erasing; files can be added, but not removed without removing all files.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Sample Auto-Login Script Files
You can use these sample script files as they are or as the starting point for creating your own auto-login script files.
Example 1
Auto-Login With All Terminals Using the Same Account
HostName “*” #Use this to log into any host
WaitFor “login:” #Wait for the login prompt
Send “username<NEWLN>”
WaitFor “Password:”
Send “letmein<ENTER>”
#Send the user name
#Wait for the password prompt
#Send the password
S The HostName command matches the host the user accesses.
S The WaitFor command waits for a string to be displayed by the host. WaitFor takes up to 10 strings, 20 characters long. The strings must be enclosed in quotes and separated by a comma.
S The first Send command sends a fixed user name. The second Send command sends a fixed password.
S Angle brackets < and > can enclose uppercase mnemonics or hexadecimal values.
Example 2
Auto-Login With Different User Names and Passwords
Input “Enter user name”, username
InputHidden “Enter password”, password
HostName “*”
WaitFor “login:”
Send username
Send “<NEWLN>”
WaitFor “Password:” prompt
Send password
Send “<ENTER>”
#Prompt for user name
#Prompt for password
#Wait for login prompt
#Send the user name
#Send a carriage return
#Wait for password
#Send the users password
#Send a carriage return
S The Input and Send commands use input variables. Input commands require a prompt string followed by a comma and a variable name in which to store the string.
S The InputHidden command displays “*” in place of any characters the user types. Place all Input commands before the first HostName command.
S The Send command only accepts a single argument, so you need two Send commands to send the user name and a carriage return.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
189
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Example 3
Auto-Login to an Application
Input “Enter user name”, username
InputHidden ”Enter Password”, password
HostName “*”
WaitFor “login:”
Send username
Send “<NEWLN>”
WaitFor “Password:”
Send password
Send “<ENTER>”
WaitFor “Main Menu”
Send “3”
Send “<ENTER>”
WaitFor “Wip Menu”
Send “1”
Send “<ENTER>”
#Prompt for user name
#Prompt for password
#Wait for login prompt
#Send the user name
#Send a carriage return
#Wait for password prompt
#Send the users password
#Send a carriage return
#Wait for the main menu
#Pick option 3 from menu
#Await work-in-process menu
#Pick option 1 from menu
S Example 3 modifies the script file in Example 2. The additional modification (which starts with
WaitFor “Main Menu”) allows you to move automatically to an application after logging in.
Example 4
Auto-Login With Variable Processing
Input “Enter user name”, username
InputHidden “Enter Password”, password
HostName “BigHost”
WaitFor “User:”
Send username
Send “<NEWLN>”
WaitFor “Password:”
Send password
Send “<ENTER>”
HostName “*”
WaitFor “login:”
Send username
Send “<ENTER>”
WaitFor “Password:”
Send password
Send “<ENTER>”
WaitFor “Main Menu”
Send “3”
Send “<ENTER>”
WaitFor “Wip Menu”
Send “1”
Send “<ENTER>”
#Prompt for user name
#Prompt for password
#Use script portion for BigHost
#Wait for the user prompt
#Send the user name
#Send a carriage return
#Wait for password prompt
#Send the users password
#Send a carriage return
#Match any host name
#Wait for login prompt
#Send the user name
#Send a carriage return
#Wait for password prompt
#Send the users password
#Send a carriage return
#Wait for the main menu
#Pick option 3 from menu
#Await work-in-process menu
#Pick option 1 from menu
S A section for the host name BigHost is added to the beginning of the script file. If you log into any host other than BigHost, the script file starts at the HostName “*” line. This allows for different processing on each host.
190 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Auto-Login Restart
The Auto-Login Restart command starts the auto-login script file from the correct HostName statement in the script file when a host session is broken. For this command to work, the WaitFor string must match the last data sent from the host. For example, if the WaitFor string is the login prompt “login:” with a space after the colon, the WaitFor string must include a space for the auto-login restart to work.
To use the Auto-Login Restart command, press the keys listed in Chapter
3, “Using the Terminal’s Keyboard.” Or, scan the following bar code.
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
191
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Displaying Double-Byte Characters
The 2415 Terminal supports Double-Byte Character Sets. The sets available are Thai, Big 5 (traditional) Chinese, simplified Chinese, Japanese
(Kanji), and Korean (Hangul) and are preloaded on the 2415 Terminal.
To order a Double-Byte Character Set, contact your Intermec representative, then follow instructions in the terminal user manual to install it.
700 Series Terminals
Do the following to load CAB files that support double-byte characters onto your terminal. Be sure to set the terminal’s screen size to 8x16.
1
From your desktop, select Start > Windows Explorer, then browse the
“C:\Program Files\Intermec\TE2000” path for the following CAB files:
Language
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Thai
Korea
Pocket PC 2002
GB700.ARM.CAB
BIG700.ARM.CAB
JP700.ARM.CAB
THAI700.ARM.CAB
DIOPEN1.CAB
Pocket PC 2003 or
Windows Mobile 2003
GB730.ARM.CAB
BIG730.ARM.CAB
JP730.ARM.CAB
THAI730.ARM.CAB
DIOPEN1.CAB
2
Select the appropriate CAB file, do a right-click for a pop-up menu, then select Copy.
3
If you are using the 700 Monochrome Computer:
Within the Mobile Device directory on the 700 Monochrome Computer, tap My Pocket PC > Storage Card > cabfiles. Do a right-click for a pop-up menu, then select Paste.
If you are using the 700 Color Computer with a CompactFlash storage card:
Within the Mobile Device directory, select My Pocket PC > Storage
Card > cabfiles. Do a right-click for a pop-up menu, then select Paste.
If you are using the 700 Color Computer with a Secure Digital storage card:
Within the Mobile Device directory, select My Pocket PC >
SDMMC_Disk > cabfiles. Do a right-click for a pop-up menu, then select Paste.
If neither the CompactFlash nor Secure Digital storage card is installed in the 700 Series Computer, paste the CAB file into the root of the object store.
After extracting the CAB files, perform a warm-boot on the terminal.
When rebooted, the newly copied CAB file automatically activates the double-byte character fonts for usage.
192 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
CK30 Handheld Computers
The CK30 Handheld Computer needs the following CAB files for doublebyte character support.
1
From your desktop, select Start > Windows Explorer, then browse the
“C:\Program Files\Intermec\TE2000” path for the following CAB files:
Language
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Thai
Korea
Windows CE.NET 4.2
GBCK30.ARM.CAB
BIGCK30.ARM.CAB
JPCK30.ARM.CAB
THAICK30.ARM.CAB
KRCK30.ARM.CAB
2
Select the appropriate CAB file, do a right-click for a pop-up menu, then select Copy.
3
Within the Mobile Device directory on your SecureDigital storage card, select My Pocket PC > SDMMC_Disk > cabfiles. Do a right-click for a pop-up menu, then select Paste.
4
After extracting the CAB files, wait 3 minutes before performing a warm-boot on the CK30. When rebooted, the newly copied CAB file automatically activates the double-byte character fonts for usage.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
193
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Creating a Custom Parameter Set-Up File
You can create a custom 5250 TE set-up file to preset almost any parameter you can set from the TE configuration menus. These parameter settings become the default (cold start) configuration for the terminal.
Note: For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals with TE 2000
application versions 8.00 or greater, if a CONFIG.DAT file is present on your terminal, its settings are backed up in a CONFIG.OLD file, then written into a TE_SETTINGS.INI file. If the CONFIG.DAT file is not on your terminal, all settings are written to the TE_SETTINGS.INI file.
Go to page 217 for TE_SETTINGS;INI information and settings.
CONFIG.DAT Settings
Note: CHECKCFG.EXE is no longer used except for Trakker Antares
Terminals 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X. This information is included for Trakker Antares users and for those using TE 2000 application versions older than 8.00 on 700 Series, CK30, or CV60 Terminals.
CONFIG.DAT Syntax
The parameter setup file is an ASCII text file that you create which gets converted to a binary file by the CHECKCFG.EXE utility. New terminals do not come with this utility but it is available by request from the system engineer; or, if you ordered the upgrade version, it is included in the
TOOLS.EXE self-extracting file.
You can name the input file as you choose. When you use the
CHECKCFG utility later to verify the file, you must change the output file name to CONFIG.DAT. A field may have zero or more qualifiers.
The syntax of a line is
FieldName = Value;
or
Qualifier.FieldName = Value;
S FieldName is the name of the parameter you want to modify.
S Value is the new value for the field.
S Qualifier and FieldName must be ASCII strings that match one of the configuration parameters.
S Value can be an ASCII string or a numeric value, depending on the type of the parameter FieldName specifies. The parameters along with their types and allowable values are listed under “Parameters and Qualifiers” later in this chapter.
CHECKCFG.EXE ignores blank lines, leading white space (spaces and tabs), and white space on either side of any delimiter (period, equal sign, or semicolon).
In addition, the set-up file converts consecutive white space characters within strings to one space. For example, this line:
Screen Mode = Page Mode ; is the same as:
Screen Mode=Page Mode;
194 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
You can set the Value field of any configuration parameter to “?”, which indicates that the TE configuration program should prompt the user for the appropriate value. For example, this parameter causes the terminal to prompt the user to select a screen mode from the list of values. Following is a sample setup file.
Screen Mode = ?;
Program Name = MYCUSTOM;
Screen Mode = Page Mode;
Host A.Port Number = 1;
Data Stream = 5250;
Code 39.Encoded = Enabled;
Extended Cmds = Enabled;
CONFIG.DAT Parameter Formats
You can direct the complete parameter list with value definitions to a file using this command:
CHECKCFG –P CFGLIT.DAT > parms.txt
Each parameter in the setup file is followed by one of three different formats that indicates the type of parameter and the values it can contain.
S Literal strings. List of fixed values to choose from. Session 1 or 2 may qualify Screen Mode. It may take the value Center Cursor, Corner
Mode, Page Mode, Lazy Mode, or Locked Mode. Session 1 is the default qualifier. These configuration lines are valid:
Screen Mode = Lazy Mode;
Session 1.Screen Mode = Lazy Mode;
Session 2.Screen Mode = Lazy Mode;
S Numeric parameters. Numeric parameters have minimum and maximum values. Parameters can be either decimal or hexadecimal:
S Decimal parameters consist of digits 0 through 9.
S Hexadecimal parameters consist of 0x or 0X, followed by 1 to 4 digits of 0 through 9, a through f, or A through F. These are equivalent:
160, 0xA0, and 0Xa0.
Port Number is a variable with a minimum value of 0 and a maximum of 65535. These lines are valid:
Port Number = 1;
Session 1.Host A.Port Number = 1;
Session 2.Host A.Port Number = 1;
S String parameters. String parameters are variables with minimum and maximum lengths.
Program Name is unqualified. It must have eight characters. These configuration lines are valid:
Program Name = ABCDEFGH;
Program Name = FWP248H0;
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
195
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Verifying Your CONFIG.DAT Configuration
Use the CHECKCFG utility to verify that you properly configured your set-up file. CHECKCFG reads your configuration and reports any syntax errors. To get the utility, contact your Systems Engineer.
To verify your configuration, type checkcfg <input config file> cfglit.dat config.dat
S <input config file> is the name of your parameter set-up file.
S CFGLIT.DAT contains the strings that appear in the configuration menus, parameter files, and system messages.
S CONFIG.DAT is the name of the output file you will download to the terminal. You must name this file CONFIG.DAT.
You are ready to download the CONFIG.DAT file to the terminal when
CHECKCFG reports no errors. For download instructions, see
“Downloading Files” on page 251.
If CHECKCFG reports an error, use a text editor to open and correct the set-up file. This chart lists the system messages CHECKCFG may display.
Default String Description ID #
Can’t open file Could not locate the input config (configuration) file
Bad option name Right side of expression in input config file has an invalid name
Syntax error Input config file contains a syntax error
F000
F001
F002
Bad string length Right side of expression in input config file has a string too long for specified parameter F003
Unknown type Parameter table in config program has a bad value (testing purposes only, should not occur) F004
Value out of range Right side of expression in input config file has an out-of-range # for specified parameter F005
Bad value Right side of expression in input config file has an invalid string for specified parameter F006
Expected numeric Right side of expression in input config file contains nonnumeric data instead of a numeric value
F007
Missing ’=‘
Missing ’;‘
A line in the input config file does not contain the required “=” (equal sign)
A line in the input config file is not terminated by a “;” (semicolon)
F008
F009
CONFIG.DAT Parameters and Qualifiers
Note: If parameters are duplicated, an error is not generated. Instead, the terminal processes the entire file and uses the last entered value of the duplicated parameter.
Parameters in the set-up file apply to all model numbers unless otherwise noted here. The following pages list each parameter and its qualifiers.
Some qualifiers have default values. If you want to use the default value, you can omit the qualifier from the parameter set-up file. Default qualifiers are listed between square brackets “[ ]” in this chapter.
The CFGLIT.DAT file specifies the text of set-up menus or system messages. Parameters and qualifier strings in the set-up file assume you are using the default CFGLIT.DAT file. To customize CFGLIT.DAT, see “Chang-
ing Text” on page 232.
196 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Trakker Antares terminals using WTP (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X), support dual sessions. If the terminals use UDP Plus or
TCP/IP, then dual sessions are not supported.
Note: Only WTP terminals support dual sessions (“Session 2”). For a list of terminals with WTP, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started.”
Set-Up Parameters Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Set-Up Parameters Options
Options
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Channel
(900 MHz radio).
Data Stream
Note: For TE 2000 application versions
6.60 and greater,
“VT/ANSI” is the default data stream.
Frequency
(S-UHF radio)
[Host A].Channel
Host B.Channel
Host C.Channel
[Host A].Data Stream
Host B.Data Stream
Host C.Data Stream
Host Name
[Host A].Frequency
Host B.Frequency
Host C.Frequency
[Host A].Host
Host B.Host
Host C.Host
Values
Terminals using this option
10, 25, 30, 25, 30, 35, 40 6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX
Native (blank if UDP Plus
or TCP/IP), 3270, 5250,
[VT/ANSI]
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 0xFFFFFFFF
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX
Lan ID
Mode
Port Number
[Host A].Lan
Host B.Lan
Host C.Lan
[Host A].Mode
Host B.Mode
Host C.Mode
[Host A].Port Number
Host B.Port Number
Host C.Port Number
Radio Configuration
Number
[Host A].Radio Config#
Host B.Radio Config#
Host C.Radio Config#
String, minimum = 0, maximum = 16 [null string]
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 254 [0]
applies to 900 MHz
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 15 [0]
applies to 2.4 GHz OpenAir
For 900 MHz radio:
DS 225K, DS 090K,
DS 450K
For S-UHF radio:
Freq Agility, Single Freq
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 65535 [23]
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [0]
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
197
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Set-Up Parameters Options (continued)
Options
Radio Number
(same as unit
number)
Unit Number
(same as radio number)
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
[Host A].Radio #
Host B.Radio #
Host C.Radio #
[Host A].Unit #
Host B.Unit #
Host C.Unit #
Values
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 127 [127]
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 127 [127]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
CK30, CV60 RTC over TCP [Host A].RTC over TCP
Host B.RTC over TCP
Host C.RTC over TCP
Enabled, [Disabled]
Server IP
SNA
[Host A].Server IP
Host B.Server IP
Host C.Server IP
SNA
Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 16 [16]
Enabled, [Disabled]
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Telnet Telnet [Enabled}*
[Disabled}**
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
* [Enabled] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5055 with TE over IP options.
** [Disabled] is the default for 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CV60.
Terminal Type [Host A].Terminal Type
Host B.Terminal Type
Host C.Terminal Type
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [255]
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
198 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Concatenate
MOD 10 Check
ParmsBySession
Redundancy
RS-232 Stream
Scan All Fields
Scan Postamble
Character
Scan Preamble
Character
Scan Timeout
Scanner Type
6400, 5055 support
Laser only
Bar Code Parameters
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Bar Code Parameters
Parameters
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
BC Type Character BC Type Char
Code 39 Encoded Code 39 Encoded
Concatenate
MOD 10 Check
ParmsBySession
Redundancy
RS-232 Stream
Scan All Flds
Scan PostChar
Scan PreChar
Scan Timeout
Scanner Type
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [0]
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [0]
Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 200 [30]
[No Scanner], Wand, Laser,
Wand Emulate, Auto
Detect
Terminals using this parameter
6400, 11XX, 17XX,
59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055, 700
Series, CK30, CV60
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
6400, 11XX, 17XX,
59XX
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X, 5020
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
199
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Bar Code Parameters (continued)
Parameters
Stream Scan
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Stream Scan
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this parameter
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Bar Code Symbologies
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Bar Code Symbologies
Symbologies
ABC Codabar
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
ABC Codabar
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Codabar
Code 11
Code 39
Code 93
Code 128
Codabar
Code 11
Code 39
Code 93
Code 128
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this symbology
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
5020, 11XX, 17XX,
59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
200 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Interleaved 2 of 5 Int 2of5
Plessey (6400 does
not support Plessey alpha characters)
Plessey
Straight 2 of 5 Str 2of5
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Bar Code Symbologies (continued)
Symbologies
Computer Identics
2 of 5
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
CI 2of5
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
EAN
UPC
EAN
UPC
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this symbology
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
201
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Generic Bar Code Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Note: Generic bar code options must be qualified by one of the bar code symbology strings. For example: “Session 1.UPC.Max Length = 13;”
Generic Bar Code Options
Options
Drop Leading
Drop Trailing
Fixed Length 1
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
UPC.Drop Leading
EAN.Drop Leading
Code 128.Drop Leading
Code 39.Drop Leading
Codabar.Drop Leading
ABC Codabar.Drop Leading
Str 2of5.Drop Leading
Int 2of5.Drop Leading
CI 2of5.Drop Leading
Code 11.Drop Leading
Code 93.Drop Leading
Plessey.Drop Leading
UPC.Drop Trailing
EAN.Drop Trailing
Code 128.Drop Trailing
Code 39.Drop Trailing
Codabar.Drop Trailing
ABC Codabar.Drop Trailing
Str 2of5.Drop Trailing
Int 2of5.Drop Trailing
CI 2of5.Drop Trailing
Code 11.Drop Trailing
Code 93.Drop Trailing
Plessey.Drop Trailing
UPC.Fix Length 1
EAN.Fix Length 1
Code 128.Fix Length 1
Code 39.Fix Length 1
Codabar.Fix Length 1
ABC Codabar.Fix Length 1
Str 2of5.Fix Length 1
Int 2of5.Fix Length 1
CI 2of5.Fix Length 1
Code 11.Fix Length 1
Code 93.Fix Length 1
Plessey.Fix Length 1
Values
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 15 [0]
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 15 [0]
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
202 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Generic Bar Code Options (continued)
Options
Fixed Length 2
Fixed Length 3
Fixed Length 4
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
UPC.Fix Length 2
EAN.Fix Length 2
Code 128.Fix Length 2
Code 39.Fix Length 2
Codabar.Fix Length 2
ABC Codabar.Fix Length 2
Str 2of5.Fix Length 2
Int 2of5.Fix Length 2
CI 2of5.Fix Length 2
Code 11.Fix Length 2
Code 93.Fix Length 2
Plessey.Fix Length 2
UPC.Fix Length 3
EAN.Fix Length 3
Code 128.Fix Length 3
Code 39.Fix Length 3
Codabar.Fix Length 3
ABC Codabar.Fix Length 3
Str 2of5.Fix Length 3
Int 2of5.Fix Length 3
CI 2of5.Fix Length 3
Code 11.Fix Length 3
Code 93.Fix Length 3
Plessey.Fix Length 3
UPC.Fix Length 4
EAN.Fix Length 4
Code 128.Fix Length 4
Code 39.Fix Length 4
Codabar.Fix Length 4
ABC Codabar.Fix Length 4
Str 2of5.Fix Length 4
Int 2of5.Fix Length 4
CI 2of5.Fix Length 4
Code 11.Fix Length 4
Code 93.Fix Length 4
Plessey.Fix Length 4
Values
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
203
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Generic Bar Code Options (continued)
Options
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Maximum Length UPC.Max Length
EAN.Max Length
Code 128.Max Length
Code 39.Max Length
Codabar.Max Length
ABC Codabar.Max Length
Str 2of5.Max Length
Int 2of5.Max Length
CI 2of5.Max Length
Code 11.Max Length
Code 93.Max Length
Plessey.Max Length
Minimum Length UPC.Min Length
EAN.Min Length
Code 128.Min Length
Code 39.Min Length
Codabar.Min Length
ABC Codabar.Min Length
Str 2of5.Min Length
Int 2of5.Min Length
CI 2of5.Min Length
Code 11.Min Length
Code 93.Min Length
Plessey.Min Length
Values
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
UPC Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
UPC Options
Options
Add-On 2
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
UPC.Add-On 2
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Add-On 5 UPC.Add-On 5 Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
204 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
UPC Options (continued)
Options
Expand E to A
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
UPC.Expand E to A
System 0 UPCE
System 1 UPCE
UPC.Sys 0 UPCE
UPC.Sys 1 UPCE
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
EAN Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
5020, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
EAN Options
Options
Add-On 2
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
EAN.Add-On 2
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Add-On 5
Expand 8 to 13
EAN.Add-On 5
EAN.Expand 8to13
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
205
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Code 39 Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Code 39 Options
Options
Auto-Encoded
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Code 39.Auto-Encoded
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Check Digit
Data Decode
Element Decode
Encoded
Extended
Full ASCII
Quiet Zone
Code 39.Chk Digit
Code 39.Data decode
Code 39.Element decod
Code 39.Encoded
Code 39.Extended
Code 39.Full ASCII
Code 39.Quiet zone
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
206 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Code 39 Options (continued)
Options
START Decode
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Code 39.START decode
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Interleaved 2 of 5 Option
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Interleaved 2 of 5 Options
Options
Interleaved 2 of 5
Chk Digit
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Interleaved 2 of 5 Chk Digit
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Code 11 Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Code 11 Options
Options
Check Digit 1
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Code 11.Chk Dig 1
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Check Digit 2 Code 11.Chk Dig 2 Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
5020, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
5020, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
207
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Plessey Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Plessey Options
Options
Allow Alpha
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Plessey.Allow Alpha
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
MOD 10 Check
MOD 11 Check
Plessey.MOD10 Chk
Plessey.MOD11 Chk
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Code 128 Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Code 128 Options
Options
No UCC Type
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Code 128.NO UCC Type
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
UCC/EAN Code 128.UCC/EAN Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
208 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Code 128 Options (continued)
Options
UCC F1 Value
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
UPC.UCC F1 Value
EAN.UCC F1 Value
Code 128.UCC F1 Value
Code 39.UCC F1 Value
Codabar.UCC F1 Value
ABC Codabar.UCC F1 Value
Str 2of5.UCC F1 Value
Int 2of5.UCC F1 Value
CI 2of5.UCC F1 Value
Code 11.UCC F1 Value
Code 93.UCC F1 Value
Plessey.UCC F1 Value
Values
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
5250 Protocol Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
5250 Protocol Options
Options
Allow Alias
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Allow Alias
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Allow Negotiate
About Window Size
(NAWS)
Auto Tab Scan
Beep On Error
Device Name
Allow NAWS
Auto Tab Scan
Beep On Error
Device Name
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
String, minimum length =
0, maximum length = 10
[null string] Default is
NULL for 6400, 5020,
5055, 17XX, 11XX, 59XX.
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
209
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
5250 Protocol Options (continued)
Options
Destructive BS
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
DestructiveBS
Lock Error Message Lock Error Msg
Period-Comma
Skip Field Exit
Telnet
Period-Comma
Skip FldExit
Telnet
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Display Options
Options
Backlight State
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Backlight State
Backlight Timer
Display Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Backlight Timer
Values
[Enabled], Disabled
Numeric, minimum = [0], maximum = 60 (2415,
2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475,
248X)
Numeric, minimum = [0], maximum = 255 (6400,
17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 11XX, 17XX,
59XX, 700 Series
210 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Display Options (continued)
Options
Code Page
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Code Page
Values
Terminals using this option
[English], Cyrillic
(Russian), Greek, Hebrew,
Central Europe, Latin 2
700 Series, CK30, CV60
[Compensated], Absolute 11XX, 17XX, 59XX Contrast Mode Contrast Mode
Cursor Mode Cursor Mode [Underln Blink]* (not
supported on 5020)
Block Blink (not supported
on 5020)
Underline (6400, 5020,
5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60)
[Block]** (6400, 5020,
5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60)
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
* [Underln Blink] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X. ** [Block] is the default for 6400, 5020,
5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CV60.
Font Quality Font Quality [Standard], Clear Type CK30
Remote Baud
Remote Display
Remote Display
Remote Columns
Remote Baud
Remote Disp
Remote Cols
9600, 19200, [38400]
Enabled, [Disabled]
Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255 [80]
11XX, 17XX
11XX, 17XX
11XX, 17XX
Remote Display
Remote Rows
Remote Display
Remote Type
Select Font
Remote Rows
Remote Type
Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255 [24]
VT100, VT220, [ANSI]
11XX, 17XX
11XX, 17XX
Select Font Lucida]*, [Courier New]**,
[Courier New Bold]***,
Tahoma
700 Series, CK30, CV60
* [Lucida] is the default for CK30. ** [Courier New] is the default for CV60. *** [Courier New Bold] is the default for 700 Series.
Software Input
Panel Toggle
SIP Toggle Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
211
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Radio Communications Options
Set the Security ID for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X terminals without an 802.1x supplicant radio driver or UDP Plus installed through the Trakker Antares 2400 Menu System.
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Radio Communications Options
Options
Baud Rate
(UHF radio)
[Session 1]
Session 2
Radio Baud Rate
Values
4800, 4800/9600, 9600
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X with
802.1x supplicant radio
Note that the default depends on the type of radio in the terminal.
Disconnection
Value
Protocol
Note the default depends on the radio type and is either
RTC or SST.
Security ID
User Authentication
Disconnect Val
Radio Protocol
Security ID
User Auth
Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 10 [2]
These qualifiers apply to
installed, 6400, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X with
UDP Plus installed
6400, 5055, 11XX,
RTC-Diag Mode,
These qualifiers apply to
SST: SST, SST-Diag Mode
String, minimum length=0, maximum length=16 [null string] Default is
NORANDOWL for 6400,
5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX.
Enabled, [Disabled]
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X with
802.1x supplicant radio driver or UDP Plus installed, 6400, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X with
802.1x supplicant radio driver installed
More Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
More Options
Options
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Change Menu
Password
Change Menu Password
You must enable and set the password to access the Main
Menu before you can change it. To set the password, see above.
COM Select Com Select
Values
String, minimum length =
To enable the password, see
“Main Menu password.”
[COM 1], COM 2
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
248X, 5055
212 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
More Options (continued)
Options
Main Menu
Password
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Menu Password
You must enable and set the password to access the Main
Menu. To enable or disable the password, see above.
Print Device Print Device
Printer Address
Printer Port
Printer Address
Printer Port
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
To set the password, see
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
[RS232 Print],
IRDA Print (6400, 700
Series, CV60)
RF Print (700 Series, CK30,
CV60)
Pan Print (700 Series, CK30
Bluetooth Printing)
String, minimum length=0, maximum length=16 [null string]
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 65535 [23]
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
6400, 5020, 700 Series,
CK30, CV60
5020, 700 Series, CK30,
CV60
5020, 700 Series, CK30,
CV60
LCD Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
LCD Options
Options
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Annunciator Format Annun Format
Values
Terminals using this option
[Vertical]*, [Horizontal]** 2415, 2425, 2435A,
* [Vertical] is the default for 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 700 Series, CK30.
** [Horizontal] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 6400, CV60.
Annunciator
Position
Annun Position Upper Right, Upper Left,
[Lower Right]*, Lower Left,
[Stealth]**
* [Lower Right] is the default for 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series,
CK30. ** [Stealth] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, CV60.
Backlight Intensity BLight Intensity
Define Height
(Scroll Window)
Define Height
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 15
Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 24 [8]
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
59XX
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
213
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
LCD Options (continued)
Options
Define Width
(Scroll Window)
Key Uppercase
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Define Width
Key Uppercase
Values
Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 80 [8]
[Enabled], Disabled
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
LCD Contrast
Screen Columns
LCD Contrast
Screen Cols
Numeric, minimum = [0], maximum = 255
Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255
[16]*, [17]**, [19]***,
[20]****, [40]*****,
[80]******, [16]*******
17XX, 59XX
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
* [16] is the default for 11XX. ** [17] is the default for 17XX. *** [19] is the default for 2435A.
**** [20] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2455, 2475, 2481, 2486. ***** [40] is the default for 2480, 2485, 59XX.
****** [80] is the default for 5055, CV60. ******* [16] is default for 6400 Wide Display, 5020, 700 Series, CK30.
Screen Mode Screen Mode Center Cursor, [Corner
Mode], Page Mode, Lazy
Mode, Locked Mode
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Screen Rows Screen Rows Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255
[8]*, [8]**, [10]***,
[16]****, [17]*****,
[25]******, [16]*******
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
* [8] is the default for 11XX. ** [8] is the default for 17XX. *** [10] is the default for 5020, 59XX, 700 Series,
CK30. **** [16] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 2481, 2486. ***** [17] is the default for 2480,
2485. ****** [25] is the default for 5055, CV60. ******* [16] is the default for 6400 Wide Display.
Scroll Window
XOrigin
Scroll Window
XOrigin
Screen Size, Scroll Setting,
[Tab Size]
Numeric minimum = 0, maximum = 79 [0]
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
214 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
LCD Options (continued)
Options
YOrigin
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
YOrigin
Values
Numeric minimum = 0, maximum = 23 [0]
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Beeper Setup Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Beeper Setup Options
Options
Beep Head Set
Beep Internal
[Session 1]
Session 2
Beep Head Set
Beep Internal
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
[Enabled], Disabled
Terminals using this option
17XX
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX
Beeper (Error Tone)
Frequency
Beep Frequency
* [13] is the default for 17XX, 11XX. ** [6] is the default for 6400.
Beeper (Error Tone)
Length
Beep Length Numeric, minimum= 1 , maximum= 10 [3]
Beep Volume
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 30 [13]*, [6]**
Beeper (Error Tone)
Volume
Key Click
Frequency
KeyClick Freq
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [95]
Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 30 [13]*, [6]**
* [13] is the default for 17XX, 11XX. ** [6] is the default for 6400.
Key Click Length KeyClick Length Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 10 [1]*, [6]**
* [1] is the default for 59XX, 17XX, 11XX. ** [6] is the default for 6400, 5055.
Key Click Volume KeyClick Volume Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [95]
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX
59XX
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX
6400, 5055, 11XX,
17XX, 59XX
59XX
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
215
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
More (Main Menu 2) Options
Options
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Foreground Session Foreground Sess
Session Name
Set Hot Key
Type-Ahead
More (Main Menu 2) Option
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Session Name
Set Hot Key
Type-Ahead
Values
None
Terminals using this option
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X with
WTP protocol stack,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
700 Series, CK30, CV60 String, minimum length =
0, maximum length = 64
[null string]
F1 through F24, [Disabled] 2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X with
WTP protocol stack,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
[Enabled], Disabled 2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
Additional Parameters
These parameters do not have equivalent TE configuration menu options.
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Additional Parameters
Parameters
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Values
Terminals using this parameter
Alternate Screen
Columns
Double Byte
Character Set
(DBCS) Code
Alt Screen Cols Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255
[17]*, [40]**, [16]***
6400, 5055, 17XX
* [17] is the default for 17XX. ** [40] is the default for 5055. *** [16] is the default for 6400.
Alternate Screen
Rows
Alt Screen Rows Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255,
[8]*, [12]**, [16]***
6400 Wide Display,
5055, 17XX
* [8] is the default for 17XX. ** [12] is the default for 5055. *** [16] is the default for 6400 Wide Display.
DBCS Code Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 16 [0]
59XX
216 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Additional Parameters (continued)
Parameters
Key Repeat
Program Name
(appears on initialization and version screens)
Program Version
(appears on initialization and version screens)
Return Result
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)
Key Repeat
Program Name
This is a test feature for VT/ANSI emulation; if disabled, extended commands (for #K only) does not return a result to the host application.
Set-Up Parms Menu
Password
Program Version
Return Result
Password
Values
Enabled, [Disabled]
String, minimum length =
1, maximum length = 8
String, minimum length =
1, maximum length = 4
[Enabled], Disabled
String, minimum length =
1, maximum length = 10
[CR52401]
Terminals using this parameter
59XX
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, 248X,
6400, 5020, 5055,
11XX, 17XX, 59XX,
700 Series, CK30, CV60
TE_SETTINGS.INI Settings
For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals with TE 2000 application
versions 8.00 or greater, the following settings are available.
Upgrading from CONFIG.DAT Configuration
Note that the settings from the CONFIG.DAT file are the same as the settings for the TE_SETTINGS.INI file. For example, the
CONFIG.DAT setting:
[Host A].Host
would appear as session_1|host_a|host = 136.179.84.76
in the
TE_SETTINGS.INI file.
All values follow the [iccu values] section and use the pipe character to separate the names. The settings and literals are the same as the old
CONFIG.DAT with the exception of the use of the different naming convention using the pipe (”|”). Below are a few values from the
CONFIG.DAT file as they appear in the TE_SETTINGS.INI file.
[iccu values] session_1|host_a|host = 136.179.84.76
session_1|host_a|port_number = 23 session_1|destructive_bs = 0
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
217
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
218
TE_SETTINGS.INI Configuration
“enable_sip“ = 0 or 1
This enables or disables the interaction between the TE 2000 application and the onscreen keyboard. If this value is 1, the TE 2000 application displays the SIP when it starts and when it gains focus. If this value is 0, the
TE 2000 application does not display the SIP and it does not toggle the
SIP when you click the SIP toggle button.
“sip_settings“ = {674EC110-EFF0-47D3-B828-CDB2A6CCD3EB}
This is a GUID (globally unique identifier) that identifies the SIP that the
TE 2000 application is to use as its default. This can be the GUID of any registered SIP in the system.
These are for debugging purposes only. They inform which version of the
TE 2000 application created the TE_SETTINGS.INI file.
S program_name = FWP700H0
S program_version = 7.53
TE_SETTINGS.INI Parameter Formats
Each parameter in the setup file is followed by one of three different formats that indicates the type of parameter and the values it can contain.
Formats are as follows:
S Literal strings. List of fixed values to choose from. Session 1 or 2 may qualify Screen Mode. It may take the value Center Cursor, Corner
Mode, Page Mode, Lazy Mode, or Locked Mode. Session 1 is the default qualifier. These configuration lines are valid: screen_mode = Lazy Mode; session_1|screen_mode = Lazy Mode; session_2|screen Mode = Lazy Mode;
S Numeric parameters. Numeric parameters have minimum and maximum values. Parameters can be either decimal or hexadecimal:
S Decimal parameters consist of digits 0 through 9.
S Hexadecimal parameters consist of 0x or 0X, followed by 1 to 4 digits of 0 through 9, a through f, or A through F. These are equivalent:
160, 0xA0, and 0Xa0.
Port Number is a variable with a minimum value of 0 and a maximum of 65535. These lines are valid: port_number = 1; session_1|host_a|port_number = 1; session_2|host_a|port_number = 1;
S String parameters. String parameters are variables with minimum and maximum lengths.
Program Name is unqualified. It must have eight characters. These configuration lines are valid: program_name = ABCDEFGH; program_name = FWP248H0;
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
TE_SETTINGS.INI Parameters and Qualifiers
Note: If parameters are duplicated, an error is not generated. Instead, the terminal processes the entire file and uses the last entered value of the duplicated parameter.
Parameters in the set-up file apply to all model numbers unless otherwise noted here. The following pages list each parameter and its qualifiers.
Some qualifiers have default values. If you want to use the default value, you can omit the qualifier from the parameter set-up file.
The CFGLIT.DAT file specifies the text of set-up menus or system messages. Parameters and qualifier strings in the set-up file assume you are using the default CFGLIT.DAT file. To customize CFGLIT.DAT, see “Chang-
ing Text” on page 232.
Note: Only WTP terminals support dual sessions (“Session 2”). For a list of terminals with WTP, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started.”
Set-Up Parameters Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Set-Up Parameters Options
Options
Data Stream
Host Name
Port Number
Radio Number
(same as unit
number)
RTC over TCP
Server IP
SNA
Telnet
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values host_a|data_stream (default) host_b|data_stream host_c|data_stream host_a|host (default) host_b|host host_c|host
Native (blank if UDP
Plus or TCP/IP),
3270, 5250,
[VT/ANSI]
String, minimum = 0, host_a|port_number (default) host_b|port_number host_c|port_number maximum = 16 [null string]
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 65535
[23] host_a|radio_# (default) host_b|radio_# host_c|radio_# host_a|rtc_over_tcp (default) host_b|rtc_over_tcp host_c|rtc_over_tcp host_a|server_ip (default) host_b|server_ip host_c|server_ip sna telnet
Terminals using this option
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 127
[127]
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Numeric, minimum =
1, maximum = 16
[16]
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled} 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
219
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Set-Up Parameters Options (continued)
Options
Terminal Type
Unit Number
(same as radio number)
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) host_a|terminal_type (default) host_b|terminal_type host_c|terminal_type host_a|unit_# (default) host_b|unit_# host_c|unit_#
Values
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 255
[255]
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 127
[127]
Terminals using this option
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Bar Code Parameters
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Bar Code Parameters
Parameters
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values
BC Type Character bc_type_char
Code 39 Encoded
Concatenate code_39_encoded concatenate
Terminals using this parameter
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
MOD 10 Check mod_10_check
ParmsBySession parmsbysession
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Scan All Fields scan_all_flds
Scan Postamble
Character
Scan Preamble
Character
Scanner Type scan_postchar scan_prechar scanner_type
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 255
[0]
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 255
[0]
[No Scanner], Wand,
Laser, Wand Emulate,
Auto Detect
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Stream Scan
Use Wedge Mode stream_scan use_wedge_mode
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
220 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Bar Code Symbologies
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Bar Code Symbologies
Symbologies
ABC Codabar
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values abc_codabar Scanner_type = 33
Codabar
Code 11
Code 39
Code 93
Code 128
Computer Identics
2 of 5
EAN
Interleaved 2 of 5
Plessey
Straight 2 of 5
UPC codabar code_11 code_39 code_93 code_128 ci_2of5 ean int_2of5 plessey str_2of5 upc
Scanner_type = 32
Scanner_type = 56
Scanner_type = 40
Scanner_type = 72
Scanner_type = 64
Scanner_type = 50
Scanner_type = 17
Scanner_type = 51
Scanner_type = 8
Scanner_type = 49
Scanner_type = 16
Terminals using this symbology
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
221
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Generic Bar Code Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Note: Generic bar code options must be qualified by one of the bar code symbology strings. For example: “session_1|upc|max_length = 13;”
Generic Bar Code Options
Options
Drop Leading
Drop Trailing
Fixed Length 1
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 15 [0] upc|drop_leading ean|drop_leading code_128|drop_leading code_39|drop_leading codabar|drop_leading abc_codabar|drop_leading str_2of5|drop_leading int_2of5|drop_leading ci_2of5|drop_leading code_11|drop_leading code_93|drop_leading plessey|drop_leading upc|drop_trailing ean|drop_trailing code_128|drop_trailing code_39|drop_trailing codabar|drop_trailing abc_codabar|drop_trailing str_2of5|drop_trailing int_2of5|drop_trailing ci_2of5|drop_trailing code_11|drop_trailing code_93|drop_trailing plessey|drop_trailing upc|fix_length_1 ean|fix_length_1 code_128|fix_length_1 code_39|fix_length_1 codabar|fix_length_1 abc_codabar|fix_length_1 str_2of5|fix_length_1 int_2of5|fix_length_1 ci_2of5|fix_length_1 code_11|fix_length_1 code_93|fix_length_1 plessey|fix_length_1
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 15 [0]
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 99 [0]
Terminals using this option
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
222 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Generic Bar Code Options (continued)
Options
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Fixed Length 2
Fixed Length 3 upc|fix_length_2 ean|fix_length_2 code_128|fix_length_2 code_39|fix_length_2 codabar|fix_length_2 abc_codabar|fix_length_2 str_2of5|fix_length_2 int_2of5|fix_length_2 ci_2of5|fix_length_2 code_11|fix_length_2 code_93|fix_length_2 plessey|fix_length_2 upc|fix_length_3 ean|fix_length_3 code_128|fix_length_3 code_39|fix_length_3 codabar|fix_length_3 abc_codabar|fix_length_3 str_2of5|fix_length_3 int_2of5|fix_length_3 ci_2of5|fix_length_3 code_11|fix_length_3 code_93|fix_length_3 plessey|fix_length_3
Fixed Length 4 upc|fix_length_4 ean|fix_length_4 code_128|fix_length_4 code_39|fix_length_4 codabar|fix_length_4 abc_codabar|fix_length_4 str_2of5|fix_length_4 int_2of5|fix_length_4 ci_2of5|fix_length_4 code_11|fix_length_4 code_93|fix_length_4 plessey|fix_length_4
Maximum Length upc|max_length ean|max_length code_128|max_length code_39|max_length codabar|max_length abc_codabar|max_length str_2of5|max_length int_2of5|max_length ci_2of5|max_length code_11|max_length code_93|max_length plessey|max_length
Values
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 99 [0]
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 99 [0]
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 99 [0]
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 99 [0]
Terminals using this option
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
223
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Generic Bar Code Options (continued)
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Options
Minimum Length upc|min_length ean|min_length code_128|min_length code_39|min_length codabar|min_length abc_codabar|min_length str_2of5|min_length int_2of5|min_length ci_2of5|min_length code_11|min_length code_93|min_length plessey|min_length
Values
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 99 [0]
Terminals using this option
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
UPC Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
UPC Options
Options
Add-On 2
Add-On 5
Expand E to A
System 0 UPCE
System 1 UPCE
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values upc|add-on_2 upc|add-on_5 upc|expand_e_to_a upc|sys_0_upce upc|sys_1_upce
Terminals using this option
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
224 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
EAN Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
EAN Options
Options
Add-On 2
Add-On 5
Expand 8 to 13
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values ean|add-on_2
Terminals using this option
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 ean|add-on_5 ean|expand_8to13
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Code 39 Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Code 39 Options
Options
Auto-Encoded
Check Digit
Data Decode
Element Decode
Encoded
Extended
Full ASCII
Quiet Zone
START Decode
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values code_39|auto-encoded code_39|chk_digit
Terminals using this option
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 code_39|data_decode code_39|element_decod code_39|encoded code_39|extended
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 code_39|full_ascii code_39|quiet_zone code_39|start_decode
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
225
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Interleaved 2 of 5 Option
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Interleaved 2 of 5 Options
Options
Interleaved 2 of 5
Chk Digit
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values interleaved_2_of_5_chk_digit
Terminals using this option
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Code 11 Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Code 11 Options
Options
Check Digit 1
Check Digit 2
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values code_11|chk_dig_1 code_11|chk_dig_2
Terminals using this option
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Plessey Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Plessey Options
Options
Allow Alpha
MOD 10 Check
MOD 11 Check
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values plessey|allow_alpha plessey|mod10_chk
Terminals using this option
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 plessey|mod11_chk Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
226 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Code 128 Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Code 128 Options
Options
No UCC Type
UCC/EAN
UCC F1 Value
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values code_128|no_ucc_type code_128|ucc\ean
Terminals using this option
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 upc|ucc_f1_value ean|ucc_f1_value code_128|ucc_f1_value code_39|ucc_f1_value codabar|ucc_f1_value abc_codabar|ucc_f1_value str_2of5|ucc_f1_value int_2of5|ucc_f1_value ci_2of5|ucc_f1_value code_11|ucc_f1_value code_93|ucc_f1_value plessey|ucc_f1_value
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 255
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
5250 Protocol Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
5250 Protocol Options
Options
Allow Alias
Allow Negotiate
About Window Size
(NAWS)
Auto Tab Scan
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values allow_alias allow_naws
Terminals using this option
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60 auto_tab_scan
Beep On Error
Device Name
Destructive BS beep_on_error device_name destructivebs
Lock Error Message lock_error_msg
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
String, minimum length = 0, maximum length = 10 [null string]
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
227
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
5250 Protocol Options (continued)
Options
Period-Comma
Skip Field Exit
Telnet
Use Color
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) period-comma skip_fldexit telnet use_color
Values
Terminals using this option
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Display Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Display Options
Options
Backlight State
Backlight Timer
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values backlight_state backlight_timer
Terminals using this option
[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Numeric, minimum =
[0], maximum = 255
700 Series
Code Page
Cursor Mode
Font Quality code_page cursor_mode font_quality
[English], Cyrillic
(Russian), Greek,
Hebrew, Central
Europe, Latin 2
Underln Blink
Block Blink
Underline
[Block]
[Standard], Clear
Type
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
CK30, CK31
Select Font select_font Lucida]*, [Courier
New]**, [Courier
New Bold]***,
Tahoma
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
* [Lucida] is the default for CK30, CK31. ** [Courier New] is the default for CV60. *** [Courier New Bold] is the default for 700 Series.
228 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
More Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
More Options
Options
Change Menu
Password
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values change_menu_password String, minimum length = 1, maximum
Terminals using this option
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
You must enable and set the password to access the Main Menu before you can change it. To set the password, see above.
Main Menu
Password menu_password
You must enable and set the password to access the Main Menu.
To enable or disable the password, see above.
Print Device print_device
To enable the password, see “Main
Menu password.”
Enabled, [Disabled]
password.”
Printer Address
Printer Port printer_address printer_port
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
[RS232 Print],
IRDA Print (700
Series, CV60)
RF Print (700 Series,
CK30, CK31, CV60)
Pan Print (700 Series,
CK30 Bluetooth
Printing)
String, minimum length=0, maximum length=16 [null string]
Numeric, minimum =
0, maximum = 65535
[23]
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
LCD Options
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
LCD Options
Options
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values
Terminals using this option
Annunciator Format annun_format [Vertical]*,
[Horizontal]**
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
* [Vertical] is the default for 700 Series, CK30, CK31. ** [Horizontal] is the default for CV60.
Annunciator
Position annun_position Upper Right, Upper
Left, [Lower Right]*,
Lower Left,
[Stealth]**
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
* [Lower Right] is the default for 700 Series, CK30, CK31. ** [Stealth] is the default for CV60.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
229
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
LCD Options (continued)
Options
Define Height
(Scroll Window)
Define Width
(Scroll Window)
Key Uppercase
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) define_height define_width key_uppercase
Values
Numeric, minimum =
1, maximum = 24 [8]
Numeric, minimum =
1, maximum = 80 [8]
Terminals using this option
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Screen Columns screen_cols Numeric, minimum =
1, maximum = 255
16, 17, 19, 20, 40,
[80]*, [16]**
* [80] is the default for CV60. ** [16] is default for 700 Series, CK30, CK31.
Screen Mode screen_mode
Screen Rows screen_rows
Center Cursor,
[Corner Mode], Page
Mode, Lazy Mode,
Locked Mode
Numeric, minimum =
1, maximum = 255
8, 8, [10]*, 16, 17,
[25]**, 16
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
* [10] is the default for 700 Series, CK30, CK31. ** [25] is the default for CV60.
Scroll Window scroll_window Screen Size, Scroll
Setting, [Tab Size]
XOrigin xorigin
YOrigin yorigin
Numeric minimum =
0, maximum = 79 [0]
Numeric minimum =
0, maximum = 23 [0]
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
230 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
More (Main Menu 2) Option
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
More (Main Menu 2) Options
Options
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values
Foreground Session foreground_sess None
Session Name
Set Hot Key
Type-Ahead session_name set_hot_key type-ahead
Terminals using this option
String, minimum length = 0, maximum length = 64 [null string]
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
F1 through F24,
[Disabled]
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
Additional Parameters
These parameters do not have equivalent TE configuration menu options.
Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.
Additional Parameters
Parameters
Program Name
[Session 1]
Session 2
Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values program_name String, minimum length = 1, maximum length = 8
(appears on initialization and version screens)
Program Version program_version String, minimum
Terminals using this parameter
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
700 Series, CK30,
(appears on initialization and version screens) length = 4
Return Result
Set-Up Parms Menu
Password return_result password
[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
(this is a test feature for VT/ANSI emulation; if disabled, extended commands (for #K only) will not return a result to the host application)
String, minimum length = 1, maximum length = 10
[CR52401]
700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
231
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Changing Text
Modify CFGLIT.DAT to change the text of TE configuration menus, configuration parameters, or system messages. This file contains the strings that appear in the configuration menus, parameter set-up files, and system messages.
An identification (ID) number identifies each literal string. To create your own literal file, you create a text file that associates these numbers with the actual literal strings. You then use MAKELIT.EXE to convert the text file to a format the configuration program can use.
Each line in the literal text file begins with the literal ID number. After the
ID number, you type the quoted string that is used when that ID number is referenced. If you omit an ID number, its string appears as “Bad Literal
File” when you run the program in the terminal.
Literal ID numbers are available upon request from Intermec. Contact your Intermec representative for more information about ID numbers.
You can create a sample file containing the default literal strings using
MAKELIT.EXE to “reverse engineer” the standard CFGLIT.DAT file. To do this, type the following command line to unpack CFGLIT.DAT into a
CFGLIT.TXT text file: makelit -r cfglit.dat cfglit.txt
The CFGLIT.TXT file this command creates contains all the default strings the configuration program uses. One line in CFGLIT.TXT looks like this:
0x2f10 “RS232 PORT\nIN USE\n\nPLEASE WAIT!”
“0x2f10” is the literal ID number for the RS-232 port-in-use message that appears when a personal computer sends an RS-232 command to the TE program. The message text follows the ID number in a quoted string. The embedded “\n” sequence within the quoted string indicates a “new line” character and outputs a carriage return/line feed. To change the text of the message that appears, change the quoted string. For example, change the above line to look like this:
0x2f10 “Printing\nPlease Wait!”
When you have a text file with one line for every ID number, use
MAKELIT.EXE to convert the file to an indexed literal file. If your text file is named CFGLIT.TXT, you would type the following command which creates the new literal CFGLIT.DAT file. For instructions on how to download the file, see “Downloading Files” on page 251.
makelit cfglit.txt cfglit.dat
232 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Preinitializing the 5250 TE Program
You can preinitialize the 5250TE program. You must name the 5250 initialization file as 5250.INI. The file is processed when you reset or warm start the terminal. The file is processed as if the radio had received the data, and must be in the “on-air” format. For instructions on how to download the file, see “Downloading Files” on page 251.
Data is encoded in binary format. To create 5250.INI, you may need a
HEX editor or other special program.
5250 initialization files are composed of the following:
S A prefix of 0 to 255 bytes
S The body of the message, which may be empty or may contain either
LU-LU or SS-LU data
Prefix bytes are described as follows:
S The first byte of any 5250 data stream prefix contains the length of the prefix. This length may be 0 to indicate that there is no prefix information in the message.
S The second byte of the prefix is a value indicating the session to which the body of the message belongs. It can be either 0xC0 for the LU-LU session (normal 5250 commands), or 0x40 for the SS-LU session (SS messages).
If no prefix is processed, the default session is LU-LU. Once a prefix has been received with a valid session identifier, that session becomes the default until another is received. After the session identifier, the prefix may contain a 5250 signal. The following signals are supported:
0xC9 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 Turns on the message waiting indicator
0xC9 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x05 Turns off the message waiting indicator
The body of the message can contain either an SS message, if the current session is SS-LU, or normal 5250 data stream commands if the current session is LU-LU. All data within the message body is encoded as EBC-
DIC. An SS message contains displayable data that is displayed on the
5250 error row in SS message state.
The following example shows how to display “HELLO WORLD” and beep the beeper from within a data stream initialization file. The line of hexadecimal digits represent the binary values that must be stored in the initialization files.
01 c0 04 40 04 11 40 04 c8 c5 d3 d3 d6 40 e6 d6 d9 d3 c4
H E L L O W O R L D
Write display command with alarm bit set in command control byte
Clear unit command
LU-LU session identifier in prefix
Prefix length
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
233
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Remapping the Terminal’s Keys
Note: These instructions assume the REMAP.CFG file is downloaded onto your terminal. For instructions on how to download the file to the terminal, see “Downloading Files” on page 251.
You may need to remap the terminal’s keys if your users need to press a key in 5250 that is not on a standard 101-key keyboard. You can also remap a terminal key to transmit a text string or message to the computer.
To remap the terminal keys, you create the REMAP.CFG file and add a
Remap command to remap a terminal key. You can remap a single key or a two-key sequence. You can add a Remap command or create a macro in the REMAP.CFG file that remaps a single key or a two-key sequence.
You can remap any terminal key or two-key sequence that does not perform a specific function on the terminal. For example, you can remap the
[B] key because it only types the lowercase letter B.
Note: On the 2425, 2455, 2475, and 248X, you cannot remap the twokey sequence ) [ because it moves the window/viewport up on the
Trakker Antares Terminals.
Each terminal key or two-key sequence generates a 4-digit hexadecimal remap code as listed in the “Key Code” table starting on page 236. The key code table gives the 4-digit hexadecimal codes for ASCII characters for the terminals. These codes identify the key or keys pressed. For example:
Key
[B]
[SHIFT] [B]
[CTRL] [B]
Action
Types a lowercase B
Types an uppercase B
None
4-Digit Hex Key Code
0062
0042
0002
Remapping a Key or Two-Key Sequence
Note: For terminals made before 1997, refer to the “Using FLSHCONV” section for the proper -e parameter value.
1
Choose the key or two-key sequence to remap and determine the current 4-digit hexadecimal code of the keys and the code you will enter to remap the keys. For help, see the “Key Code” table on the next page.
2
Connect the terminal to your personal computer.
3
Using any text editor, enter the keys you want remapped on individual lines in this format: remap=<key>=”string” or remap=<key>=<key>
S remap is the command you enter in REMAP.CFG.
S key is the 4-digit hexadecimal key or keys to which or from which you are remapping.
234 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
S string is the new function for the key or keys, which can be a text string, ASCII mnemonic, or another 2-byte hexadecimal code. Enclose the entire string in quotation marks.
4
Save the new file as REMAP.CFG.
5
Download REMAP.CFG to drive C: on your terminal.
Example 1
Suppose you want to remap “+” on your terminal to send a message and then enter a carriage return. In the REMAP.CFG file, add this command:
remap=<002b>=“My battery is low.<CR>”
Example 2
To remap the function of the function keys to another key, replace string with the transmitted code for the function and replace key with the 4-digit hexadecimal key that will do the function. For example, to remap the [F6] function to the “B” key, add this command to the REMAP.CFG file: remap=<0042>=“<ESC>[17~”
Example 3
This is an example of multiple hexadecimal codes in the right-most argument which makes a key into a text sequence with embedded EHLLAPI values for the [F4] and [F5] keys.
r emap=<xxxx>=”EHLLAPI value”<1034>”EHLLAPI value
2”<1035>”END
Creating a Macro
1
Using any text editor, add the macro=<key>=“string” Macro command to the end of the REMAP.CFG file, where:
S macro is the command you enter in REMAP.CFG.
S key is the 4-digit hexadecimal key or keys you are remapping.
S string is the new action for the key or keys. The string can be a text string, ASCII mnemonic, or another 2-byte hexadecimal code. Enclose the entire string in quotation marks.
2
At the end of the macro, type
runmacro=<key>
where key is the
4-digit hexadecimal code that identifies the keys that activate the macro.
3
Save the file name as REMAP.CFG for the macros to work.
4
Append the new remap to the original hex file using one of the following commands. Replace ??? with your type of terminal:
S 59XX Terminals
FLSHCONV -a –eE000 FWP59??H0.HEX REMAP.CFG –oNEW.HEX
S 17XX, 11XX Terminals
FLSHCONV -a –eFFC0 FWP1???H0.HEX REMAP.CFG –oNEW.HEX
5
Download REMAP.CFG to drive C on your terminal.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
235
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Example
You can assign “+” to activate a macro that remaps [B] to send the message, “Change the battery pack now.” In the REMAP.CFG file, add this command: macro=<0042>=”Change the battery pack now.<CR>” runmacro=<002b>
Nesting
Macros do not nest. The right-most argument is processed as key strokes and not scanned for macro values. For example:
// swap “3” and “5” keys remap=<0033>=“5” // map “3” key to a “5” key remap=<0035>=“3” // map “5” key to a “3” key
The “3” key produces a “5” key. If nesting was allowed, the “5” key is recognized as a macro that produces the “3” key and the “3” key is recognized as a “5” key that produces the “7” key, and so forth.
Remapping Keys for Each Session
Use the following syntax to remap keys for each session. The session number can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals. The 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X Terminals only support session 1 and 2. 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, and 11XX
Terminals do not allow this feature.
remap=Session1<keyval>=”string”
Macro=Session1<keyval>=”string”
Runmacro=Session1<keyval>
Note: The string comparison for the “Session” string is case-sensitive.
Key Code Table
Note: Values that are not listed here may work but are not supported.
remap=<0020>=“string” /* SPACE key */ remap=<0021>=“string” /* ! key */ remap=<0022>=“string” /* ” key */ remap=<0023>=“string” /* # key */ remap=<0024>=“string” /* $ key */ remap=<0025>=“string” /* % key */ remap=<0026>=“string” /* & key */ remap=<0027>=“string” /* ’ key */ remap=<0028>=“string” /* ( key */ remap=<0029>=“string” /* ) key */ remap=<002a>=“string” /* * key */ remap=<002b>=“string” /* + key */ remap=<002c>=“string” /* , key */ remap=<002d>=“string” /* - key */ remap=<002e>=“string” /* . key */ remap=<002f>=“string” /* / key */
236 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
remap=<0030>=“string” /* 0 key*/ remap=<0031>=“string” /* 1 key*/ remap=<0032>=“string” /* 2 key*/ remap=<0033>=“string” /* 3 key*/ remap=<0034>=“string” /* 4 key*/ remap=<0035>=“string” /* 5 key*/ remap=<0036>=“string” /* 6 key*/ remap=<0037>=“string” /* 7 key*/ remap=<0038>=“string” /* 8 key*/ remap=<0039>=“string” /* 9 key*/ remap=<003a>=“string” /* : key */ remap=<003b>=“string” /* ; key */ remap=<003c>=“string” /* < key */ remap=<003d>=“string” /* = key */ remap=<003e>=“string” /* > key */ remap=<003f>=“string” /* ? key */ remap=<0040>=“string” /* @ key */ remap=<0041>=“string” /* A key*/ remap=<0042>=“string” /* B key*/ remap=<0043>=“string” /* C key*/ remap=<0044>=“string” /* D key*/ remap=<0045>=“string” /* E key*/ remap=<0046>=“string” /* F key*/ remap=<0047>=“string” /* G key*/ remap=<0048>=“string” /* H key*/ remap=<0049>=“string” /* I key*/ remap=<004a>=“string” /* J key*/ remap=<004b>=“string” /* K key*/ remap=<004c>=“string” /* L key*/ remap=<004d>=“string” /* M key*/ remap=<004e>=“string” /* N key*/ remap=<004f>=“string” /* O key*/ remap=<0050>=“string” /* P key*/ remap=<0051>=“string” /* Q key*/ remap=<0052>=“string” /* R key*/ remap=<0053>=“string” /* S key*/ remap=<0054>=“string” /* T key*/ remap=<0055>=“string” /* U key*/ remap=<0056>=“string” /* V key*/ remap=<0057>=“string” /* W key*/ remap=<0058>=“string” /* X key*/ remap=<0059>=“string” /* Y key*/ remap=<005a>=“string” /* Z key*/ remap=<005b>=“string” /* [ key */ remap=<005c>=“string” /* \ key */ remap=<005d>=“string” /* ] key */ remap=<005e>=“string” /* ^ key */ remap=<005f>=“string” /* _ key */ remap=<0060>=“string” /* ‘ key */
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
237
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
238
remap=<0061>=“string” /* a key*/ remap=<0062>=“string” /* b key*/ remap=<0063>=“string” /* c key*/ remap=<0064>=“string” /* d key*/ remap=<0065>=“string” /* e key*/ remap=<0066>=“string” /* f key*/ remap=<0067>=“string” /* g key*/ remap=<0068>=“string” /* h key*/ remap=<0069>=“string” /* i key*/ remap=<006a>=“string” /* j key*/ remap=<006b>=“string” /* k key*/ remap=<006c>=“string” /* l key*/ remap=<006d>=“string” /* m key*/ remap=<006e>=“string” /* n key*/ remap=<006f>=“string” /* o key*/ remap=<0070>=“string” /* p key*/ remap=<0071>=“string” /* q key*/ remap=<0072>=“string” /* r key*/ remap=<0073>=“string” /* s key*/ remap=<0074>=“string” /* t key*/ remap=<0075>=“string” /* u key*/ remap=<0076>=“string” /* v key*/ remap=<0077>=“string” /* w key*/ remap=<0078>=“string” /* x key*/ remap=<0079>=“string” /* y key*/ remap=<007a>=“string” /* z key*/ remap=<007b>=“string” /* { key */ remap=<007c>=“string” /* | key */ remap=<007d>=“string” /* } key */ remap=<007e>=“string” /* ~ key */ remap=<007f>=“string” /* Del key */ remap=<1030>=“string” /* Home key */ remap=<1031>=“string” /* F1 key */ remap=<1032>=“string” /* F2 key */ remap=<1033>=“string” /* F3 key */ remap=<1034>=“string” /* F4 key */ remap=<1035>=“string” /* F5 key */ remap=<1036>=“string” /* F6 key */ remap=<1037>=“string” /* F7 key */ remap=<1038>=“string” /* F8 key */ remap=<1039>=“string” /* F9 key */ remap=<103c>=“string” /* Backspace key */ remap=<1042>=“string” /* Back Tab key */ remap=<1043>=“string” /* Clear key */ remap=<1044>=“string” /* Del key */ remap=<1045>=“string” /* Enter key */ remap=<1048>= “string” /* Help key */ remap=<1049>=“string” /* Insert key */
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
remap=<104c>=“string” /* Window/viewport left key */ remap=<104e>=“string” /* New Line key */ remap=<1050>=“string” /* Print key */ remap=<1052>=“string” /* Reset key */ remap=<1054>=“string” /* Tab key */ remap=<1055>=“string” /* Window/viewport up key */ remap=<1056>=“string” /* Window/viewport down key */ remap=<105a>=“string” /* Window/viewport right key */ remap=<1061>=“string” /* F10 key */ remap=<1062>=“string” /* F11 key */ remap=<1063>=“string” /* F12 key */ remap=<1064>=“string” /* F13 key */ remap=<1065>=“string” /* F15 key */ remap=<1066>=“string” /* F16 key */ remap=<1067>=“string” /* F17 key */ remap=<1068>=“string” /* F18 key */ remap=<1069>=“string” /* F19 key */ remap=<106a>=“string” /* F20 key */ remap=<106b>=“string” /* F21 key */ remap=<106c>=“string” /* F22 key */ remap=<106d>=“string” /* F23 key */ remap=<106e>=“string” /* F24 key */ remap=<1075>=“string” /* Roll Up key */ remap=<1076>=“string” /* Roll Down key */ remap=<2041>=“string” /* Auto-Login Restart key */ remap=<206c>=“string” /* Menu key */ remap=<302d>=“string” /* Field minus key */ remap=<302b>=“string” /* Field plus key */ remap=<3045>=“string” /* Field Exit key */ remap=<3046>=“string” /* Erase Input key */ remap=<3048>=“string” /* System request key */ remap=<304c>=“string” /* Page left key */ remap=<3051>=“string” /*Attention key */ remap=<3055>=“string” /* Page up key */ remap=<3056>=“string” /* Page down key */ remap=<3057>=“string” /* Field mark key */ remap=<3058>=“string” /* HEX key */ remap=<305a>=“string” /* Page right key */ remap=<4044>=“string” /*Duplicate key */
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
239
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Remapping Characters
You can use display character translation files to remap characters as they are written to the display. The translation file name for 5250 TE must be
5250.XLT. For instructions on how to download the file to the terminal, see “Downloading Files” on page 251.
Display character translation files are binary files consisting of ordered pairs of eight bit values. Each pair of values remaps a displayable character to a different displayable character.
S The first byte of a pair is the ASCII value of the character to replace.
S The second byte of a pair is the ASCII value that replaces the first.
These translations are only made when a character is written to a display device. If the character is sent to the host (such as keystroke or scan data) or sent to an external device (such as a printer), it is sent as the original, untranslated value.
Suppose you want a terminal running 5250 emulation to replace the uppercase B with the Greek letter beta, and replace the uppercase Z with the
Greek letter omega. Create a file named 5250.XLT that is four bytes long
(two ordered pairs of two bytes each). The file should contain the 0x42,
0xE1, 0x5A, and 0xEA bytes in this order. These represent the ASCII display character set values for B, beta, Z, and omega, respectively.
240 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Implementing ITCCOLOR.DAT Attribute Colors
Note: The ITCCOLOR.DAT attribute colors were implemented for Wal-
Mart Stores Incorporated.
These changes are in place for 5055 Data Collection PCs, 700 Series
Computers, and CV60 Vehicle Mount Computers. The registry keys for
Text and Back are still in place for these terminals.
You must name the file ITCCOLOR.DAT and you may place this where the other TE 2000 configuration files are placed for discovery by the TE
2000 application.
The two registry keys for the default foreground (Text) and background colors are still used and are set before the color file is read from the following keys:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Intermec\TE2000\BackGroundColor
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Intermec\TE2000\ForeGroundColor
Both keys must exist or the default colors of black background and white text is used.
The color file contains lines defining the color Index and the Color for eight normal foreground (Text) and background (Back) color pairs and eight inverse color pairs for a total of 32 colors. Each line is a maximum of
80 characters. A line can be empty, have leading spaces, have a comment indicated by a semicolon character, have a pair of values (color Index and
Color). All characters from a semicolon to the end of the line are ignored.
A line is terminated by a carriage return, line feed character, or both. Invalid lines are ignored. You may define all, none, or any of the colors in the file and in any order. The file may exist or not. The normal Text colors are defaulted to black and the Inverse Text color is defaulted to black.
If an Index-Color is not defined or the file does not exist, default colors are used.
The color Index is a decimal value of 0 through 31. It specifies the character attributes associated with Color. The index values are documented in the sample ITCCOLOR.DAT file on the next page.
Color is a 32-bit hex value used to specify an RGB color (0x00bbggrr). In
RGB format, the low-order (rr) byte contains a value for the relative intensity of red; the second byte (gg)contains a value for green; and the third byte (bb) contains a value for blue. The high-order byte must be zero. The maximum value for a single byte is 0xFF.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
241
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Example
This is a sample color file:
Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
======================================================================
; comment
; Normal
00 0x00000000 ;Text
01 0x007f7f7f ;Back
02 0x000000ff ;Text Bold
03 0x007f7f00 ;Back Bold
04 0x0000ff00 ;Text Blink
05 0x007f007f ;Back Blink
06 0x0000ffff ;Text Bold Blink
07 0x007f0000 ;Back Bold Blink
08 0x00ff0000 ;Text Underline
09 0x00007f7f ;Back Underline
10 0x00ff00ff ;Text Bold Underline
11 0x00007f00 ;Back Bold Underline
12 0x00ffff00 ;Text Blink Underline
13 0x0000007f ;Back Blink Underline
14 0x00ffffff ;Text Bold Blink Underline
15 0x00000000 ;Back Bold Blink Underline
; Inverse
16 0x00000000 ;Text
17 0x00ffffff ;Back
18 0x0000007f ;Text Bold
19 0x00ffff00 ;Back Bold
20 0x00007f00 ;Text Blink
21 0x00ff00ff ;Back Blink
22 0x00007f7f ;Text Bold Blink
23 0x00ff0000 ;Back Bold Blink
24 0x007f0000 ;Text Underline
25 0x0000ffff ;Back Underline
26 0x007f007f ;Text Bold Underline
27 0x0000ff00 ;Back Bold Underline
28 0x007f7f00 ;Text Blink Underline
29 0x000000ff ;Back Blink Underline
30 0x007f7f7f ;Text Bold Blink Underline
31 0x007ffff7 ;Back Bold Blink Underline
242 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Customizing 5250 EBCDIC to ASCII Translation
The 5250 data stream translates all data from the host from 8-bit
EBCDIC to 8-bit ASCII for processing in the terminal. Before the data is sent back to the host, it is again translated from ASCII to EBCDIC. The default translation is shown below.
You can customize the operation of the 5250 data stream by changing the default EBCDIC to ASCII translation table. You can replace the default table with one that is combined with the HEX file that you download to the terminal. You can use ASEBTBLD.EXE to create the file. You must name it ASCEBD.TBL.
Type asebtbld to display this information:
ASEBTBLD ASCII-EBCDIC Translation Table Creation.
$Revision: 1.0
$
$Date: 03 Apr 1998 13:46:14 $
Copyright 1995, Norand Corporation.
Usage: ASEBTBLD [<options>] <commands> <fname>
<options>: type,
-r<file> Input file containing replacement table
-v
<fname>
0x00-0xff table index, 0x00-0xff value.
Verbose — display processing steps.
Output file name, extension ignored.
ASEBTBLD creates <fname>.TBL from the default ASCII and EBCDIC tables using the replacement values specified in -r<file>. Typing the following creates the file ASCEBD.TBL, with the replacement values specified in CHANGES.MY. asebtbld -rchanges.my ascebd
The replacement file is an ASCII text file formatted as follows:
-----------------top of replacement file--------------------
/* Any line beginning with ‘/*’ in column 1 is a comment.
/* A=ASCII=>
/* EBCDIC
/* E=EBCDIC=> 0-based hex
/* ASCII
/* -------
A index value
-------
Anything after value is a comment
---------
0x30 0xf0 ASCII ‘0’ returns EBCDIC ‘0’
E
E
0xf0 0x30 EBCDIC ‘0’ returns ASCII ‘0’
0xc9 0x3f Unknown EBCDIC 0xc9 returns ASCII ‘?’
/* Any number of blanks, tabs allowed before, between and
/* after values.
/* blank lines allowed
-----------------bottom of replacement file-------------------
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
243
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
ASEBTBLD creates the following default tables if no replacement file, or an empty replacement file, is specified.
ASCII to EBCDIC
0x00
0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x37 0x2d 0x2e 0x2f
0x16 0x05 0x25 0x0b 0x0c 0x0d 0x4f 0x0f
0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x3c 0x00 0x32 0x1c
0x18 0x19 0x3f 0x27 0x22 0x00 0x35 0x00
0x20
0x40 0x5a 0x7f 0x7b 0x5b 0x6c 0x50 0x7d
0x4d 0x5d 0x5c 0x4e 0x6b 0x60 0x4b 0x61
0xf0 0xf1 0xf2 0xf3 0xf4 0xf5 0xf6 0xf7
0xf8 0xf9 0x7a 0x5e 0x4c 0x7e 0x6e 0x6f
0x40
0x7c 0xc1 0xc2 0xc3 0xc4 0xc5 0xc6 0xc7
0xc8 0xc9 0xd1 0xd2 0xd3 0xd4 0xd5 0xd6
0xd7 0xd8 0xd9 0xe2 0xe3 0xe4 0xe5 0xe6
0xe7 0xe8 0xe9 0x5b 0xe0 0x5d 0x6a 0x6d
0x60
0x79 0x81 0x82 0x83 0x84 0x85 0x86 0x87
0x88 0x89 0x91 0x92 0x93 0x94 0x95 0x96
0x97 0x98 0x99 0xa2 0xa3 0xa4 0xa5 0xa6
0xa7 0xa8 0xa9 0xc0 0x6a 0xd0 0xa1 0x07
0x80
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x4a 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0xa0
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x5f 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0xad 0x9d 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0xbc
0xc0
0xab 0x8c 0x8b 0x8d 0xbf 0x8e 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0xbb 0xac 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0xe0
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
244 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
EBCDIC to ASCII
0x00
0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x7F
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F
0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x00 0x00 0x08 0x00
0x18 0x19 0x00 0x00 A_DUP 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x20
0x00 0x00 0x1C 0x00 0x00 0x0A 0x17 0x1B
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x05 0x06 0x07
0x00 0x00 0x16 0x00 0x00 0x1E 0x00 0x04
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x14 0x16 0x00 0x1A
0x40
0x20 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x9b 0x2E 0x3C 0x28 0x2B 0x0e
0x26 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x21 0x24 0x2A 0x29 0x3B 0xaa
0x60
0x2D 0x2F 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x7C 0x2C 0x25 0x5F 0x3E 0x3F
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x60 0x3A 0x23 0x40 0x27 0x3D 0x22
0x80
0x00 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x64 0x65 0x66 0x67
0x68 0x69 0x00 0xc2 0xc1 0xc3 0xc5 0x00
0x00 0x6A 0x6B 0x6C 0x6D 0x6E 0x6F 0x70
0x71 0x72 0x00 0x00 0x00 0xb4 0x00 0x00
0xa0
0x00 0x7E 0x73 0x74 0x75 0x76 0x77 0x78
0x79 0x7A 0x00 0xc0 0xda 0xb3 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0xd9 0xbf 0x00 0x00 0xc4
0xc0
0x7B 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x45 0x46 0x47
0x48 0x49 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x7D 0x4A 0x4B 0x4C 0x4D 0x4E 0x4F 0x50
0x51 0x52 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0xe0
0x5c 0x00 0x53 0x54 0x55 0x56 0x57 0x58
0x59 0x5A 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x30 0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37
0x38 0x39 0x00 0x00 x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
245
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Substituting National Characters
This topic tells how to create a file that remaps one character in the terminal’s Terminal Font Set for another character in the set. Use this information to provide characters on the terminal in the local language.
Intermec provides a table for converting from characters used in English
(U.S.) to German, Danish, Finnish, Italian, Spanish, French, Belgian, and
English (UK). The procedure for converting the characters appears first.
Then two slightly longer procedures show how to remap any character to another. One procedure describes the steps with the symbol’s EBCDIC value. The other one describes the steps without a value. Finally, examples show the remap files for German characters and a few English symbols.
For all procedures, you need the terminal’s Terminal Font Set table. The table lists characters and their decimal and hexadecimal values. For the
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X Terminals, refer to the terminal’s user manual. For the 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, or 11XX Terminal, see Appendix D, “Terminal Font Set Table.”
Creating the File
Follow these steps to create a table that substitutes characters in the local language for characters normally used in U.S. English. These steps apply if
the EBCDIC value is 4A, 4F, 5A, 5B, 5F, 6A, 79, 7B, 7C, 7F, A1, C0,
D0, or E0.
1
Find the character to replace in the “EBCDIC Values” table on page
247 and determine its EBCDIC value.
2
Find the default translation value in the ASCII Equivalents for EBCDIC
Values (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X) table on page 247 or the ASCII Equivalents for EBCDIC Values (6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX,
17XX, 11XX, 700 Series) table on page 248.
3
Using the default value from step 2, search the terminal’s Terminal Font
Set for the character. If the default character is correct, you are done. If incorrect, go to step 4.
4
Search the terminal’s Terminal Font Set for the character you want.
5
Create file 3270.XLT. Put the default value of the font character (found in step 2) as the first byte in the file. Put the replacement value (found in step 4) as the second byte in the file.
6
Repeat steps 1 through 5 until all replacement characters are complete.
7
Download 3270.XLT to your terminal and restart the terminal emulation program for the changes to take effect. For downloading information, see “Downloading Files” on page 251.
246 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
EBCDIC Values
Character Set EBCDIC
English (US)
Austrian/German
Austrian/German (alternate)
Danish/Norwegian
Danish/Norwegian (alternate)
Finnish/Swedish
Finnish/Swedish (alternate)
French
Italian
Portuguese
Spanish
Spanish (alternate)
English (UK)
Belgian
Brazilian/Portuguese
Japanese (English)
Spanish Speaking
Canadian (French)
International
4A 4F 5A 5B 5F 6A 79 7B 7C 7F A1 C0 D0 E0
¢
| !
$
¬
¦
‘
# @ ~ { } \
Ä
!
Ü
$ ^ ö
‘
# §
β
ä ü Ö
ö |
ü Ü ¬
β
Ä
Ö
ä
# !
¤
Å
^ ø
‘ Æ
Ø
ü
æ å
\
ø |
å Å
¬
¦
Æ
Ø
æ
§ !
¤
Å
^ ö é
Ä
Ö
ü
ä å É
°
°
ö | å
Å ¬
¦
!
§ $ ^
ù ‘
Ä
£
Ö
à
ä
· · é è
ç
!
é $ ^ ò
ù
£ §
ì à
è
ç
[ !
] $ ^ õ
‘ Ã
Õ
ç ã ’ Ç
[ | ]
Pts
¬
ñ
‘
Ñ
@ · · { } \
¢
| !
Pts
¬
¦
Ñ
@
ñ
$ | !
£ —
¦
‘
# @
– { } \
[ !
] $ ^
ù
‘
#
à
· ·
é è ç
É
!
$
Ç
^
ç ã
Õ
Ã
~
õ
é
\
£ | !
¥
¬
¦ ‘
# @ – { } $
[ | ] $
¬
ñ ‘ Ñ
@ · · { } \
à
!
’
$ ^
ù
‘
# @ · ·
é è
[ !
] $ ^
¦
‘
# @ “
~
{ } \
ASCII Equivalents for EBCDIC Values
(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X)
ASCII
English (US)
German
Danish/Norwegian
Finnish/Swedish
Italian
Spanish
French
Belgian
English (UK)
4A 4F 5A 5B 5F 6A 79 7B 7C 7F A1 C0 D0 E0
BD 7C 21 24 AA DD 60 23 40 22 7E 7B 7D 5C
8E 21 9A 24 5E 94 60 23 F5 22 E1 84 81 99
23 21 0F 8F 5E 9B 60 92 90 22 81 91 86 5C
F5 21 0F 8F 5E 94 82 8E 99 22 81 84 86 90
F8 21 82 24 5E 95 97 9C F5 22 8D 85 8A 87
5B 7C 5D — AA A4 60 A5 40 22 F9 7B 7D 5C
F8 21 F5 24 5E 97 60 9C 85 22 F9 82 8A 87
5B 21 5D 24 5E 97 60 23 85 22 F9 82 8A 87
24 7C 21 9C AA DD 60 23 40 22 16 7B 7D 5C
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
247
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
ASCII Equivalents for EBCDIC Values
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)
English (US)
German
Danish/Norwegian
Finnish/Swedish
Italian
Spanish
French
Belgian
English (UK)
ASCII
4A 4F 5A 5B 5F 6A 79 7B 7C 7F A1 C0 D0 E0
9B 0E 21 24 AA 7C 60 23 40 22 7E 7B 7D 5C
8E 21 9A 24 5E 94 60 23 15 22 E1 84 81 99
23 21 0F 8F 5E ED 60 92 05 22 81 91 86 5C
15 21 0F 8F 5E 7C 82 8E 99 22 81 84 86 90
F8 21 82 24 5E 95 97 9C 15 22 8D 85 8A 87
5B OE 5D — AA A4 60 A5 40 22 06 7B 7D 5C
F8 21 15 24 5E 97 60 9C 85 22 06 82 8A 87
5B 21 50 24 5E 97 60 23 85 22 06 82 8A 87
24 OE 21 9C AA 7C 60 23 40 22 5F 7B 7D 5C
For characters other than those in the ASCII Equivalents for EBCDIC Val-
ues (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X) table on page 247, refer to the appropriate IBM character set. Languages and set numbers are in the following table.
6
7
4
5
8
1
2
3
IBM Character Sets
Number Language
English (U.S.)
German
Danish/Norwegian
Swedish/Finnish
Italian
Spanish
French
Belgian
IBM Set
037–850
273–850
277–850
278–850
280–850
284–850
297–850
500–850
Examples
S The first example remaps three characters. It applies only to the 2415,
2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X Terminal. It does not apply to the
6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, or 11XX Terminal because U.S. English values are correct in these terminals.
S The second example applies to the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or
248X Terminal. This example remaps 14 characters appropriate to U.S.
English to 14 characters more appropriate to Austrian/German.
S The third example applies to the 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, or
11XX Terminal. This example also remaps 14 characters appropriate to
U.S. English to 14 characters more appropriate to Austrian/German.
248 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Example 1
ASCII hexadecimal file 5250.XLT remaps 3 characters
0x9B 0xBD
0x0E 0x7C
0x7C 0xDD
EBCDIC Hex Value
4A
4F
7C |
Original to be Replaced Replacement for Display
ø ¢
‡ |
¶
Example 2
ASCII hexadecimal file 5250.XLT remaps for German
(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 284X)
0x9B 0x8E
0x0E 0x21
0x21 0x9A
0x24 0x24
0xAA 0x5E
0x7C 0x94
0x60 0x60
0x23 0x23
0x40 0xF5
0x22 0x22
0x7E 0xE1
0x7B 0x84
0x7D 0x81
0x5C 0x99
7C
7F
A1
C0
6A
79
7B
D0
E0
EBCDIC Hex Value
4A
4F
5A
5B
5F
\
}
{
~
`
#
$
¬
¶
!
|
Original to be Replaced Replacement for Display
¢ Ä
$
^
!
Ü
ö
`
@
#
§
β
ä
ü
Ö
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
249
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Example 3
ASCII hexadecimal file 5250.XLT remaps for German
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)
0x9B 0x8E
0x0E 0x21
0x21 0x9A
0x24 0x24
0xAA 0x5E
0x7C 0x94
0x60 0x60
0x23 0x23
0x40 0x15
0x22 0x22
0x7E 0xE1
0x7B 0x84
0x7D 0x81
0x5C 0x99
EBCDIC Hex Value
C0
D0
E0
7B
7C
7F
A1
5B
5F
6A
79
4A
4F
5A
~
#
@
}
{
\
Original to be Replaced Replacement for Display
!
$
¬
¢
|
¶
`
!
Ä
Ü
$
^
ö
`
ä
ü
Ö
#
§
β
250 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Downloading Files
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals
You can use one of several methods to download a file to a 2415, 2425,
2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X Terminal, including:
S LOADER.EXE file loader utility. Note that using this utility will auto-
matically restart the TE 2000 application.
S T24FCOPY.EXE through a serial connection from your Trakker Antares terminal to your personal computer
S The Download Server feature on the Intermec Application Server to a
Trakker Antares terminal loaded with UDP Plus
S A TFTP application on a personal computer or host to a Trakker Antares terminal loaded with TCP/IP
To use these methods, refer to your terminal’s user manual for help.
To restart your TE application, do one of the following:
S Scan the following bar code label. You can also send the Reset Firmware command over the network. For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual.
Reset Firmware
*/M.*
*-.*
S Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to configure the Resume Execution command to resume “not allowed.” Choose Terminal
Menu from the Configuration Menu and then choose Power Management. Each time you press œ to turn on the Trakker Antares terminal, it boots and restarts your application. See the terminal’s user manual.
S Access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System and select the TE application through the File Manager option. For help, see your terminal’s user manual.
The Trakker Antares terminal restarts your TE application using the configuration saved in CONFIG.DAT.
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals
From your web browser, use the ftp://<IP address> URL to download files.
For the terminal, use the Microsoft ActiveSync application like described on page 187.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
251
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
6400, 5055 Terminals
Before you can download a file to a 6400 Computer or , configure
INTERLNK on a desktop or laptop PC. INTERLNK, part of MS-DOS, is a device driver that connects your 6400 Computer or 5055 PC and personal computer through their serial ports. This connection enables you to exchange files. It also enables you to edit the 6400 or 5055 configuration files, such as CONFIG.DAT.
INTERSVR is the INTERLNK server and is a communications option on your 6400 Computer or 5055 PC. INTERLNK and INTERSVR are provided with DOS and shipped with your 6400 or 5055 toolkit. For complete installation instructions, refer to the README.TXT file provided with 6400 Computers and 5055 PCs.
Reprogramming Flash Memory
Flash upgrades can be ordered on diskette from Intermec (contact a representative), or downloaded from the Intermec Knowledge Central (see Be-
fore You Begin). Read all instructions before proceeding.
Note: Keep terminals on charge when setting up, reprogramming, or reflashing.
Prerequisites for INTERLNK Flash Update
S A working 6400 Computer or 5055 PC to do this procedure (if the flash is corrupted, perform a serial master mode boot).
S A RAM drive (D:) of at least 960 KB.
S A disk file contains the flash archive, 50BDXXXX.EXE. The last four numbers indicate the flash version (0129 indicates flash version 1.29).
S A standard host PC for connecting to the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC.
INTERLNK.EXE must be loaded by the CONFIG.SYS file. For more detailed information on running INTERLNK, refer to a DOS manual.
S A NULL modem cable to connect the host PC’s communications port to the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC with a single dock or communication adapter.
INTERLNK Installation
Use the following instructions if you have a version of flash that includes
INTERSVR as a possible Comm option on your 6400 Computer or 5055
PC. If you do not have INTERSVR, you must update the flash using a serial master mode boot.
The following instructions assume that you have placed all files from the self-extracting archive in a directory (on your host personal computer) called C:\PENKEY\FLASH. If you choose to place these files in a different location, adjust the instructions accordingly.
Note: Delete the self-extracting file from this directory once the files are extracted.
252 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
Your host personal computer must be running INTERLNK, which is part of MS-DOS. Load INTERLNK as a device driver in your CONFIG.SYS
file, using the following statement, at the end of the CONFIG.SYS file
(after any other statement that creates a drive letter):
DEVICE=C:\DOS\INTERLNK.EXE /DRIVES:3
The previous statement assumes that MS-DOS is located in the host PC
C:\DOS directory. The /DRIVES: 3 parameter allows mapping of three drives from the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC.
INTERLNK and INTERSVR
INTERLNK is a device driver that interconnects a 6400 Computer or
5055 PC and a host personal computer through serial ports. INTERSVR is the INTERLNK server, a communication option in the Norand Utilities program. These two resources are provided with ROM DOS 6.22 and are shipped with the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC toolkit. A standard null modem cable connects the personal computer to the 6400 Computer or
5055 PC. A TTY TCOM cable also works. A dock is needed for the 6400
Computer or 5055 PC or a communication adapter that plugs onto the bottom end of the terminal.
INTERLNK causes the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC drives to appear as virtual drives on the host personal computer, with drive letters immediately beyond the highest drive letter currently used on the host personal computer. Typing “INTERLNK” from the host personal computer command line displays the designations of the redirected drives.
For details of INTERLNK and INTERSVR topics, refer to the DOS on-line help text.
INTERLNK is installed on a host PC, using the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\dos\interlnk.exe /drives:4
After installation, you can copy the application files to the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC. To terminate INTERSVR, press [ALT] + [F4].
59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals
For a 59XX, 17XX, or 11XX Terminal, use utility program
CHECKCFG.EXE to verify the correctness of your configuration.
Using CHECKCFG to Compile and Decompile Custom Configurations
CHECKCFG reads your configuration and literal files, and reports any syntax errors. It also converts your data files to the proper format for the
TE program.
The ASCII text of the configuration file converts to a compressed binary format to save space in the terminal. CHECKCFG can reverse the operation by converting a binary file into its ASCII source. CHECKCFG can also list set-up parameters, their types, and their allowable values.
To display the program version number and a short message that lists the different command line formats for the program, type checkcfg
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
253
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
254
Converting Files from ASCII to Binary
To convert an ASCII parameter file into binary format before downloading it to a terminal, use the following command line: checkcfg <input config file>cfglit.dat<output config file>
S <input config file> is the name of your ASCII text parameter file
S <output config file> is the name of the file that you must append to your
TE hex file. The output file must be named CONFIG.DAT.
Converting Files from Binary to ASCII
To convert a binary parameter file back into its ASCII equivalent, use the following command line: checkcfg -r <config file> cfglit.dat <output file>
S <config file> is the name of your binary parameter file
S CFGLIT.DAT is the name of your terminal literal file
S <output file> is the name of the file that will contain the converted
ASCII output
Listing Parameters and Values
To display a list of all possible setup parameters and their values, use the following command line: checkcfg -p cfglit.dat
Note: The output from this command is about seven hundred lines long.
You may want to redirect it into another file for viewing.
Using FLSHCONV.EXE to Build Customized HEX Files
FLSHCONV.EXE is a utility program that creates Intel-hex files in the proper format for downloading to an 11XX, 17XX, or 59XX Terminal.
FLSHCONV can do the following:
S Locate and append .EXE programs for download in an Intel-hex file
S Append data and configuration files to an existing Intel-hex file
(FLSHCONV cannot locate and append .EXE programs to an existing hex file)
To display the program version number and a short message that lists command line formats, type: flshconv
The following lists FLSHCONV command line options, where <hexnum> represents a hexadecimal segment address and <number> represents a decimal number.
S –f<hexnum>
<hexnum> is the starting address of Flash memory for the terminal. De-
fault: 8000 (absolute address 0x80000).
S –e<hexnum>
<hexnum> is the ending address of Flash. If you omit this parameter,
FLSHCONV does not report an error if your Flash image is too big.
S –d<hexnum>
<hexnum> is the starting address of memory space for .EXE programs.
Default: 200 (absolute address 0x2000). You should ordinarily use 60
(absolute address 0x600).
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
S –o<filename>
<filename> is the Intel-hex output file name.
S –v<number>
<number> indicates “verbosity.” Default: 0, meaning no information ap-
pears on the standard output device. Intermec recommends a value of 1 to generate a report of where each file is located. You can use higher values, but they may not produce useful information for the end user.
S –a
This option tells FLSNCONV to append data files to an existing Intelhex file. The hex file must be the first file name on the command line.
The following chart lists FLSHCONV command line arguments.
Terminal
11XX, 256K Flash
11XX, 512K Flash
17XX, 512K Flash
5928-5948, 384K Flash
-f<hexnum> -e<hexnum> -d<hexnum>
-f8000
-f8000
-f8000
-f9000
-eC000
-eFFC0
-eFFC0
-eE000
-d60
-d60
-d60
-d60
Locating and Appending .EXE Files
As an example, suppose you are building a customized version of the
17XX Flash program FWP170H0.HEX. As a minimum, you must have the following files:
S 1700BIOS.EXE
17XX BIOS program
S KERNEL.EXE
Intermec multitasking services
S FWP170H0.EXE
17XX 5250 TE program
S NORAND.FNT
Display character font file. This may be the standard font file or a customized user replacement.
S CFGLIT.DAT
Terminal literal file. This may be the standard literal file or a customized user replacement.
To bind these files into an Intel-hex file that is ready for download to a
17XX, use the following single command line to build a file called
NEW.HEX: flshconv -f8000 -effcO -d60 1700bios.exe kernel.exe
fwp170h0.exe norand.fnt cfglit.dat -onew.hex
Or, you can create a file that contains each file name on a separate line.
Assuming that file was named 1700FILE.LST, use the following command line for the same results: flshconv -f8000 -effc0 -d60 @1700file.lst
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
255
Chapter 5
—
Customizing Your Configuration
256
Appending Data Files To Intel-Hex Files
In the above example, you could have bound the .EXE files together by typing the following (single) command line: flshconv -f8000 -effc0 -d60 1700bios.exe kernel.exe
fwp170h0.exe -o1700exe s.hex
You can then customize the 1700EXES.HEX file with different font files and literal files by typing the following (single) command line: flshconv -effc0 -a 1700exes.hex norand.fntcfglit.dat
–onewlang.hex
You can provide keyboard translation file pairs to change the default key values. The (single) command line is: flshconv -effc0 -a newlang.hex vt220eml.key vt220eml.xlt
-onewkeys.hex
You can specify more than one file pair. For example, you could provide all four file pairs (eight files) to modify the keyboard for each of the four data streams.
Downloading a Hex File
Use these to download a .HEX file to 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals:
S PROGDUX.EXE (provided with the terminal’s Flash)
S Personal computer
S INTERMEC r cable P/N: 216-806-001, which is a powered Flash cable that plugs into the personal computer’s COM port (note that power is
not required for download)
To download a .HEX file:
1
Ensure the terminal is powered ON and PROGDUX.EXE is loaded on the personal computer.
2
Use cable P/N: 216-806-001 to connect the 11XX or 17XX Terminal to the PC. Use cable P/N: 216-831-001 to connect the 59XX Terminal to the personal computer. Power the terminal off. For help, refer to the terminal’s user manual. Power is not required for download.
3
To receive the .HEX file, the terminal must be in download mode. To enter this mode, press and hold down the terminal’s [I] key as you power up the terminal. For the 17XX 37-key keyboard, press and hold down the [F1] key as you power up the terminal.
4
At the DOS prompt, type: progdux -?
to display a list of command line options.
5
Erase the terminal’s original Flash and download the new .HEX file by typing: progdux -e <newfile> where <newfile> is the name of the
.HEX file.
A successful download will boot the terminal into the TE application. If communications is interrupted, PROGDUX.EXE will send out a negative acknowledgement (NAK) and reset itself to try sending again. No interaction is required except to restore communications.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
6
Display Data Stream
This chapter describes the following:
S The host 5250 display data stream commands the host application can send to terminals.
S The host 5250 data stream orders the host can send to terminals. Orders govern format and data expectations within the Write to Display command.
S Asynchronous 5250 prefixes.
S System messages and parameter errors that can appear in the terminal’s display.
This chapter is not intended as a specific guide for programming, but a comparison with your existing system. The information helps identify differences between your screen-generating utilities and the features the terminals support.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
257
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Screen Design Aid
This chapter, along with your Screen Design Aid (SDA) documentation, can help you resolve occasional questions concerning discrepancies that may arise regarding attribute selection and the capabilities of the terminals.
This chapter includes information you may not need, because you can use your SDA to do much, if not all, of the programming to handle commands and orders for the network. This information is provided to assure you have the most accurate and detailed information available and to describe variations from the 5250 data stream where they occur.
If you are comfortable using the SDA on your host computer, you can flip through this chapter to find out which commands and orders the terminals support. You can then read Chapter 7, “Extended Commands,” which describes the extended commands you can use to do operations beyond the capability of the IBM Display Station.
Applications
If you need to write applications specifically for the terminal, it is recommended that you use the corner mode window onto the IBM Display Station and write programs using the portion of the display available without moving the window. This is the most efficient method for developing custom applications for the terminal.
258 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Data Stream Command Structure
The 5250 command structure enables the terminal to display prompts and accept keyboard or scanner input. A second kind of command, called an order, works with the Write-To-Display command to define display characteristics, buffer sizes, and acceptable data types.
Display data stream commands form two categories: the input commands and the output commands. The IBM 5250 Information Display System
Functions Reference Manual (IBM part number SA21-9247-6 provides more detailed descriptions than those presented in this programmer’s guide).
Input Commands and Hex Codes
Below are the input commands and hex codes. Page numbers reference additional information about each command.
Input Commands (page references)
Read Immediate (page 260)
Read Modified Immediate Alternate (page 261)
Read Input Fields (page 262)
Read MDT Fields (page 264)
Read MDT Alternate (page 266)
Read Screen (page 267)
Save Screen (page 268)
Write Structured Field (page 269)
Hex Code
52
82
62
02 f3
72
83
42
Output Commands and Hex Codes
Below are the output commands and hex codes. Pages reference additional information about each command.
Output Commands (page references)
Clear Format Table (page 271)
Clear Unit (page 272)
Clear Unit Alternate
Restore Screen (page 273)
Roll (page 274)
Write Error Code (page 276)
Write to Display (WTD) (page 278)
Hex Code
12
23
21
11
50
40
Not supported
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
259
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Input Commands
Input commands consist of immediate and AID-associated Read commands. Immediate commands are executed when the controller receives the command. AID-associated commands are queued until the operator presses an AID-generating key such as Enter/Rec Adv. Other AID-generating keys are listed in the chapter for each terminal.
Read Immediate
Function
The Read Immediate command is similar to the Read Screen command, except the data comes from the format table rather than the display. The command sends back the contents of all the input fields on the display.
Restrictions
This command must be the last command in the chain and the controller must have change of direction (CD). The command is rejected if the terminal is in an error, system request, or SS message state.
Note: If the display supports a separate message line, and the message line is selected, the command is rejected only for the system request and SS message states. The command is processed with the display in error state.
Format
The command takes the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Read Immediate Command
Hex 72
Results
Information associated with this command returns to the user in the
LU-LU nonexpedited flow. What the user receives when they issue this command depends on the condition of the master modified data tag
(MDT) bit:
S If the MDT bit is not set, the user receives:
Cursor Address AID Code
S If the master MDT bit is set, the user receives:
Cursor Address AID Code Field Data
The field data consists of the contents of all input fields as they appear on the display, unless resequencing has been specified. Any attributes contained in a field are treated as data and returned as such. Field boundary attributes are not considered part of the field. All nulls are converted to blanks. If the specified field is a signed numeric field, the last character is not sent.
If that same field is negative, the zone position of the next-to-the-last character is changed to hex D. In each case, the returned cursor address indicates the current location of the cursor and the AID code is hex 00.
260 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Note: Queued Read commands and pending AID codes are not cleared.
The format table, display annunciators, insert mode keying history, and display contents are not affected.
Read Modified Immediate Alternate
Function
The Read Modified Immediate Alternate command enables the host to read data from modified input fields without depending on the operator to press an AID request key.
Restrictions
None.
Format
The command takes the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Read Modified Immediate Alternate Command
Hex 72
Results
This command is processed the same as the Read Immediate command, except for these differences in the format of data sent to host:
S Controller only returns data from those fields in the format table that have the MDT bit on.
S Data field is delimited by Set Buffer Address (SBA) orders in the same way as the response data field for the Read MDT Fields command.
S Leading and imbedded nulls within each field’s data are not converted to blanks.
S Trailing nulls within each field’s data are suppressed.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
261
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Read Input Fields
262
Function
The Read Input Fields command causes the terminal to wait for the operator to press an active AID-generating key, then sends the contents of all fields defined in the format table to the host.
Restrictions
The operator must press an AID-generating key to execute this command.
Also, CD in the Request/Response Header (RH) must be on before the
AID byte can be serviced. This command is cleared if:
S The host system issues a session control request (such as Unbind).
S The host system issues a Clear Unit command and the controller executes it.
S The host system sends another Read command to the same LU and overlays this command.
S The Read command is executed.
Format
The command takes the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Read Input Fields Command
Hex 42
CC Byte 1 CC Byte 2
Hex 00 Hex 13
Results
Information associated with this command returns to the user in the
LU-LU nonexpedited flow. Note that the host system cannot receive this information until the operator presses an AID-generating key. What the user receives when they issue this command depends on the condition of the master MDT bit:
S If the master MDT bit is not set, the user receives:
Cursor Address AID Code
S Cursor Address:
Position of the cursor when the AID-generating key was pressed.
S AID Code:
Code for the AID-generating key the operator used.
S The user receives the cursor address and AID code if any of the following keys are pressed:
S Clear
S Help
S Print
S Record Backspace in home position
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
S If the master MDT bit is on, the user receives:
Cursor Address AID Code Field Data
S Cursor Address:
Position of the cursor when the AID-generating key was pressed.
S AID Code:
Code for the AID-generating key the operator used.
S Field Data:
Returned only when one of the following AID-generating keys is used:
S Roll Up
S Roll Down
S Enter/Rec Adv
S An unmasked function key
When it is returned, the field data consists of the contents of all input fields as they appear on the display unless resequencing was specified.
Any attributes in a field are treated as data and returned as such. Field attributes are not considered part of the field. All nulls are converted to blanks. All pending AID request bytes are cleared. If the specified field is signed numeric, the first character is not sent; if that same field is negative, the zone position of the next-to-the-last character is changed to hex D.
Though data is not sent, the CC bytes are processed.
To determine the appropriate codes for the control character (CC) bytes, see the “Write To Display” topic (page 278).
Format
The format of the returned data is:
Bytes 1 and 2
Cursor address
Byte 3
AID code
Byte 4
Field data
Byte 5
Field data
Byte 6 and all that follow contain the remaining field data from the format table. The terminal returns complete contents of each field, with nulls converted to blanks.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
263
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Read MDT Fields
Function
The Read MDT Fields command causes the terminal to wait for the operator to press an active AID-generating key, then sends all fields that have their MDT bit set. The bit could have been set by the operator entering data in the field or by the WTD command.
Restrictions
The operator must press an AID-generating key to execute this command.
In addition, the CD in the RH for the requested LU must be on before any information can be sent back to the host system in response to the command. The command is cleared if:
S A session control request (such as Unbind) is issued by the host.
S A Clear Unit command is issued.
S The host system sends another Read command to the same LU and overlays this command.
S The Read command is serviced.
Format
The command take the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Read MDT Command
Hex 52
The format of the returned data is:
CC Byte 1 CC Byte 2
Hex 00 Hex 13
Bytes 1 and 2 Byte 3
Cursor address AID code
Byte 4
{SBA
Byte 5 Byte 6
Field address Field data}
Note: The {} brackets around the last three fields indicate these fields may be repeated as a unit.
The cursor address gives the cursor location on the display. The SBA fields are formatted as Set Buffer Address orders. The field address comes from the address portion of the order and gives the address of the modified field
(excluding the attribute).
264 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Results
The contents of each field that has an MDT bit on are returned to the host system in the order that the fields appear in the format table, if one of the following AID-generating keys is used:
S Roll up/Page down
S Roll down/Page up
S Enter/Rec Adv
S Unmasked function keys
If no MDT bits are on, or if the operator does not use one of the acceptable AID-generating keys (Clear, Help, Print, or Record Backspace), only the cursor and AID code are returned to the host system.
The host system can use field control words (FCWs) to rearrange the sequence in which the fields are returned. If data is returned, the following formatting is done. If the field is not a transparent data field, the following occurs:
S Trailing nulls are stripped. If the field consists of all nulls, only the Set
Buffer Address, row, and column are returned.
S Leading and embedded nulls are converted to blanks.
If the field is signed numeric, the last character is not sent. If that same field is negative, the zone position of the next-to-the-last character is changed to hex D.
Hex 10 and hex 11 are control data. Avoid writing hex 10 and hex 11 to the display as data unless they are written in transparent data fields.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
265
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Read MDT Alternate
Function
Read MDT Alternate is similar to the Read MDT Fields command with these exceptions:
S Leading and embedded nulls within the fields remain nulls. Trailing nulls are stripped.
S For fields that are nulls but have their MDT bit on, the controller returns an SBA order followed by the field’s address.
Restrictions
None.
Format
None.
Results
None.
266 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Read Screen (Immediate)
Function
The Read Screen command sends the contents of the display to the host in the same order information appears on the screen. For example, row 1 goes first.
Restrictions
This command must be the last command in the SNA chain, and CD must be on. The terminal rejects the command when it is in the prehelp error, posthelp error, system request, or SS message state. During transmission the keyboard is locked, but pending AID requests or Read commands are retained.
Note: If the display supports a separate message line, and the message line is selected, the command is rejected only for the system request and SS message states. The command is processed with the display in error state.
Format
The command takes the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Read Screen Command
Hex 62
Results
The contents of the entire display, including the attributes, is sent to the host system just as it appears in the regeneration buffer (no formatting or conversion is done). Cursor address and AID are not returned. This command does not clear either pending Read commands or AID requests. The keyboard is temporarily locked. The following are unaltered:
S Annunciators
S Cursor location
S Modes
S Keying history
S Display contents
S Format table
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
267
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Save Screen (Immediate)
Function
The Save Screen command sends the state of the terminal to the host. Information sent to the host includes:
S Format table
S Display buffer
S Keyboard state
S Cursor location
S Code returned in response to the Help key
S Any outstanding AID requests
S Any outstanding Read commands
Restrictions
This command must be the last command in the SNA chain and CD must be on. The command is rejected if the addressed LU is in either the system request or SS message state.
Format
The command takes the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Save Screen Command
Hex 62
The format of the returned data is:
Byte 1
Escape
Byte 2
Restore Screen
Byte 3
<terminal state>
Byte 4
<terminal state>
Byte 5 and all remaining bytes contain the Save Screen information.
Results
All data required for restoring the display are sent to the host system. It must not be modified by the host system if the result of the Restore Screen command is to have integrity.
268 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Write Structured Field
Function
The Write Structured Field command introduces a data field into the
SNA flow. The host system uses this type of data structure to support the following operations
S Generation of a pass-thru data stream
S Receipt of 5250 device functional information
S Control over display stations during text support operation
Restrictions
None.
Format
The command takes the following form:
ESC Write Structured Field Command
Hex 04 Hex f3
Length Class Query Flag
xx xx xx xx xx
Note: Only command classes 0xd8 and 0xd9 are supported. For command class 0xd8, only type codes of 0x20 and 0x21 for query are supported. For command class 0xd9, only type code of 0x70 for query is supported.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
269
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Results
Bytes Command Class Definition
0–1
2
3–4
5
6
7
8–9
10–12
0x00 0x00
0x08
0x02 0x00
13–28 0x00
29 0x01
Cursor row/column
Inbound Write Structured Field aid
Length of query reply
Command class
Command type — query
Flag byte
Controller Hardware Class PC DOS non DBCS WSF
Controller code level
Reserved
5250 Emulation
30–33 0xf5 0xf2 0xf9 0xf1 Device type 5291
34–36 0xf0 0xf0 0xf0 Model 000
37
38
0x01
0x00
Standard keyboard
Extended keyboard ID
39
40–43
0x00
44–45 0x01 0x00
46–48 0x00
49–53
54–60
Reserved
Display serial number
Maximuim number of input fields 256
Reserved
Controller display capability
Byte 49 definition:
Bits0–1 01 Row 1/Col 1 support
Bit 2 1
Bit 3 0
Bit 4 0
Bit 5 0
Read MDT alternate support
Display does not have PA1/PA2 support
Display does not have PA3 support
Display doesnot have cursor select support
Bit 6 0
Bit 7 1
Display does not have Move cursor Order support
Read MDT Immediate Alt command support
Byte 50 definition:
Bit 0–3 0001 24x80 screen size
Bit 4 0 No light pen support
Bit 5 0 No magnetic stripe support
Bit 6–7 00 Monochrome display
Byte 51 definition
0x00 Reserved
Byte 52 definition:
Bit 0–2 000 No Double-Byte Character support
Bit 3–7 Reserved
Byte 53 definition:
Bit 0–2 000 No graphics capability
Reserved
270
Note: For command class 0xd8 with a type code of 0x20 only data thru byte 7 is returned to the host.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Output Commands
Some output commands have associated data and control information
(write characters and orders). The Write commands are executed immediately.
Clear Format Table
Function
The Clear Format Table command clears the format table without erasing data in the display buffer.
Restrictions
The terminal rejects the command when in an error, system request, or SS message state.
Note: If the display supports a separate message line, and the message line is selected, the command is rejected only for the system request and SS message states. The command is processed with the display in error state.
Format
The command takes the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Clear Format Table Command
Hex 50
Results
The following list describes what happens when this command is executed.
S The keyboard is locked.
The keyboard clicker is turned off.
The Input Inhibited annunciator is turned on.
The insert mode is cleared (as is the annunciator).
S The format table is cleared. The format table header formats as follows:
Format ID
First field transmitted to host system
Error line
Hex 00
0 (Resequencing is disabled)
Bottom line of display
S The system insert cursor address is set to row 1, column 1. This clears a previous Insert Cursor order.
S Any pending AID request is cleared.
S All keying history is cleared.
S The master MDT bit is cleared.
S A blinking cursor caused by waiting for a required Field Exit key is reset.
Note: Operator-selected reverse image and the Message Waiting annunciator are not affected by this command.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
271
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Clear Unit
Function
This command clears the display and format table.
Restrictions
The terminal rejects the command when it is in the SS message state.
Format
The command takes the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Clear Unit Command
Hex 40
Results
When the terminal receives the Clear Unit command, these occur:
S The keyboard locks.
The Input Inhibited annunciator is turned on.
The error state (or system request state) is cleared.
The shift, alternate, function, and insert modes are cleared.
S The format table is cleared. Because this is not format level 0, a default header is assumed.
S The MDT bit is cleared.
S All function keys are set up to return data.
S The display is cleared by writing nulls to the display buffer.
S A normal attribute is written byte to row 1, column 1 of the display.
S The cursor is placed at row 1, column 2; this makes the insert cursor address.
S Any AID requests and pending Read Input Fields or Read MDT Fields commands are cleared.
Note: Operated-selected reverse image and the Message Waiting annunciator are not affected by this command.
272 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Restore Screen
Function
The Restore Screen command restores all data stored by the last Save
Screen command.
Restrictions
The terminal rejects this command when it is in a system request or SS message state.
Format
The command takes the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Restore Screen Command Data From Last Save Command
Hex 12 <saved data>
Results
The following describes what happens when this command is executed.
These are restored:
S Contents of the display.
S Contents of the format table.
S State of the keyboard, including the insert mode with the annunciators.
S Location of the cursor and the way it was displayed.
S System insert cursor address.
S State of the master MDT bit.
S Error code and any explanatory information provided by the host system in the Write Error Code command, if the terminal was in an error state. The error code and any information are returned via the operator’s use of the Help key.
S Requirements to send LU-LU Lustat when error line is available.
S Any Read command that was pending at the time.
S Any AID requests that were outstanding at the time of the Save Screen command.
These conditions from the previous save are not restored:
S Condition of the Shift key and the associated annunciator.
S Status of the Message Waiting annunciator.
S The current status of the hex mode is reset.
The following conditions cause parameter errors: invalid data is detected and the required amount of data is not received.
Note: A Clear Unit command is executed if an error is detected.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
273
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Roll
Function
The Roll command causes the image presented in the terminal display to roll up or down across the larger image area available on the IBM Display
Station.
Restrictions
The command is rejected if the display is in the prehelp error, posthelp error, system request, or SS message state.
Note: If the display supports a separate message line, and the message line is selected, the command is rejected only for system request and SS message states. The command is processed with the display in error state.
Format
The command consists of five bytes in the following form:
ESC
Hex 04
Command
Hex 23
Direction
Hex 08
Top
Hex 01
Row Number
Bottom
Hex 23
Bits in the direction byte define the direction and number of lines to roll.
See the following chart for the bit meanings. Bit 7 is the most significant bit.
Bit
7
6–0
Description
0 = Roll up
1 = Roll down
Number of lines to roll
The top row number tells the first line for inclusion in the roll. Bottom row number tells the last row number to include. Top and bottom row numbers together define the number of lines presented on the display for the roll.
274 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Results
The following conditions govern the Roll command:
S Lines vacated due to the Roll are not cleared to nulls.
S Format table is not changed (could cause bizarre results).
Note: If display does not conform to the format table, roll should not be done.
S Rolled over data is lost.
S The lines rolled out of the area are lost (cannot be rolled back onto screen).
S The state of the keyboard is not affected.
S Pending AID bytes are not affected.
S The following conditions cause parameter errors:
A top line of zero.
A top line greater than or equal to the display length.
A bottom line of zero.
A bottom line greater than the display length.
A top line greater than or equal to the bottom line.
A roll area greater than the bottom line minus the top line.
A scroll distance of zero has no effect on the display.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
275
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Write Error Code
Function
The Write Error Code command forces the terminal into the prehelp state
(the same state the terminal enters when the operator makes a keying error).
Restrictions
A Write Error Code clears any outstanding AID requests. The terminal rejects this command if it is in the prehelp, system request, or SS messages state.
Format
The command may take any of the following forms. The Insert Cursor
(IC) order may also be embedded in the error message.
Note: Headings in brackets indicate the individual field can be omitted.
However, both fields cannot be omitted. Provide either an Insert Cursor order or error message to avoid an error.
ESC
Hex 04
Write Error Code Command Insert Cursor Order
Hex 21 Position cursor
ESC
Hex 04
Write Error Code Command Error Message
Hex 21 <message text>
ESC Write Error Code Command
Hex 04 Hex 21
Insert Cursor Order Error Message
Position cursor <message text>
Results
You can use the IC order to place the cursor at the beginning of the field where the error occurred. This helps the operator find the source of the error. The IC order does not affect where the error message is written.
The terminal writes only the first 78 bytes of the error message to the error line. If the error line is already used for error presentation, the terminal saves data on the error line and restores it after the operator presses the Reset key.
When the operator presses the Help key (prehelp error state only) in response to the error condition, characters from columns 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the error line are returned to the host system in a packed form and sent as a Signal command.
276 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
These characters form an index code that elicits a user-generated description of the error for the operator.
S Prehelp error state is selected for the keyboard.
S Input Inhibited annunciator is on.
S Insert mode and Insert annunciator are cleared.
S Command, dead key diacritic, and hex modes are cleared.
S Cursor is blinking.
S The line in the format table header defined as an error line is saved.
S Cursor moves to the location specified by the IC order. If no IC order is given, the cursor does not move.
S All characters (except IC order) found between the command byte and the end of the chain or next ESC are written on the error line. If the data exceeds 80 characters, an error occurs.
S All outstanding AID bytes are cleared.
S When the operator presses [HELP], the controller places a nonblink high intensity attribute in column 1 of the error line, replacing anything that was previously there.
S The locked state of the keyboard is cleared if the keyboard was locked and the terminal was not in a posthelp error state. This allows the operator to release the keyboard by pressing the Reset key.
The following conditions cause parameter errors:
S Neither an IC order nor data follows the command.
S Invalid IC order.
S More data than 80 bytes is specified.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
277
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Write to Display (WTD)
Function
The WTD command does the following:
S Modifies the format table and display buffer contents.
S Governs MDT flags and Message Waiting annunciator.
S Nulls nonbypass fields.
S Controls keyboard lock and cursor blink.
Restrictions
This command is rejected if the display is in a prehelp error, posthelp error, system request, or SS message state.
If the display supports a separate message line, and the message line is selected, then only system request or SS message state result in a contention state error. If the error line is in use, however, and the WTD attempts to redefine the error line (using Start of Header byte 4), a negative response is generated.
Format
The WTD command takes either of the following forms.
ESC
Hex 04
Hex 04
WTD Command CC Byte 1 CC Byte 2 Orders or Data
Hex 11 Hex 00 Hex 13 <orders>
Hex 11 Hex 00 Hex 13 <data>
Note: CC Byte 1 and CC Byte 2 are the write control characters.
CC Byte 1 may do the following:
Clear the master MDT flag and reset the MDT flags.
Null all appropriate nonbypass fields.
CC Byte 2 sets the following:
Cursor blink
Keyboard lock
Alarm
Message Waiting annunciator
Orders are described in detail starting on page 280. Any character that is not an order and not associated with an order is considered data, and is written on the screen at the current display address. The address is then incremented by 1 for each character written. These characters should be hex 00, hex 1C, or above hex 1F, so there is no conflict with the codes reserved for orders.
278 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Results
If the WTD command changes the format table, the keyboard remains locked until specifically unlocked by CC Byte 1 or a subsequent WTD command.
See the following table to determine the appropriate command for your particular combination of needs. To select a command, check the body of the table for the row showing the desired combination of conditions. Then refer to the left-most column to find the corresponding hex code.
Write to Display Control Byte 1
Clear Master MDT and Reset MDT Flags
Nonbypass
Fields All
Null All Appropriate
Nonbypass Fields
Field with
MDT On All Hex Code
00
20
40
60
80
A0
C0
E0
Reset Pending AID, Lock Keyboard
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
Below are the bit positions for CC Byte 2. The most significant bit is 7; the least significant bit is 0. Invalid orders or no data, orders, or CC following the command byte cause parameter errors:
Bit
7
6
Description
Always 00
0 = Cursor moves to default or IC order position when keyboard unlocks.
* 1 = Cursor does not move when keyboard unlocks.
0 = No action; 1 = Reset blinking cursor
0 = No action; 1 = Set blinking cursor (if reset bit also = 1)
3
2
5
4
1
0 = No action; 1 = Unlock keyboard, reset pending AID bytes
0 = No action; 1 = Sound alarm
0 = No action; 1 = Reset Message Waiting annunciator
0 0 = No action; 1 = Set Message Waiting annunciator (even if bit 5 is set to 1)
* Exception: When a WTD is received with the keyboard unlocked and the WTD does not modify the keyboard state.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
279
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Orders
The following pages describe the host 5250 data stream orders the host can send to terminals on the network. Orders govern format and data expectations within the WTD command (page 278).
The host application can include terminal orders in the WTD command, alone or intermixed with display data. The terminal executes orders sequentially and does not store orders in the display buffer with other data in the data stream.
Five buffer control orders position, define, and format data written into the buffer, erase selected unprotected data in the buffer, and reposition the cursor. The TD order writes transparent data to the display.
Below are the orders and hex codes. Pages reference additional information about each order.
Output Commands (page references)
Insert Cursor (IC) (next page)
Move Cursor (MC) (page 282)
Repeat to Address (RA) (page 283)
Set Buffer Address (SBA) (page 284)
Start of Field (SF) (page 285)
Start of Header (SOH) (page 292)
Transparent Data (TD) (page 294)
Hex Code
13
14
02
11
1D
01
10
280 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Insert Cursor (IC)
Function
The IC order either sets the system insert cursor (IC) address to the location specified by the two bytes that follow the order when it is included in the WTD command, or moves the cursor to the specified address without affecting the system IC address when it is included in the Write Error
Code command. Byte 1 gives the row address and Byte 2 gives the cursor address.
Note: If multiple IC orders appear in the Write data stream, the last one encountered is used in subsequent operations.
Restrictions
A parameter error is posted when:
S There are fewer than two bytes following the order.
S The row address equals 0 or is greater than 24.
S The column address equals 0 or is greater than 80.
Format
The order takes the following form:
Insert Cursor Order
Hex 13
Row Address
Hex 01
Column Address
Hex 01
Results
When the order is used in the WTD command, the cursor is not immediately moved; the address is saved for later use. The cursor is moved when the entire WTD is completed.
When the order is used in the Write Error Code command, the cursor is moved to the address given in the IC order and does not affect the system
IC address. The cursor exits the field regardless of the type and does not perform any field checks. For example, it does not check for a filled field for a field specified as mandatory fill.
You can use the IC order in the Write Error Code command to tell the terminal operator where an error has occurred. Maximum row and column addresses are determined by the character size selected through the terminal’s TE configuration menus or firmware.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
281
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Move Cursor (MC)
Function
The MC order enables the host to move the cursor to a specified position without modifying the home address, and without regard to the keyboard’s state.
Restrictions
None.
Format
The order takes the following form:
MC Order
Hex 14
Row Address
1 byte
Column Address
1 byte
If the WTD data stream contains multiple IC or MC orders, the last IC or
MC order determines the cursor position. The IC order negates any previously coded MC orders and the MC order negates any previously coded
IC orders, with the exception that the last IC order establishes home position. To set the home position and then move the cursor, code the IC order, and then the MC order. WTD control character values do not affect the MC order, including the move cursor flag. See page 279 for more information.
Results
None.
282 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Repeat to Address (RA)
Function
The RA order stores a specified alphanumeric or null character in all buffer locations starting at the current buffer address and ending on the specified stop address. This stop address and the character to repeat are identified by the three bytes immediately following the RA order in the Write data stream. You can use RA orders to fill an area of the display.
Restrictions
A parameter error is posted when:
S Fewer than three bytes follow the order.
S A row address equals 0 or is greater than 24.
S The specified ending address is less than the current display address.
Note: Although any character can be repeated, avoid using hex 11 (SBA orders), because this value is the delimiter between the fields sent in response to the Read MDT Fields command.
Format
None.
Results
The character is repeated from the current display address through the ending display address specified. The current display address is then updated to the value of the last position +1.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
283
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Set Buffer Address (SBA)
Function
The SBA order specifies a new buffer address from which operations are to start or continue. You can use the SBA order to:
S Write data into various areas of the buffer.
S Precede another order in the data stream to specify the starting address for an RA order.
S Specify the address at which an attribute byte is stored by a SF order.
Restrictions
A parameter error is posted when:
S Fewer than two bytes follow the order.
S The row address is equal to 0 or greater than 24.
S The column size equals 0 or is greater than 80.
Default. When the SBA is not specified in the WTD command, the data starts at row 1, column 1. This is where the WTD command initialized it.
Format
The SBA order takes the following form:
SBA Order
Hex 11
Row Address
Hex 01
Column Address
Hex 01
Row addresses begin with 1, as do column addresses. However, the terminal accepts column address hex 00 and translates it to column 1.
284 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Start of Field (SF)
Function
The SF order defines input and output fields. If an input field is being defined, it also resets any pending AID byte and locks the keyboard.
Note: Although this order can be used for output fields, it is not recommended because it degrades performance. Use the SBA order instead.
Restrictions
None.
Format
SF order takes the following form with minimal information:
SF Order
Hex 1D
Attribute
Hex 01
Length
Hex 0012
You may also include format and control information in the SF order. In these cases it takes one of the following forms:
Note: Brackets around “format” and “control” headings indicate these fields are optional.
SF Order
Hex 1D
[Format]
Hex 4000
Attribute
Hex 01
Length
Hex 0012
SF Order
Hex 1D
[Format]
Hex 4000
[Control] ]
Hex 8102
Attribute
Hex 01
Length
Hex 0012
You can only include the control word after you have provided a format word. You can also insert several control words between the format and attribute portions of the SF order, but these control words are not required.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
285
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
286
The following paragraph describes the format portion, page 290 describes the control portion, and page 290 has the attribute portion of the SF order. The 2-byte Field Format Word (FFW) contains the information listed on page 290.
Format Portions of SF Order
Within the format portion of the SF order, the two most significant bits
(15 and 14) must always be hex 01. See below for descriptions of bits 13 through 0.
Bit Description
4
3
14–15 Always 01 (reserved) Bit 15 is the most significant bit.
13 0 = Nonbypass field;
1 = Bypass field.
12
11
0 = Duplication not allowed;
1 = Duplication allowed
0 = Field was not modified (MDT) bit;
1 = Field was modified
10–8 000 = Alpha shift;
001 = Alpha only;
010 = Numeric shift;
011 = Numeric only;
100 = Katakana shift (not supported);
101 = Digits only;
110 = I/O (feature input field);
111 = Signed numeric
7
6
0 = Auto enter disabled;
1 = Auto enter when field is exited
0 = Field Exit key is not required;
1 = Field Exit key is required
5
2–0
0 = Accept lowercase letters;
1 = Translate lowercase to uppercase
Reserved
0 = No mandatory entry;
1 = Mandatory entry
000 = No adjustment;
001 = Reserved;
010 = Reserved;
011 = Reserved;
100 = Reserved;
101 = Right adjust, zero fill;
110 = Right adjust, blank fill;
111 = Mandatory fill
FCWs (two bytes each) are optional. The user program can use the WTD command to send FCWs to the controller. When FCWs are used, they should follow the FFW of the SF order. An FCW encountered during modification of an existing format table entry is ignored. The LU does not accept an FCS of hex FFxx.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Below are the valid FCWs and functions supported by the terminals.
8101
8103
84nn
B140
B1A0
Value (Hex) Description
80nn Entry field resequencing. The “nn” specifies the next entry field in the sequence (hex 00 to 80).
Magnetic stripe reader (MSR) entry field.
MSR and selector light pen (SLP) entry field.
Transparency entry field. The “nn” is any two digits.
Self-check modulus 11 entry field.
Self-check module 10 entry field.
The first FCW of any type is used; subsequent FCWs of the same type are ignored. The controller does not check to see if the FCWs are formatted correctly or if the requested function is installed. During subsequent command and keystroke processing, the controller detects and reports these errors to the host if the FCW is required. FCWs types are as follows.
S Resequencing
Resequencing enables the controller to send the input fields to the host in any specified order. Resequencing is done by chaining input fields with FCWs that specify the desired order of transmission. The resequencing FCW takes the following format:
Bits Description
0–1
2–7
B 10
B 000000
8–15 The normal sequence position of the next field to be returned to the host.
(The first field on the screen is number 1. Field numbers progress sequentially, left to right and top to bottom.)
Bit 3 of the SOH order contains the number of the field to be sent. If the first field identifier in the SOH is zero, resequencing does not occur. That is, all resequencing FCWs are ignored. Fields are sent to the host in the order defined in the format table. If resequencing occurs, the last field to be sent to the host must contain this FCW:
Bits Description
0–1
2–7
B 10
B 000000
8–15 B11111111
Note: If FCWs create a closed loop, the controller detects the error and stops the transmission. An FCW for each field is not required. An FCW pointing to the next sequential field is assumed if no resequencing FCW is specified. The last field in the format table must have a resequencing
FCW.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
287
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
S MSR
MSR enables the scanner for an input field.
S SLP
SLP is accepted, but ignored.
S Transparency
Transparency defines a field that can contain data of any value.
S Self-Check
Self-check on the controller provides additional integrity for data entry.
All field types can be specified for self-checking. The following requirements must be met when specifying a field for self-checking:
S An FCW must be defined for the field. Hex B1A0 selects Modulus
10 checking, and hex B140 selects Modulus 11.
S Field lengths for checking are restricted to 33 positions. For signed numeric fields, only 32 positions can contain digits and the sign is not checked. If more than 33 characters are given a LUSTAT parameter error results.
Self-check resolves fields and conditions as follows:
S The function converts nonnumeric characters (including nulls and blanks) by using the four low-order bits from their EBCDIC representation when the low-order bits are in the range 0-9. For example,
A in EBCDIC is C1, thus A = 1. R in EBCDIC is D9, thus R = 9.
A “0” replaces all other characters with the four low-order bits in the range of A through F. For example, % is EBCDIC 6C, thus % = 0.
Null and blank characters also convert to 0. All high-order nulls, zeros, and blanks in a field are converted to 0 and do not affect the value of the check number.
S An all-null field checks correctly. This field can result when the operator unsuccessfully tried to enter digits into a field and checking fails.
The controller enables the operator to exit the field from the first position by using the Field Exit key.
288 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Field Type Description
Alpha only
Alpha shift
Auto enter
Bypass
Digits only
Duplication
Accepts only the characters A-Z (uppercase and lowercase) and the , . - and blank space.
Accepts all data keys. The shift keys are acknowledged.
When the operator uses [FIELD EXIT] key to leave this field or puts the last character in the field, the terminal treats the action as if the operator pressed [ENTER].
Operator cannot put entries in this field. Attempts to enter data cause a keying error.
Operator can only put the characters 0-9 in this field. The [DUP] key is allowed if enabled.
Allows operator to use the [DUP] key. When the operator presses [DUP], the controller fills the field from the cursor to the end of the field with “1C.” (Typically the host program uses this to place data from a previous record into the field when it receives the data.) An overstruck asterisk is displayed for the “1C” characters.
Field Exit key required Operator can only exit the field by pressing a non-data key such as [FIELD EXIT] or other cursor-moving key.
I/O
Mandatory entry
Only the scanner can put data in this field.
The operator must put data in this field before pressing [ENTER] or another
AID-generating key.
Mandatory fill
Modified
Numeric only
When the operator begins putting data into this field, they must completely fill it before exiting from it.
Marks this field as modified.
Numeric shift
Right-adjust
Accepts only the characters 0-9 and the symbols + , . - and blank. [FIELD+] exits the field with a positive number; [FIELD-] with a negative number. [FIELD EXIT] exits the field as entered with the sign specified by the host. The controller marks a minus field by changing the high nibble of the last byte to “B” unless a + , . - or blank is in that byte.
These characters cause an error to occur.
Accepts any data characters.
Self-check
Signed numeric
When the operator exits the field, the controller shifts the contents to the right and fills on the left with zeros or blank spaces, as specified. Bits 13-15 can be 0. This allows the operator to make entries into any part of the field without any subsequent position adjustment. When the controller sends the field to the host, it also sends whatever is in the field (nulls if a Clear Unit command was received).
Modulus 10 self-check fields perform a MOD 10 Check on the input. Modulus 11 self-check fields perform a MOD 11 Check on the input. The controller performs these checks when the operator exits the field. If the checks fail, an input error is indicated and the Input Inhibited annunciator is turned on. The operator must press the [RESET] key to clear the condition.
The network checks data by doing the appropriate modus on the low four bits of the characters in the field. If the low four bits are within the range “A” through “F,” zero is used in the modulus calculation.
Only the characters 0-9 are allowed. The last byte of the field is reserved for the sign character. The operator cannot place data in this location. If the operator presses [FIELD-] to exit the field, the last character is set to “-” and the field is right adjusted. The high nibble of the last digit input is set to “B.” If the operator uses [FIELD+] or [FIELD EXIT] to exit the field, the last character is set to blank and the field is right-adjusted. The “-” or
“blank” is sent in response to Read Input Fields or Read MDT Fields commands.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
289
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Control Portions of SF Order
Below describes the control portions of the SF order.
Hex Code Description
80XX
80FF
8101
8102
B1A0
B140
Resequencing, “xx” defines the next field number
Resequencing terminator
Enable scanner (extended 5250); this is IBM’s MSR option
Reserved (extended 5250)
Modulus 10 self-check
Modulus 11 self-check
Attribute Portions of SF Order
Below describes the attribute portions of the SF order.
Hex Code Description
20 Normal (dark characters on light background)
21
24
28
2F
30
Reverse image (light characters on dark background)
Underscore
Blink (applies only to the 6400, 59XX, and 17XX)
Nondisplay
Column separator
Results
The SF order does the following:
S The display address is set to the end-of-field address (as specified by the last SF order + 1). This does not happen if this is the first SF order or if an SBA order precedes it (the SBA points at the field starting attribute).
S The screen attribute in the SF order is written into the location defined by the display address.
S The start-of-field address is set to the display address +1.
S The end-of-field address is set to the display address + the field length specified by the SF order. The ending screen attribute is written to the end-of-field +1. This is a “20.”
S The display address is incremented by 1.
S If this is an input field (one in which a field format word has been specified), a format table entry consisting of the field format and the FCWs is generated. In addition, if the SF order is rejected, the keyboard is locked and any outstanding AID byte is cleared.
290 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
S The format table is modified if the display address +1 is equal to the starting address of an input field that was previously defined. This happens as follows:
S The field format word of the previously defined field is overlaid with the new one.
S All FCWs and length parameters that were specified are ignored. Two bytes, however, are still required for the length even though no value check is performed on them.
S The field ending address is set equal to the field’s original ending address.
S The screen ending address is not rewritten.
S The defined field is not null filled. If any data characters follow the length field, they are written into the defined field.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
291
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Start of Header (SOH)
Function
The SOH order notifies the terminal that the next byte in the Write data steam contains a header order. The order specifies header information for the format table. When the controller receives this order, it first clears the format table, then inserts the contents of the SOH order.
Restrictions
A parameter error is posted when the output data stream ends before the number of bytes needed are sent or when the first byte of the order is not between 1 and 254.
Format
The SOH order takes the following form:
Function Hex Code
Order 01
Length 07
Reserved 00
Reserved 00
Resequence 00
Error row 00
F keys 000000
Results
Because the length of this order varies, the first byte after the order code contains the number of bytes included. Length may range from 0–7 bytes.
A length of 7 bytes enables or disables selected function keys designated by the bits in bytes 5 through 7. When bits are enabled, function keys return
AID codes with input data. When bits are inhibited, or length is less than
7, function keys return AID codes but without input data.
292 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
The following table shows the data-included switches for the function keys: 0 = enable, 1 = inhibit, and bit 0 is the most significant bit.
Function Key Bit Switches
Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
Bit # Function Key Bit # Function Key Bit # Function Key
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
F24
F23
F22
F21
F20
F19
F18
F17
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F16
F15
F14
F13
F12
F11
F10
F9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
F8
F7
F6
You can use resequencing to point to a field, other than the first, as the field you want sent to the host in response to a Read Input Fields or Read
MDT Fields command. If not zero, the FCW of the field is checked as each field is sent to see whether resequencing is enabled. If so, the FCW points to the next field to send. If the FCW has resequencing disabled (or no FCW exists for the field), the next defined field is sent and checked for resequencing.
Bits Description
0000 0000 Disable resequencing
XXXX XXXX Number of first field to be transmitted to the host, in response to a
Read Input Fields or Read MDT Fields command.
The error row may vary from 0 to 24. Row “00” signifies the default row, which is the last line for most 5250 devices. You can use other values to override the default row.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
293
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Transparent Data (TD)
Function
The TD order lets you send data with any value to the terminal display.
Restrictions
None.
Format
The order takes the following form:
TD Order
Hex 10
Length (2 Bytes)
Hex 0020
Data
<data>
The 2-byte length field after the order tells how many bytes of data follow.
294 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
Asynchronous 5250 Prefixes
Each asynchronous 5250 data stream command is preceded by a variablelength prefix. The first byte of the prefix contains the number of bytes in the prefix, not including the length byte. The length may be zero, which indicates an empty prefix. The second byte of the prefix (if the length is nonzero) must be either hex 40 or C0.
S Hex 40 indicates that the data in the rest of the message is LU-LU (normal 5250 commands).
S C0 indicates that the rest of the message is SS-LU data (an SS message).
SS messages cause the terminal to enter the SS message state, where the only allowable keystroke is Reset. The SS message is a one-line message that is displayed on the terminal’s status line until the Reset key is pressed.
After hex 40 or C0, the 5250 prefix may contain one 5250 signal. A signal is a sequence of 5 bytes that tells the terminal to perform a special operation. The terminal supports the Signal command formats in the following chart.
Hex Code Description
C9 00 00 00 01 Signal operator (turns on the Message Waiting annunciator and sounds the audible alarm)
C9 00 00 00 05 Resets the Message Waiting annunciator
A parameter error is posted when less data is in the message than indicated by the length byte. This causes a parameter error of “21.” If the terminal encounters data it does not understand, it ignores the rest of the prefix.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
295
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
System Messages and Parameter Errors
The terminal’s display reserves a line for status information. The status line can display system (nonlocal) information such as a message waiting from the host computer, help messages in response to the Help key, or the system request state of the terminal. You can program the location of the status line through the Start of Header order.
System codes can also appear on the status line. (On 17XX and 59XX Terminals, the system codes do blink.) The parameter errors displayed when the stated condition occurs are listed on the next page. Unless otherwise noted in the table, the terminal’s Reset key restores the status line and returns to the keying mode in effect when the problem occurred.
Code Description
0005 Attempt to enter data when not in a field.
0006 A key other than a data key or [ENTER] was pressed in the system request state.
0007 A mandatory entry field has not had data put into it.
0008 The field is alpha only, and an invalid key was pressed.
0009 The field is numeric only, and an invalid key was pressed.
0010 The field is signed numeric, and an invalid key was pressed.
0011 Data cannot be entered into the last byte of a signed numeric field.
0012 No room in field for insert. The field is full or on the last byte.
0013 Cannot leave field while in insert mode.
0014 Field is mandatory fill and cannot be exited until filled.
0015 MOD 10 or MOD 11 Check has failed on field.
0016 Field error: Cannot be used in field that is not signed numeric.
0017 Attempt to use [FIELD EXIT] key in unfilled, mandatory fill field.
0018 Only a nondata key can be used to exit this field; for example, [FIELD EXIT].
0019 [DUP] key not allowed in this field.
0020 Cannot use AID-generating key to exit signed numeric or right-adjusted field.
Must use [FIELD EXIT].
0021 Cannot exit a mandatory enter field without entering data.
0023 Invalid hex value entered.
0026 The [FIELD-] key was pressed, but the last character of the field was not 0-9.
0099 An invalid key was pressed before the terminal was in session. Only
[SYS REQ] is allowed.
C00 An invalid 5250 command was received. This sequence of bytes is sent to the host: 01 10 03 01 01.
PXX System code where “XX” is the parameter error .
When a 5250 command contains invalid parameters, system code “PXX” appears on the bottom line of the display. (On 17XX and 59XX Terminals, the system codes do blink.) The “XX” in the system code indicates the type of parameter error.
The message sent to the host is: 01 10 05 01 XX, where “XX” is the same parameter error that was put in the terminal’s display.
296 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
The parameter errors are a subset of the 5250 data stream command set.
Those errors supported by the terminals are listed in below.
P27
P28
P29
P2A
P2C
P30
P87
Parameter
Error
P21
P22
P23
P25
P26
Description
Premature end of data stream.
A row or column specification is out of range.
The ending address of the Repeat to Address order is less than the start address.
A signed input field had a length of 1. It must be at least 2.
An input field start address was less than a previously-defined input field start address.
An invalid Restore Screen command was received.
An attempt was made to define an input field past the end of the display.
Format table overflow (too many input fields were defined).
An attempt was made to write data past the end of the display.
Invalid roll up or roll down parameters were received.
An invalid attribute was received as part of a SF order.
A MOD 10 or MOD 11 input field was defined with a length greater than 33.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
297
Chapter 6
—
Display Data Stream
298 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
7
Extended Commands
Extended commands govern abilities unique to terminals. You can use extended commands to transmit or receive data over the terminal’s RS-232 port, send information to an RS-232 device (such as a printer or bar code printer), or collect data. The following chart lists the commands.
Name
Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port
Transmit Only On RS-232 Port
Receive Only On RS-232 Port
Set Parameters (supported on 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Return Version
Tone
Scan
Get Optical Inputs (supported on 248X)
Read, Set, and Reset Relay Commands (supported on 248X)
Magnetic Card Reader (supported on 700 Series)
To use extended commands, you must enable the extended command option through the TE configuration menus. See Chapter 4, “Using the Ter-
minal Emulation Menus,” for information about enabling the command on a terminal.
#T
#S
#I
#R
#M
Characters
#F
#P
#G
#H
#V
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
299
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port (#F)
Use the #F extended command to transmit and receive data on the terminal’s RS-232 port.
When constructing a Transmit and Receive command, the data to be sent should be placed at Line 2, Column 1. The data must be less than 1840 bytes in length (after “=yy” compression, where “yy” is the hexadecimal representation of the output byte). The last character must be a “#”
(pound sign). The terminal sends the data to the RS-232 port until it detects a “#” character.
Line 2, Column 1, begins the start of transmit data. The host application must set up the screen with a transmit field to locate the RS-232 port I/O data. The field can be anywhere on the screen, beginning at position 80.
The host application must supply the receive field (for response from the
RS-232 port to the host). The receive field can be anywhere on the screen except for the position allocated for the return status field.
The output stream appears in ASCII character format. For bytes that are not displayable ASCII characters, you may insert the “=yy” characters, where “yy” is the hexadecimal representation of the output byte. For example, insert “=0D” if your printer requires a carriage return, or insert
“=0A” for a line feed. Appendix D, “Terminal Font Set Table,” contains other hexadecimal values.
300 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
The following table describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Transmit and Receive Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–24
3
4
Column Description
2 Extended command
Transmit and Receive on RS-232 Port command
Speed (bits per second)
Character
#
F
1=1200; 2=2400; 3=4800; 4=9600; 5=19200;
6=38400
7
8
5
6
Data parity
Data bits
9
Stop bits
For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX:
CTS flow control
For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020,
700 Series: Reserved
For 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX: DTR flow control
For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400,
5020, 700 Series: Reserved
XON/XOFF flow control 10
11–12 Flow control timeout value
13 Return AID key
14–15
16–17
Maximum characters to receive
Delimiter character
N=None; 0 (zero)=None; b=None; E=Even; O=Odd
7=Seven; 8=Eight
1=One; 2=Two
0=Disable; 1=Enable b
0=Disable; 1=Enable b
0=Disable; 1=Enable
XX=Number of seconds b=AID key is Enter (default).
X=AID key character. See the “Return AID Keys” table on page 303 for return AID key characters.
bb=Default dd or Xd
…dX, where: dd=00–99. Default: 99. d
…d=Any number of decimal digits from 0–2000, inclusive. Default: 99.
AA=Hexadecimal ASCII code that marks the end of data to be received. Range: 00-7E. Default of 00 or
bb implies no start character.
18–19 Number of delimiter characters
20–21
22
23
24–25
Start character
Return start character to host
Flag parity errors
Receive timeout length
XX=Number of characters accepted before sending return code to host. Range: 00–99. Default of 00 or
bb implies no start character.
AA=Hexadecimal ASCII code. Range: 00–99. Default of 00 or bb implies no start character.
F=Return character b=Do not return character
P=Flag b=Do not flag
XX=Number of seconds the terminal waits for input from the RS-232 port before it sends a timeout error. Uses the 5-second default when field contains spaces.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
301
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Flow Control
The Transmit command supports these types of flow control:
S RTS/CTS (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
S DTR/DSR (59XX only)
S XON/XOFF
Use CTS and DSR flow control lines to show XON/XOFF conditions from the output device. Also use them to prevent output when the terminal has no output device. The output device DTR should connect to either the DSR or CTS lines. On the 59XX Terminal, DTR is normally low and is raised to indicate that the terminal is prepared for an RS-232 data exchange.
XON/XOFF is the same XON/XOFF flow control most devices support.
The timeout value tells the terminal how long to wait for the flow control handshake before returning a one-byte error value.
302 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Return AID Key Characters
The following table lists the extended command AID keys and characters returned to the host. For example, if you want an F1 AID key, use “A” as the character. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Return AID Keys
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F13
F14
F15
F16
F9
F10
F11
F12
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Clear
F1
F2
F3
AID Key
Enter
Help
Roll down/Page up
Roll up/Page down
Home
T
U
V
W
X
Q
R
S
M
N
O
P
K
L
J
I
F
G
D
E
H
B
C
7
A
.
’
+
)
*
Character
b
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
303
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Return Codes for Transmit and Receive
Line 24, Column 1, has the return status field. The code returned in this position tells the host the extended command status. The codes are listed in this chart.
8
9
6
7
A
4
5
2
3
Code Description
0 Good status, transaction complete.
1 Not enough memory. Or, incorrect setting for speed, number of data bits or stop bits, or flow control timeout.
No delimiter (#) on data stream.
Timeout while using CTS flow control (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX).
Timeout while using DTR flow control (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX).
Timeout while using XON/XOFF flow control.
Improper return field.
Hexadecimal value is outside the range of 00–0F.
Error in AID code.
Incorrect setting for maximum characters to receive.
Incorrect setting for delimiter character.
Column
(None)
4, 6, 7, 11–12
B
C
D
E
Incorrect setting for number of delimiter characters.
Incorrect setting for CTS, DSR, or XON/OFF flow control.
Incorrect setting for start character.
Incorrect setting for data parity.
17–18
8, 9, 10
19–20
5, 22 f/F* Timeout.
o/O* Overrun of UART receive register; an error from the RS-232 device.
(None)
(None) p/P* Data parity or framing error.
R Syntax error from RD5500 Remote Display (not the expected character; no character error was detected). (Applies only to the 17XX Terminal.)
*
(None)
(None)
An uppercase letter indicates an error from the RS-232 device. A lowercase letter indicates an error from the
RD5500 Remote Display (applies only to the 17XX Terminal).
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
15–16, 19–20
(None)
13–14
15–16
304 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Example of Transmit and Receive
The following example and chart show what would be sent to a terminal to cause data to be transmitted and received. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte
space.
Column 1 Column 11 Column 23
b#F4N81bb000b500A0102bb10
This is data to send.#
Line 1
Line 2
4
5
2
3
Column Character Description
1 b This column typically contains a space.
#
F
4
N
Extended command.
Transmit and Receive command.
9600 baud.
No parity.
8
9
6
7
10
11–12 00
13 b
14–15 50
16–17 0A
0
0
8
1
0
18–19 01
20–21 02
22
23 b b
24–25 10
Eight data bits.
One stop bit.
No CTS flow control.
No DTR flow control.
No XON/OFF flow control.
No flow control timeout value.
AID key is Enter.
Receive a maximum of 50 characters.
Delimiter character is 0A hexadecimal (line feed).
Data will be sent to host after 1 delimiter character is received.
Start character is 02 hexadecimal (STX).
Start character will not be returned.
Do not flag parity errors.
Receive timeout length is 10 seconds.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
305
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Transmit Only On RS-232 Port (#P)
The Transmit Only On RS-232 Port extended command lets the terminal send information to a slaved RS-232 device, such as a receipt printer or bar code printer. The command uses the RS-232 communications port to send data to the device. The terminal checks data from the host computer for a transmit sequence, then sends the requested data. The host computer signals the terminal for a transmit command by inserting the characters
“#P” into the display at Line 1, Columns 2 and 3. Characteristics of the transmission immediately follow the #P command.
When constructing a Transmit Only command, the data to be sent should be placed at Line 2, Column 1. The data must be less than 1840 bytes in length (after “=yy” compression). The last character must be a “#” (pound sign). The terminal sends the data to the RS-232 port until it detects a “#” character.
Line 2, Column 1, begins the start of transmit data. The host application must set up the screen with a transmit field to locate the RS-232 port I/O data. The field can be anywhere on the screen, beginning at position 80.
The output stream takes the form of ASCII characters. For nondisplayable
ASCII characters, you may insert the “=yy” characters, where “yy” is the hexadecimal representation of the output byte. For example, insert “=0D” if your printer requires a carriage return, or insert “=0A” for a line feed.
Appendix D, “Terminal Font Set Table,” contains other values.
306 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
The following table describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings. Note that the line and column information refers to a 3278 unit with a 24-line by 80-column display and that “b” indicates a 1-byte space. The display buffer position refers to the same buffer but with a linear array ranging from 0–1919.
7
8
5
6
2
3
4
Transmit Only Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–12
Column Description Character
9
10
11-12
13
Extended command
Transmit Only On RS-232 Port command
Speed (bits per second)
Data parity
Data bits
Stop bits
For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX:
CTS flow control
For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020,
700 Series: Reserved
For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX:
DTR flow control
For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020,
700 Series: Reserved
XON/XOFF flow control
Flow control timeout value
Return AID key
#
P
1=1200; 2=2400; 3=4800; 4=9600; 5=19200;
6=38400
N=None; 0 (zero)=None; b=None; E=Even; O=Odd
7=Seven; 8=Eight
1=One; 2=Two
0=Disable; 1=Enable
0=Disable; 1=Enable
0=Disable; 1=Enable
XX=Number of seconds b=AID key is Enter (default). X=AID key character.
See the “Return AID Keys” table on page 303 for characters.
Flow Control
Transmit Only supports RTS/CTS, DTR/DSR, and XON/XOFF. For descriptions, see page 302.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
307
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Return Codes for Transmit Only
The terminal puts the return code response in an input field in the display buffer at Line 24, Column 1. It simulates the [ENTER] key to return the value to the host.
Use the Start Field order to return a code for this operation. The following chart lists return codes.
Code Description Column
f
C
E
6
8
2
3
4
5
0
1
Good status, transaction complete.
Not enough memory. Or, incorrect setting for speed, number of data bits, number of stop bits, or flow control timeout.
No delimiter (#) on data stream.
Timeout while using CTS flow control (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX).
Timeout while using DTR flow control (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX).
Timeout while using XON/XOFF flow control.
Improper return field.
Error in AID code.
Incorrect setting for CTS, DTR, or XON/OFF flow control.
Incorrect setting for data parity.
Timeout. No acknowledgment was received from the RD5500 Remote Display (applies to
the 17XX Terminal).
(None)
4, 6, 7, 11–12
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
8, 9, 10
5
(None) o/O* Overrun of UART receive register.
p/P* Data parity or framing error.
R
*
(None)
(None)
Syntax error from RD5500 Remote Display (not the expected character; no character error was detected). (Applies to the 17XX Terminal.)
(None)
An uppercase letter indicates an error from the RS-232 device. A lowercase letter indicates an error from the
RD5500 Remote Display (applies only to the 17XX Terminal).
308 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Example of Transmit Only
The following example and chart show what would be sent to a terminal to cause data to be transmitted. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space. Following the example is an explanation of Line 1.
Column 1 Column 11
b#P3N81bb005A
This is data to send.#
Line 1
Line 2
8
9
6
7
10
11–12
13
4
5
2
3
Column Character
1 b
#
P
3
N
8
1
0
0
0
05
A
Description
This column typically contains a space.
Extended command.
Transmit Only command.
4800 baud.
No parity.
Eight data bits.
One stop bit.
No CTS flow control.
No DTR flow control.
No XON/OFF flow control.
Flow control timeout is 5 seconds.
AID key is [F1].
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
309
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Receive Only On RS-232 Port (#G)
Note: There are no flow control settings for extended command #G.
The Receive Only On RS-232 Port extended command provides a way to use the RS-232 port on the terminal to collect data. A scale is one example of a use for this command. The host computer sends “#G” characters to alert the terminal for activity on the port.
Line 2, Column 1, is the start of the area on the screen where an input field may be placed for receive data. The host application must supply the input field for the data received on the RS-232 port. The host can place the input field anywhere on the screen except the position for the return status field.
The following table describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Receive Only Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–24
Column Description Character
4
5
2
3
6
7
8–12
13
14–15
16–17
Extended command #
Receive Only On RS-232 Port command G
Speed (bits per second)
Data parity
1=1200; 2=2400; 3=4800; 4=9600; 5=19200; 6=38400
N=None; 0 (zero)=None; b=None; E=Even; O=Odd
Data bits
Stop bits
Reserved
Return AID key
Maximum characters to receive
Delimiter character
7=Seven; 8=Eight
1=One; 2=Two bbbbb b=AID key is Enter (default). X=AID key character. See the
“Return AID Keys” table on page 303 for characters.
bb=Default dd or Xd
…dX, where: dd=00-99. Default: 99. d
…d=Any number of decimal digits from 0–2000, inclusive.
Default: 99.
AA=Hexadecimal ASCII code that marks the end of data to be received. Range: 00–7E. Default of 00 or bb implies no start
character.
18–19 Number of delimiter characters
20–21
22
23
Start character
Return start character to host
Flag parity errors
24–25 Receive timeout length
XX=Number of characters accepted before sending return code to host. Range: 00–99. Default of 00 or bb implies no
start character.
AA=Hexadecimal ASCII code. Range: 00–99. Default of 00 or bb implies no start character.
F=Return character; b=Do not return character
P=Flag; b=Do not flag
XX=Number of seconds the terminal waits for input from the
RS-232 port before it sends a timeout error. Uses the 5-second default when field contains spaces.
310 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Return Codes for Receive Only
Line 24, Column 1, is the return status byte. The host application defines the 1-byte return status field location. The following chart lists return status codes.
9
A
B
D
E
7
8
2
6
Code Description
0 Good status, transaction complete.
1 Not enough memory. Or, incorrect setting for speed, number of data bits, or number of stop bits.
No delimiter (#) on data stream.
Improper return field.
Hexadecimal value is outside the range of 00–0F.
Error in AID code.
Incorrect setting for maximum characters to receive.
Incorrect setting for delimiter character.
Incorrect setting for number of delimiter characters.
Incorrect setting for start character.
Incorrect setting for data parity.
Column
(None)
4, 6, 7 f/F* Timeout.
o/O* Overrun of UART receive register.
p/P* Data parity or framing error.
R Syntax error from RD5500 Remote Display (not the expected character; no character error was detected). (Applies only to the 17XX Terminal.)
*
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
An uppercase letter indicates an error from the RS-232 device. A lowercase letter indicates an error from the
RD5500 Remote Display (applies only to the 17XX Terminal).
(None)
(None)
15–16, 19–20
(None)
13–14
15–16
17–18
19–20
5, 22
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
311
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Example of Receive Only
The following example and chart show what would be sent to the terminal to cause data to be received. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Column 1 Column 11 Column 23
b#G3N81bbbbbb500A0102FP10
2
3
4
Column Character
1 b
#
G
3
5
6
7
8–12
13
14–15
16–17
18–19
20–21
22
23
24–25
N
8
1 bbbbb b
50
0A
01
02
F
P
10
Description
This column typically contains a space.
Extended command.
Receive Only command.
4800 baud.
No parity.
Eight data bits.
One stop bit.
Reserved.
AID key is Enter.
Receive a maximum of 50 characters.
Delimiter character is 0A hexadecimal (line feed).
Data sent to host after one delimiter character is received
Start character is 02 hexadecimal (STX).
Start character will be returned to host.
Parity errors will be flagged
Receive timeout length is 10 seconds.
312 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Set Parameters (#H)
Note: This extended command is supported only on 6400, 5055, 59XX,
17XX, and 11XX Terminals. Some parameters do not apply to all terminal models. See the terminal’s user manual for applicable parameters. “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Use Set Parameters to set TE configuration parameters (part of the configuration menus) that you would otherwise set at the terminal. Set most of the parameters once per terminal. You can set them when you install a network or when you add terminals to the network. Unless the terminal fails
(perhaps a dead battery) or a user does something destructive (such as a
RAM test), you probably will not need to set them again.
Set Parameters Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–36
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals)
Column Description Character
12
13
14
15
2
3
4–6
7–9
10
11
Extended command
Set Parameters command
Backlight timer
16–18 Beeper volume
19–21
22–24
25–27
28–30
31–33
34–36
Sleep timer delay (legacy RT3210) bbb=No change from current setting; 000=Off;
001–255=Seconds of inactivity before sleep
Cursor mode b=No change from current setting, 1=Underline (default); 2=Underline blink; 3=Block; 4=Block blink
Screen mode b=No change from current setting; 1=Center cursor; 2=Corner;
3=Page b=No change from current setting; 0=Not attached; 1=Attached Remote display (17XX, 11XX)
Stream Scan
Scan All Fields
Operator error mode b=No change from current setting; 0=Disable; 1=Enable b=No change from current setting; 0=Disable; 1=Enable b=No change from current setting; 0=Disable beep on keyboard error.
Operator must press [RESET] after an error.
1=Enable beep on keyboard error. Emits the error tone, then resets the terminal so the operator can correct the error.
Beeper frequency
Beeper length
Primary screen row size
Primary screen column size
Alternate screen row size
Alternate screen column size
#
H bbb=No change from current setting; 000=On continuously;
001–255=Seconds to remain on bbb=No change from current setting (Default = 255)
000–255=Range of volume from quiet to loud.
bbb=No change from current setting
000–030=Frequency range from low to high.
bbb=No change from setting; 000–255=Duration in seconds bbb=No change from current setting; 000–255=Number of rows per display screen bbb=No change from current setting; 000–255=Number of columns per display screen bbb=No change from current setting; 000–255=Number of rows per display screen bbb=No change from current setting; 000–255=Number of columns per display screen
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
313
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Return Codes for Set Parameters
The Set Parameters return code is the status sent to the host computer.
The following chart lists return codes.
Code Description
E
F
B
C
9
A
D
7
8
5
6
2
3
0
1
4
Good status, transaction complete.
Reserved.
Backlight timer parameter invalid.
Sleep mode timer parameter invalid.
Cursor set parameter invalid.
Screen mode parameter invalid.
Reserved.
Remote display parameter invalid.
Beeper volume parameter invalid.
Beeper frequency parameter invalid.
Beeper length parameter invalid.
Stream scan parameter invalid.
Scan all fields parameter invalid.
Error mode parameter invalid.
Incorrect setting for number of rows.
Incorrect setting for number of columns.
Column
19–21
22–24
13
14
15
25–27
28–30
(None)
(None)
4-6
7–9
10
11
(None)
12
16–18
314 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Example of Set Parameters
This example and chart show data for Set Parameters. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Column 1 Column 11 Column 19 Column 28
b#H099bbb4b11b0255022002010080
15
16–18
19–21
22–24
25–27
28–30
12
13
14
7–9
10
11
Column Character Description
1 b This column typically contains a space.
2
3
4–6
#
H
099
Extended command.
Set Parameters command.
Backlight stays on for 99 seconds.
bbb
4 b
1
1 b
No change from current (legacy RT3210 Terminal only)
Cursor is in block blink mode.
No change from current setting.
Remote display is in use (17XX, 11XX Terminals).
Stream scanning is enabled
No change from current setting
0
255
022
002
010
080
Beep is disabled on keyboard error
Beeper volume is set at 255
Beeper frequency setting is set at 22
Beeper length is 2 seconds
Number of rows in primary screen size is 10
Number of columns in primary screen size is 10
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
315
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Return Version (#V)
The Return Version extended command returns the current terminal emulation name and version to the host computer. The following table lists columns in which characters must appear.
Return Version Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–3
Column Description
2 Extended command
3 Return Version command
Character
#
V
The terminal returns data and the extended command’s status to the host computer in the following format:
//rrccfl <program name><version>#s
S rr is the row.
S cc is the column.
S fl is the AID key return value.
S s is the status.
316 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Tone (#T)
The Tone extended command causes the terminal to make a tone of a specified volume, frequency, and length ().
Note: For Trakker Antares terminals, volume and frequency are ignored.
The volume is user-selectable via the Trakker Antares firmware menus.
The frequency is set to 1200 Hz.
The following table describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings. Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Tone Options — Line 1, Columns 2–12
Column Description
2
3
4–6
Extended command
Tone command
Volume
7–9 Frequency
10–12 Length
Character
#
T bbb=No change from current setting;
000–255=Range from quiet to loud bbb=No change from current setting;
000–030=Range from low to high bbb=No change from current setting; 001–010=Duration in 500 ms from short to long (keyboard response time)
The return code is the status sent to the host computer; the code indicates if the extended command was successful. The terminal returns data and the extended command’s status to the host computer in the
\\X<CR>
format. X is the return code listed in the following chart.
Code Description
9
A
0
8
Good status, transaction complete.
Incorrect setting for volume.
Incorrect setting for frequency.
Incorrect setting for length.
Column
(None)
4–6
7–9
10–12
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
317
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Scan (#S)
The Scan extended command allows host systems to have the same capabilities as terminals using the Native data stream to set bar code parameters and scan.
By inserting characters “#S” in the display buffer at Line 1, Columns 2 and 3, the host computer tells the terminal to expect a Bar Code Scanner extended command. Appropriate descriptive characteristics should follow the “#S” characters. The terminal returns a code to indicate if the command was successful. Then it simulates the [Enter] key to return a value to the host computer. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Due to possible system fragmentation of a data stream, the “#” in Line 1,
Column 2, should be the last character placed on the screen. This will ensure that all data is present before the extended command is parsed (removed).
Scan Bar Code Parameters — Line 1, Columns 2–3
Column Description
2
3
Extended command
Scan command
Character
#
S
318 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
CC Byte 1
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Control Character Byte 1 (CC Byte 1) implementation differs among the terminals. The tables below and on the next page show the CC Byte 1 options for scanning. A “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
CC Byte 1 Options Supported by Characters —
Line 1, Column 4
(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 700 Series)
Disable
Scanner
No Change From
Current Setting CC Byte 1
F b
D
E
B
C
9
A
7
8
5
6
2
3
0
1
4
Laser
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
319
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Note: 6400 Computers do not support HP Wand Select.
CC Byte 1 Options Supported by Characters —
Line 1, Column 4
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
A
B
8
9
5
6
7
E
F
C
D b
3
4
1
2
CC Byte 1
0
HP Wand Select Redundancy Laser No Redundancy
X X
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Disable scanner.
X
No change from current setting.
X
320 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
CC Byte 2
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
CC Byte 2 implementation differs among the types of terminals. The following table shows CC Byte 2 options. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte
space.
CC Byte 2 Options Supported by Characters —
Line 1, Column 5
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
CC Byte 2
B
C
D
E
F
8
9
A
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Scan Termination Character Modulo 10 Check Digit
None
X
[Enter] key
[Tab] key
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
321
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
CC Byte 3
Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
CC Byte 3 Options Supported by Characters —
Line 1, Column 6
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Enable Stream
Scanning Reserved
Return Bar
Code Type
A
B
8
9
5
6
7
E
F
C
D b
3
4
1
2
CC Byte 3
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
No change from current setting.
Bar Code
Concatenated
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bar Code Length
Bar Code Length sets the minimum and maximum character lengths for all types of bar codes scanned. Setting the minimum and maximum values to their optimum can increase scanning performance. If the terminal scans bar codes that are outside the minimum and maximum value, the terminal ignores the bar code. Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Bar Code Length — Line 1, Columns 7–10
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Column Character and Description
7–8
9–10
XX=Bar code length. Maximum length: 99. bb=No change from current setting
XX=Bar code length. Minimum length: 00. bb=No change from current setting
322 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
UPC
Note: 6400 Computers do not support UPC-E Number System 1.
Use the UPC command to select the combinations of characters listed in the following table. Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Character
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
15 b
4
5
6
2
3
0
1
UPC Bar Code Characters
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
UPC-E #
System 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A
UPC-E #
System 0
Disables all.
Add-ons UPC-A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
No change from current setting.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
EAN Algorithms
Use EAN Algorithms to select combinations of EAN options. Note that a
“b” is a 1-byte space.
EAN Algorithms — Line 1, Column 12
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals)
3 b
1
2
Character Description
0 EAN disabled
EAN with Add-ons enabled
EAN enabled
EAN and EAN with Add-ons enabled
No change from current setting
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
323
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Code 39
Code 39 sets the scanner to read simple Code 39 bar codes that do not include extended or encoded sequences. Note that a “b” is a 1-byte space.
Extended Code 39 is a superset of Code 39 and scans all regular Code 39 bar codes. You cannot select both Code 39 and Extended Code 39. Encoded Code 39 combines key presses with normal bar code data.
Appendix A, “Bar Code Scanning,” contains Encoded Code 39 sequences.
Code 39 Algorithms Characters — Line 1, Column 13
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
3 b
1
2
Character Description
0 Code 39 disabled
Encoded Code 39 enabled
Extended Code 39 enabled
Code 39 enabled
No change from current setting
324 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Plessey
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Note: 6400 Computers do not support Plessey alpha characters.
If the Plessey bar code scanning algorithm is enabled, set its check digits according to your requirements. Refer to the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for more information on check digits. Note that a “b” indi-
cates a 1-byte space.
Plessey Characters — Line 1, Column 14
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Character Description
0
1 b
Plessey disabled
Plessey enabled
No change from current setting
The Xs in the following table indicate the Plessey check digits the characters support.
Plessey Check Digit Characters — Line 1, Column 15
Keep
2nd Digit
Check
Do Not
Validate 1st
Check Digit
Keep
1st Check
Digit
Mod 10
1st Check
Digit
A
B
8
9
C
6
7
4
5
F b
D
E
1
2
3
Character
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
No change from current setting.
Mod 11
1st Check
Digit
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
325
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Codabar
The Codabar options (Codabar and ABC Codabar) are mutually exclusive coding algorithms and cannot be selected at the same time. Note that a “b”
indicates a 1-byte space.
Codabar Characters — Line 1, Column 16
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Character Description
2 b
0
1
Codabar disabled
Codabar enabled
ABC Codabar enabled
No change from current setting
Code 11
The following table lists Code 11 characters. Note that a “b” indicates a
1-byte space.
Code 11 Characters — Line 1, Column 17
(59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Character Description
0
1 b
Code 11 disabled
Code 11 enabled
No change from current setting
Code 93
Code 93 and Code 128 options can be enabled. Note that a “b” indicates a
1-byte space.
Code 93 Characters — Line 1, Column 18
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Character Description
0
1 b
Code 93 disabled
Code 93 enabled
No change from current setting
326 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Code 128
The following table lists Code 128 characters. Note that a “b” indicates a
1-byte space.
Code 128 Characters — Line 1, Column 19
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Character Description
0
1 b
Code 128 disabled
Code 128 enabled
No change from current setting
Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5
If the Straight or Computer Identics bar code is enabled, select the maximum and minimum lengths and the first and second fixed bar code lengths according to your requirements. Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte
space. Refer to the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for more information.
2 of 5 Characters
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Character Description
20
21–22
0=Straight and Computer Identics 2 of 5 disabled; 1=Computer Identics 2 of 5 enabled; 2=Straight 2 of 5 enabled; b=No change from current setting
XX=Maximum length Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting
23–24
25–26
27–28
XX=Minimum length Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting
XX=1st fixed bar code length for Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting
XX=2nd fixed bar code length for Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
327
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Interleaved 2 of 5
If Interleaved 2 of 5 is enabled, select the maximum and minimum lengths and the first and second fixed bar code lengths according to requirements.
Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space. Refer to the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for more information.
Interleaved 2 of 5 Characters — Line 1, Columns 29-37
(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)
Character Description
29 0=Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled; 1=Interleaved 2 of 5 enabled; b=No change from current setting
30–31
32–33
34–35
36–37
XX=maximum length Interleaved 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting
XX=minimum length Interleaved 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting
XX=1st fixed length for Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code; bb=No change from current setting
XX=2nd fixed length for Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code; bb=No change from current setting
Return Codes for Scan Bar Code
The Scan Bar Code Parameters return code is the status sent to the host computer; the code indicates if the extended command was successful. The terminal returns data and the extended command’s status to the host computer in the \\X<CR> format where X is the return code listed in the following chart. The terminal simulates the [ENTER] key to return a value to the host computer. If a hexadecimal number is entered wrong, the return code defaults to “0.”
Code
0
1
Description
Good status, transaction complete
Bad status, transaction incomplete
328 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Example of Scan Bar Code Parameters
The following example and chart show data for Scan Bar Code parameters.
Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.
Column 1 Column 11 Column 23 Column 36
b#S07F32012211120012080108080bbbbbbbb
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
4
5
2
3
Column Character Description
1 b This column typically contains a space.
#
S
0
7
Extended command.
Scan Bar Code Parameter command
No Control Byte 1 options are returned
[ENTER] key terminates all scans, 12-volt laser is enabled,
Mod 10 Check Digit
Bar code type is returned and concatenated 6
7–8
9–10
11
F
32
01
2
Maximum length is 32 characters
Minimum length is 1 character
Decode UPC System 0
2
1
1
1
2
0
0
1
EAN is enabled
Encoded code 39 is enabled
Plessey is enabled
Mod 10 first digit is checked
ABC Codabar is enabled
Code 11 is disabled
Code 93 is disabled
Code 128 is enabled
20 2
21–22 08
23–24 01
25–26 08
27–28 08
29 0
30–31 bb
32–33 bb
34–35 bb
36–37 bb
Straight 2 of 5 is enabled
Straight 2 of 5 maximum length is 8
Straight 2 of 5 minimum length is 1
Straight 2 of 5 1st fixed length is 8
Straight 2 of 5 2nd fixed length is 8
Interleaved 2 of 5 is disabled
No change from current setting
No change from current setting
No change from current setting
No change from current setting
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
329
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Get Optical Inputs (#I)
Note: This extended command is supported on 248X Terminals only.
The Get Optical Inputs extended command returns a value representing the state of all four optical inputs. This value is represented by an ASCII character in the A–P range. If the ASCII value of the letter “A” is subtracted from the value returned, the result will be a number from 0 to 15, representing the state of the four inputs by bit positions: bit 0 is the optical input 1; bit 1 is the optical input 2; etc. If a bit is “0” (or off), then the input is off. If a bit is “1” (or on), then that input is on. The following table itemizes all possible combinations.
L
M
N
O
P
J
K
I
H
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
Get Optical Input Returned Values
Value Returned Optical Inputs: 1 2 3 4
Off Off Off Off
On Off Off Off
Off On Off Off
On On Off Off
Off Off On Off
On Off On Off
Off On On Off
On On On Off
Off Off Off On
On Off Off On
Off On Off On
On On Off On
Off Off On On
On Off On On
Off On On On
On On On On
Line 1, Columns 2 and 3, contains the extended command “#I”. Line 2,
Column 1, receives the returned data in the following format, where “X” is the return value:
\\0X<cr>
Line 24, Column 1, has the return status field. The status value returned here will be “0” (the character for zero, not the value zero) for a good status, indicating that the transaction is complete and without error. An error will occur if this command is attempted from the wrong type of terminal.
However, no error is detected when you have a 248X Terminal without terminal blocks. The status value returned when an error occurs is “1” (the character, not the value).
330 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Relay (Set, Reset, Read) Commands (#R)
Note: These extended commands are supported on 248X Terminals only.
There are three relay commands: Set, Reset and Read. All three use the same extended command “#R” followed by two numeric characters. The first character is the relay number and the second is a command byte. The relay number can be “1”, “2”, “3” or “4”, since there are four relays in a
248X Terminal equipped with terminal blocks. Also, the relay number can be “5” when you want to choose all four relays at once. The command byte will be “0” for Reset, “1” for Set, and “2” for Read.
Each Set and Reset command includes a Read, which provides verification that the chosen operation was successful. The Read command returns a value represented by an ASCII character in the A–P range. If the ASCII value of the letter “A” is subtracted from the value returned, the result will be a number from 0 to 15, representing the state of the four relays by bit positions: bit 0 is relay 1; bit 1 is relay 2; etc. If a bit is “0,” that relay is reset (or off); if “1,” it is set (or on).
If you Set, Reset or Read a single relay, the value returned represents only the state of that relay, and not the state of the other three relays. If all four relays are Set, Reset, or Read as a group, the value returned represents all relays. The following table itemizes all possible combinations:
Relay Commands Returned Values
K
L
M
N
J
F
G
I
H
O
P
Value Returned
A
B
C
D
E
Optical Inputs: 1 2 3 4
Off Off Off Off
On Off Off Off
Off On Off Off
On On Off Off
Off Off On Off
On Off On Off
Off On On Off
On On On Off
Off Off Off On
On Off Off On
Off On Off On
On On Off On
Off Off On On
On Off On On
Off On On On
On On On On
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
331
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Line 1, Columns 2 and 3, contains the extended command “#R”. Line 2,
Column 1, receives the returned data in the following format, where “X” is the return value:
//1801f1\X0\<cr>
Line 24, Column 1, has the return status field. The status value returned here will be “0” (the character for zero, not the value zero) for a good status, indicating that the transaction is complete and without error. An error will occur if this command is attempted from the wrong type of terminal.
However, no error is detected when you have a 248X Terminal without terminal blocks. The status value returned when an error occurs is “1” (the character, not the value).
332 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Magnetic Card Reader (#M)
Note: The Magnetic Card Reader (#M) command for Magnetic Card
Reader support is included in software build versions 7.12 and greater.
On the following Intermec printers, you can access the Magnetic Card
Reader from the host by sending an extended #M command to the TE
2000 application.
S 782T CR
S PW40 with CR
S 6808 CR
The Magnetic Card Reader extended command is supported for 3270,
5250, and VT/ANSI terminal emulations but not the Native terminal emulation. 3270 and 5250 terminal emulations require an input field to hold the card data. Data beyond the size of the field will be discarded.
When the 700 Series Computer with the TE 2000 application receives the
Magnetic Card Reader (#M) command, the display will show:
Please SWIPE Card
NOW!
(Press any key) to cancel.)
The operator should then swipe the card through the reader to cancel the process. The card reader data buffer is cleared just after displaying the waiting message, thus do not swipe the card until prompted by the display.
Pressing a key instead of swiping a card will cancel the process (see return
code “K” on the next page).
Extended Command Syntax
The Magnetic Card Reader extended command syntax is in the #Mttddd format.
Magnetic Card Reader Options — Line 1, Columns 2–8
Column Description
2 Extended command
3
4–5
Magnetic Card Reader command
Timeout
6–8 Maximum characters to accept
Character
#
M
01–99=2-digit data receive timeout in seconds. De-
fault is 30 seconds when “tt” has two blank characters.
001–250=Limit of maximum characters to accept.
Default is 250 when “ddd” has three blank characters.
Data characters received past the maximum are discarded. For 3270 and 5250 emulation, data characters past the input field size are discarded.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
333
Chapter 7
—
Extended Commands
Return Codes for Magnetic Card Reader
The return code is the status sent to the host computer; the code indicates if the extended command was successful. The terminal returns data and the extended command’s status to the host computer in the
\\X<CR>
format. X is the return code listed in the following chart.
Code Description
6
9
0
1
C
F
K
P
T
Good status, transaction complete.
Not enough memory for card data buffer.
No 3270 or 5250 input field available to hold the magnetic card data.
Incorrect setting for maximum characters to receive.
Incorrect setting for timeout value.
Timeout error, no data.
Key pressed to abort card read.
Communication with the Magnetic Card Reader failed, check cabling, reader power, no data.
OK, the data is returned, but is truncated by the lesser of the input field size
(for 3270 and 5250) or “ddd.”
#M will return the data in the following format:
”{T1:” <Track 1> ”|T2:” <Track 2> ”|T3:” <Track 3> ”}” where <Track n> is:
S 0 to 81 alphanumeric data characters for Track 1.
S 0 to 42 numeric data digits for Track 2.
S 0 to 109 alphanumeric or numeric data characters (depending on ISO or
AAMVA conformance) for Track 3.
Note: If the track data is “B,” then the track was not read. An “N” means the track is not on the magnetic card.
The maximum possible characters is 245.
Magnetic Card Reader CAB File
For the Magnetic Card Reader to work, the MAGCARD.CAB file must be installed (which installs and registers the MAGCARD.DLL file).
Contact your Intermec representative to get this file, then install this file in your 700 Series Computer. The TE 2000 application only looks for the
MAGCARD.DLL file when it gets a Magnetic Card Reader (#M) extended command from the host.
334 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
A
Bar Code Scanning
This appendix lists bar code labels for TE 2000 5250 commands and functions. It also contains Encoded Code 39 key press sequences.
Note: To scan the bar code labels, configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode (the default mode of operation).
Note: For the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X Terminal, configure the mode through the TRAKKER Antares
®
2400 Menu System.
See the terminal’s user manual for help.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
335
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
DK, Display Column Spacing
The spacing parameters define the number of pixels to be added between each row or column of characters. Note that font arrays have one or two lines built in for character separation.
DK<param1><param2><param3> where:
S param1 represents the font type and is one character
S param2 represents column spacing and is two characters
S param3 represents row spacing and is two characters
2415 and 2425 Terminal Displays
Below are the examples that apply to the 2415 and 2425 Terminal displays:
10 Columns
10 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK20000*
*$+DK20000*
12 Columns
12 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK90116*
*$+DK90116*
12 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK90105*
*$+DK90105*
12 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK90100*
*$+DK90100*
12 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK80502*
*$+DK80502*
336
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
12 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK80500*
*$+DK80500*
12 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70700*
*$+DK70700*
17 Columns
17 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK80122*
*$+DK80122”
17 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK80111*
*$+DK80111*
17 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK80106*
*$+DK80106*
17 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK80102*
*$+DK80102*
17 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK80100*
*$+DK80100*
17 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70300*
*$+DK70300*
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
337
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
338
17 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60400*
*$+DK60400*
20 Columns
20 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK10000*
*$+DK10000*
20 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK00000*
*$+DK00000*
22 Columns
22 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK70124*
*$+DK70124*
22 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK70113*
*$+DK70113*
22 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK70108*
*$+DK70108*
22 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK70104*
*$+DK70104*
22 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK70102*
*$+DK70102*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
22 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70100*
*$+DK70100*
22 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60200*
*$+DK60200*
26 Columns
26 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK70024*
*$+DK70024*
26 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK70013*
*$+DK70013*
26 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK70008*
*$+DK70008*
26 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK70004*
*$+DK70004*
26 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK70002*
*$+DK70002*
26 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70000*
*$+DK70000*
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
339
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
26 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60100*
*$+DK60100*
32 Columns
32 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60000*
*$+DK60000*
2435A Terminal Display
Below are the examples that apply to the 2435A Terminal display:
9 or 10 Columns
Note: For 2435A Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.60 or greater and TE 2000 application version 7.10 or greater, if icons are enabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the 9 columns x 8 rows bar code. If the icons are disabled in the firmware, then the 2435A
Terminal uses the 10 columns x 8 rows bar code.
9 Columns
9 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK20016*
*$+DK20016*
9 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK20005*
*$+DK20005*
9 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK20000*
*$+DK20000*
340
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
10 Columns
10 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK20016*
*$+DK20016*
10 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK20005*
*$+DK20005*
10 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK20000*
*$+DK20000*
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
12 Columns
12 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK90116*
*$+DK90116*
12 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK90105*
*$+DK90105*
12 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK90100*
*$+DK90100*
12 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK80502*
*$+DK80502*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
341
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
12 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK80500*
*$+DK80500*
12 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70700*
*$+DK70700*
17 Columns
17 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK80122*
*$+DK80122*
17 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK80111*
*$+DK80111*
17 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK80106*
*$+DK80106*
17 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK80102*
*$+DK80102*
17 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK80100*
*$+DK80100*
17 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70300*
*$+DK70300*
342
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
17 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60400*
*$+DK60400*
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
19 or 20 Columns
Note: For 2435A Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.60 or greater and TE 2000 application version 7.10 or greater, if icons are enabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the 19 columns x 8 rows bar code. If the icons are disabled in the firmware, then the 2435A
Terminal uses the 20 columns x 8 rows bar code.
19 Columns
19 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK10000*
*$+DK10000*
19 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK00000*
*$+DK00000*
20 Columns
20 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK10000*
*$+DK10000*
20 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK00000*
*$+DK00000*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
343
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
22 Columns
22 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK70124*
*$+DK70124*
22 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK70113*
*$+DK70113*
22 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK70108*
*$DK70108*
22 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK70104*
*$+DK70104*
22 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK70102*
*$+DK70102*
22 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70100*
*$+DK70100*
22 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60200*
*$+DK60200*
344
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
26 Columns
26 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK70024*
*$+DK70024*
26 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK70013*
*$+DK70013*
26 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK70008*
*$+DK70008*
26 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK70004*
*$+DK70004*
26 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK70002*
*$+DK70002*
26 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70000*
*$+DK70000*
26 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60100*
*$+DK60100*
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
345
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
346
31 or 32 Columns
31 Columns
31 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK60002*
*$+DK60002*
32 Columns
32 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK60002*
*$+DK60002*
Note: For 2435A Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.60 or greater and TE 2000 application version 7.15 or greater, if icons are enabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the 31 columns x 16 rows bar code. If the icons are disabled in the firmware, then the 2435A
Terminal uses the 32 columns x 16 rows bar code.
31 Columns
31 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDKB0000*
*$+DKB0000*
31 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60000*
*$+DK60000*
32 Columns
32 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDKB0000*
*$+DKB0000*
32 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60000*
*$+DK60000*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
2455 Terminal Display
Note: The following bar codes are for 2455 Terminals with Terminal
Emulation version 6.73 or greater and TE 2000 application version
7.15.09, 7.15.77, or greater.
Below are the examples that apply to the 2455 Terminal display:
20 Columns
20 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK21509*
*$+DK21509*
20 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK21500*
*$+DK21500*
20 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDKC2000*
*$+DKC2000*
33 Columns
33 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK20309*
*$+DK20309*
33 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK20300*
*$+DK20300*
33 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDKC0700*
*$+DKC0700*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
347
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
40 Columns
40 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK20009*
*$+DK200009*
40 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK20000*
*$+DK20000*
40 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDKC0400*
*$+DKC0400*
53 Columns
53 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK90000*
*$+DK90000*
53 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDKC0000*
*$+DKC0000*
80 Columns
80 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK10000*
*$+DK10000*
80 columns x 20 rows
*/D/KDK80000*
*$+DK80000*
348
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
80 columns x 25 rows
*/D/KDK00000*
*$+DK00000*
2475 and 248X Terminal Displays
Below are the examples that apply to the 2475 and 248X Terminal displays:
10 Columns
10 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK20000*
*$+DK20000*
12 Columns
12 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK90116*
*$+DK90116*
12 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK90105*
*$+DK90105*
12 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK90100*
*$+DK90100*
12 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK80502*
*$+DK80502*
12 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK80500*
*$+DK80500*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
349
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
12 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70700*
*$+DK70700*
17 Columns
17 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK80122*
*$+DK80122*
17 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK80111*
*$+DK80111*
17 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK80106*
*$+DK80106*
17 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK80102*
*$+DK80102*
17 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK80100*
*$+DK80100*
17 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70300*
*$+DK70300*
17 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60400*
*$+DK60400*
350
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
20 Columns
20 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK10000*
*$+DK10000*
20 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK20000*
*$+DK20000*
20 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK00000*
*$+DK0000*
22 Columns
22 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK70124*
*$+DK70124*
22 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK70113*
*$+DK70113*
22 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK70108*
*$+DK70108*
22 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK70104*
*$+DK70104*
22 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK70102*
*$+DK70102*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
351
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
22 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70100*
*$+DK70100*
22 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60200*
*$+DK60200*
26 Columns
26 columns x 4 rows
*/D/KDK70024*
*$+DK70024*
26 columns x 6 rows
*/D/KDK70013*
*$+DK70013*
26 columns x 8 rows
*/D/KDK70008*
*$+DK70008*
26 columns x 10 rows
*/D/KDK70004*
*$+DK70004*
26 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK90000*
*$+DK90000*
26 columns x 16 rows
*/D/KDK70000*
*$+DK70000*
352
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
26 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60100*
*$+DK60100*
32 Columns
32 columns x 21 rows
*/D/KDK60000*
*$+DK60000*
40 Columns
40 columns x 12 rows
*/D/KDK10000*
*$+DK10000*
40 columns x 20 rows
*/D/KDK80000*
*$+DK80000*
40 columns x 25 rows
*/D/KDK00000*
*$+DK00000*
53 Columns
53 columns x 25 rows
*/D/KDK70000*
*$+DK70000*
64 Columns
64 columns x 25 rows
*/D/KDK60000*
*$+DK60000*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
353
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
Cursor Keys
Window/Viewport up (up one line)
*/EUP*
*%UP*
Window/Viewport down (down one line)
*/EDN*
*%DN*
Window/Viewport right (right one character)
*/ERT*
*%RT*
Window/Viewport left (left one character)
*/ELF*
*%LF*
Paging Keys
354
Page up
*/EPGUP*
*%PGUP*
Page down
*/EPGDN*
*%PGDN*
Page right
*/EPGRT*
*%PGRT*
Page left
*/EPGLT*
*%PGLT*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Tab Keys
Back Tab
*/EBTAB*
*%BTAB*
Forward Tab
*%TAB*
AID-Generating Keys
Clear
*/ECLR*
*%CLR*
Enter/Rec Adv
*%CR*
F1
*/EF1*
*%F1*
F2
*/EF2*
*%F2*
F3
*/EF3*
*%F3*
F4
*/EF4*
*%F4*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
355
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
356
F5
*/EF5*
*%F5*
F6
*/EF6*
*%F6*
F7
*/EF7*
*%F7*
F8
*/EF8*
*%F8*
F9
*/EF9*
*%F9*
F10
*/EF10*
*%F10*
F11
*/EF11*
*%F11*
F12
*/EF12*
*%F12*
F13
*/EF13*
*%F13*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
F14
*/EF14*
*%F14*
F15
*/EF15*
*%F15*
F16
*/EF16*
*%F16*
F17
*/EF17*
*%F17*
F18
*/EF18*
*%F18*
F19
*/EF19*
*%F19*
F20
*/EF20*
*%F20*
F21
*/EF21*
*%F21*
F22
*/EF22*
*%F22*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
357
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
F23
*/EF23*
*%F23*
F24
*/EF24*
*%F24*
Help (nonerror state)
*/EHELP*
*%HELP*
*/EPRINT*
*%PRINT*
Record Backspace (Home)
*/EH+M*
*%Hm*
Roll Down
*/ERODN*
*%RODN*
Roll Up
*/EROUP*
*%ROUP*
Field Exit Key
Field Exit
*/EFLDX*
*%FLDX*
358
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Signal Keys
Attn
*/EATTN*
*%ATTN*
Help (from error state)
*/EHELP*
*%HELP*
Special Control Keys
Delete (Del)
*/EDEL*
*%DEL*
Erase Input
*/EEINP*
*%EINP*
Error Reset
*/EERR*
*%ERR*
Hex
*/EHEX*
*%HEX*
Home
*/EH+M*
*%Hm*
Insert
*/EINS*
*%INS*
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
359
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
Special Host Key
Sys Req
*/ESYSR*
*%SYSR*
5250 Additional Functions
Not (¬)
*/ENOT*
*%NOT*
Cent (¢)
*/ECENT*
*%CENT*
Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)
*/EDUP*
*%DUP*
Field-
*/EFLD/M*
*%FLD-*
Field+
*/EFLD/K*
*%FLD+*
Field Mark
*/EFM*
*%FM*
New Line
*/ENL*
*%NL*
360
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
TE configuration menus
*/ETECFG*
*%TECFG*
Auto-Login Restart
Auto-Login Restart
*/EALRS*
*%ALRS*
Encoded Code 39
The following table lists escape characters and key press sequences for Encoded Code 39. The “(t)” in the table indicates a terminating key. Any bar code data following this key code is ignored. Therefore, locate the “t” sequences only at the end of the bar code. If you attempt to use an invalid sequence (termed “reserved” in the table) the terminal emits a beep and the data stream is flushed.
Key Press Sequences for Encoded Code 39
Sequence Key Sequence Key
$M
$N
$O
$P
$H
$I
$J
$K
$L
$Q
$R
$D
$E
$F
$G
$A
$B
$C
New Line
Del
Forward Tab
+A
+B
+C
Forward Tab +D
Back Tab +E
Roll
↑ (Roll up/Page down) +F
Roll
↓ (Roll down/Page up) +G
Backspace
Field+
+H
+I
Field–
Insert
Home
Enter /Rec Adv (t)
Field Exit
Erase Input
Attn
F1 (t)
F2 (t)
+J
+K
+L
+M
+N
+O
+P
+Q
+R r q o p m n l j k i h f g d e a b c
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
361
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
%S
%T
%U
%V
%O
%P
%Q
%R
%J
%K
%L
%M
%N
%F
%G
%H
%I
%W
%X
%Y
%Z
$Z
%A
%B
%C
%D
%E
Sequence
$S
$T
$U
$V
$W
$X
$Y
Key Press Sequences for Encoded Code 39 (continued)
Key
F3 (t)
F4 (t)
F5 (t)
F6 (t)
F7 (t)
F8 (t)
F9 (t)
F10 (t)
Clear
F11 (t)
F12 (t)
Error Reset
Help
; (semicolon)
< (less than)
= (equal)
> (greater than)
? (question mark)
¬ (not symbol)
\ (backslash)
¢ (cent)
| (piping symbol)
_ (underscore)
{ (left brace)
| (vertical bar)
} (right brace)
~ (tilde)
Del
Dup
@ (at) i (grave accent)
Sys Req
F13 (t)
/S
/T
/U
/V
/O
/P
/Q
/R
/W
/X
/Y
/Z
/J
/K
/L
/M
/N
/F
/G
/H
/I
/C
/D
/E
+Z
/A
/B
Sequence
+S
+T
+U
+V
+W
+X
+Y t u v w x y s
Key
z
! (exclamation mark)
” (double quote)
# (pound)
$ (dollar)
% (percent)
& (ampersand)
’ (single quote)
( (left parenthesis)
) (right parenthesis)
* (asterisk)
+ (plus)
, (comma)
– (minus)
F14 (t)
/ (forward slash)
F15 (t)
F16 (t)
F17 (t)
F18 (t)
F19 (t)
F20 (t)
F21 (t)
F22 (t)
F23 (t)
F24 (t)
: (colon)
362
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
Terminating Keys
Terminating keys are the nonprintable ASCII sequences and action keys.
When the terminal encounters them in a bar code, an action is taken, and the terminal sends the data in the buffer to the host computer. Terminating keys should appear only at the end of the bar code. If they are located in the middle of a bar code, they are executed normally, but the data following them in the bar code is ignored. Terminating keys cause a terminal-to-base station transmission. The terminal ignores data in the bar code buffer following these keys once a transmission takes place.
For example, the terminal interprets the following sequence:
123$V456
as
123F6
The terminal does not send “456” to the host computer, because it follows terminating key F6.
ASCII sequences can be used any time before a terminating key. For example, the terminal interprets
+H+E+L+L+O$M
as
hello<Enter>
Escape Characters
The four escape characters in the previous table yield a 5250 data stream key press equivalent when followed by another character. The escape characters are: $ (dollar sign)
% (percent)
+ (plus)
/ (forward slash)
For example:
S If a bar code contains the sequence “%U” somewhere within it, the terminal converts this sequence to an [ENTER] key and processes it as soon as encountered in the scanning buffer.
S “+B” is converted to the lower case “b.”
S “%B” is converted to an F11 key press.
If you want the Encoded Code 39 option but the bar codes to be scanned already contain the “$,” “%,” “+,” or “/,” character, then each place where these characters occur must be expanded to a special “/” sequence:
S Every bar code where the “$” is maintained must be expanded to a “/D” sequence.
S Percent signs (%) must be expanded to “/E”.
S Forward slashes (/) must be expanded to the letter “/O”.
S Plus signs (+) must be expanded to “/K”.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
363
Appendix A
—
Bar Code Scanning
364
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
B
Bar Code Symbologies
This appendix contains a brief explanation of each bar code symbology that the TE 2000 5250 application decodes. It explains some of the general characteristics and uses of these bar code types.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
365
Appendix B
—
Bar Code Symbologies
Bar Code Algorithms
You can enable specific bar code algorithms using the setup menus or the host computer. Once the computer correctly decodes a bar code, the computer encodes data with descriptive information about the symbol. Response time is improved by limiting the computer to bar codes being used.
Bar Code Data String Formats
Bar Code
Type Character
“S”
“P”
“Q”
“R”
“J”
“0”
“1”
“2”
“3”
“4”
“5”
“6”
“7”
“8”
“9”
“:” (colon)
“;” (semicolon)
“<” (less than)
“=” (equal sign)
“>” (greater than)
“@” (ampersand)
Symbology Type
UPC short (UPC-E)
EAN short (EAN-8)
UPC long (UPC-A)
EAN long (EAN-13)
UPC short add-on 2
EAN short add-on 2
UPC long add-on 2
EAN long add-on 2
UPC short add-on 5
EAN short add-on 5
UPC long add-on 5
EAN long add-on 5
Interleaved 2 of 5
Standard 2 of 5
Plessey
Codabar
Code 11
Code 39
Extended Code 39
Code 93
Code 128
Data Format
nddddddc fndddddc nddddddddddc fnddddddddddc nddddddcaa fndddddcaa nddddddddddcaa fnddddddddddcaa nddddddcaaaaa fndddddcaaaaa nddddddddddcaaaaa fnddddddddddcaaaaa d......d
d......d
d......dc
sd....ds
d......d
d......d
d......d
d......d
d......d
Data Length
10
10
14
8
8
12
13
15
13
13
17
18
Scan device dependent
Scan device dependent
Scan device dependent
Scan device dependent
Scan device dependent
Scan device dependent
Scan device dependent
Scan device dependent
Scan device dependent
Note: These bar code data definitions apply to the Data Format column in the previous table: a Add-on code digits c Check digits d Bar code digits f EAN flag 1 characters n Number system digits s Start and stop digits
If MOD 10 or MOD 11 check digits are enabled, the digit falls at the end of a bar code data string. Each check digit enabled extends the bar code data string length by one character.
366
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix B
—
Bar Code Symbologies
The TE 2000 5250 application recognizes eleven of the most widely used bar code symbologies. With bar code symbologies, like languages, there are many different types. A bar code symbology provides the required flexibility for a particular inventory tracking system.
A symbology may be for particular industries, such as food and beverage, automotive, railroad, or aircraft. Some of these industries have established their own bar code symbology because other symbologies did not meet their needs.
Without going into great detail on the bar code structure, note that no two products use the same bar code. Each product gets a unique bar code.
Industries that use a particular type of bar code symbology have formed regulating committees or are members of national institutes that issue and keep track of bar codes. This ensures that each organization that contributes to a particular industry conforms to its standard. Without some form of governing body, bar coding would not work.
S UPC (Universal Product Code) with/without add-ons
S EAN (European Article Numbering Code) with/without add-ons
S Codabar
S C11 (Code 11)
S C39 (Code 39)
S C93 (Code 93)
S C128 (Code 128)
S I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code)
S S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5)
S Plessey
S MSI (a variant of Plessey)
UPC
The UPC (Universal Product Code) is the symbology used throughout the grocery and retail industries. This bar code symbology contains two pieces of numerical information encoded on the bar code, producer identification, and product identification information.
The UPC symbol is 12 characters long. The first character of the UPC symbol is a number system character, such as “0” for grocery items and “3” for drug- and health-related items.
The UPC symbology is for retail environments such as grocery stores, convenience stores, and general merchandise stores.
Some retail items are so small that a standard UPC bar code cannot fit on the packaging. When this occurs there is a permitted shorter version of the
UPC symbology, referred to as UPC-E. UPC-E is six characters long
(eight including number system and check digit), approximately half the size of a standard UPC bar code.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
367
Appendix B
—
Bar Code Symbologies
EAN
EAN (European Article Numbering) symbology is similar to UPC symbology, except that it contains 13 characters and uses the first two to identify countries.
The EAN symbology is used throughout most of Europe in the retail environment. Although similar to UPC symbology, the two are not interchangeable.
Codabar
Codabar was for retail price-labeling systems. Today it is widely accepted by libraries, medical industries, and photo finishing services.
Codabar is a discrete, self-checking code with each character represented by a stand-alone group of four bars and three intervening spaces.
Four different start or stop characters get defined and designated “a”, “b”,
“c”, and “d”. These start and stop characters are constructed using one wide bar and two wide spaces. A complete Codabar symbol begins with one of the start or stop characters followed by some number of data characters and ending in one of the start or stop characters.
Any of the start or stop characters may be used on either end of the symbol. It is possible to use the 16 unique start or stop combinations to identify label type or other information.
Since Codabar is variable-length, discrete, and self-checking, it is a versatile symbology. The width of space between characters is not critical and may vary significantly within the same symbol. The character set consists of “0” through “9”, “-”, “$”, “:”, “/”, “.”, and “+”.
The specific dimensions for bars and spaces in Codabar optimize performance of certain early printing and reading equipment. Codabar has 18 different dimensions for bar and space widths. So many different dimensions often result in labels printed out of specification and cause Codabar printing equipment to be more expensive.
Code 11
368
Code 11 satisfies the requirements for a very high density, discrete numeric bar code. The name Code 11 derives from 11 different data characters that can be represented, in addition to a start or stop character.
The character set includes the 10 digits and the dash symbol. Each character is represented by a stand-alone group of three bars and two intervening spaces. Although Code 11 is discrete, it is not self-checking. A single printing defect can transpose one character into another valid character. One or two check digits obtain data security.
The specifications for Code 11 suggest that this code should have a narrow element width of 7.5 mils. This results in an information density of 15 characters per inch.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix B
—
Bar Code Symbologies
Code 39
Code 39 (C39) is the most widely used symbology among the industrial bar codes. Most major companies, trade associations, and the federal government find this code to fit their needs. The main feature of this symbology is the ability to encode messages using the full alphanumeric character set, seven special characters, and ASCII characters.
Programming for this symbology can be for any length that the application requires. The application program handles symbology that is at least one character but no more than 32 characters in length.
When programming the computer for Code 39, it is important to set the symbology limit as close as possible (minimum and maximum bar code lengths being scanned). Doing so keeps the computer bar code processing time to a minimum and conserves battery power.
Bar code readers can respond to Uniform Symbology Specification symbols in non-standard ways for particular applications. These methods are not for general applications, because of the extra programming required.
Code 39 Full ASCII is one example of non-standard code.
Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation)
If the first data character of a symbol is a space, the reader may be programmed to append the information contained in the remainder of the symbol to a storage buffer. This operation continues for all successive symbols that contain a leading space, with messages being added to the end of previously stored ones. When a message is read which does not contain a leading space, the contents are appended to the buffer, the entire buffer is transmitted, and the buffer is cleared.
Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII)
If the bar code reader is programmed for the task, the entire ASCII character set (128 characters) could be coded. This is done using two character sequences made up of one of the symbols (“$”,“.”,“%”,“/”) followed by one of the 26 letters.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
369
Appendix B
—
Bar Code Symbologies
Code 93
The introduction of Code 93 provided a higher density alphanumeric symbology designed to supplement Code 39. The set of data characters in
Code 93 is identical with that offered with Code 39. Each character consists of nine modules arranged into three bars and three spaces.
Code 93 uses 48 of the 56 possible combinations. One of these characters, represented by a square, is reserved for a start or stop character, four are used for control characters, and the remaining 43 data characters coincide with the Code 39 character set. An additional single module termination bar after the stop character concludes the final space.
Code 93 is a variable length, continuous code that is not self-checking. Bar and spaces widths may be one, two, three, or four modules wide. Its structure uses edge-to-similar-edge decoding. This makes the bar code immune to uniform ink spread, which allows liberal bar width tolerances.
Code 93 uses two check characters. Its supporters believes this makes it the highest density alphanumeric bar code. The dual check digit scheme provides for high data integrity. All substitution errors in a single character are detected for any message length.
Code 128
370
Code 128 (C128) is one of the newest symbologies used by the retail and manufacturing industries. It responds to the need for a compact alphanumeric bar code symbol that could encode complex product identification.
The fundamental requirement called for a symbology capable of being printed by existing data processing printers (primarily dot-matrix printers) that produce daily, work-in-progress, job, and product traceability documents. The ability to print identification messages between 10 and 32 characters long, on existing forms and labels deemed an important requirement.
Code 128 uniquely addresses this need as the most compact, complete, alphanumeric symbology available.
Additionally, the Code 128 design with geometric features, improves scanner read performance, does self-checking, and provides data message management function codes.
Code 128 encodes the complete set of 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements. Code 128 contains a variable-length symbology and the ability to link one message to another for composite message transmission. Code 128, being a double-density field, provides two numeric values in a single character.
Code 128 follows the general bar code format of start zone, data, check digit, stop code, and quiet zone. An absolute minimum bar or space dimension of nine mils (0.010 inch minimum nominal ± 0.001 inch tolerance) must be maintained.
Characters in Code 128 consist of three bars and three spaces so that the total character set includes three different start characters and a stop character.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix B
—
Bar Code Symbologies
UCC/EAN-128 Shipping Container Labeling is a versatile tool that can ease movement of products and information. The Shipping Container Labeling bar code can take any form and usually has meaning only within the company or facility where applied.
Because this random data can get mistaken later for an industry standard code format, the UCC and EAN chose a symbology uniquely identified from these other bar codes. This standard is for maximum flexibility, to handle the diversity of distribution in global markets by cost efficiency.
The UCC/EAN-128 Container Labeling specification calls for a FUNC1 to immediately follow the bar code’s start character. FUNC1 also follows any variable-length application field. The specification also calls for the computer to send “]C1” for the first FUNC1. The specification requires that the computer send a “<GS>” (hex 1D) for subsequent FUNC1 codes in the bar code.
Because “<GS>” is not compatible with computer emulation data streams, the Uniform Code Council has been asked to change the specification.
This change is made to send the same three character sequence “]C1” to identify the embedded FUNC1 codes.
This implementation should provide for clean application coding by identifying the same sequences for the same scanned codes. If the communication of Norand bar code types is enabled, the Shipping Container Label codes precede with a “J”. These strings will appear on the computer display. The application may have to allow for strings longer than 48 characters (maximum length indicated in the specification). Actual length variance depends on the number of variable-length data fields. Allowing for 60 characters should be sufficient. Within the Code 128 specification, the computer can link bar codes together. If this is to happen, allow for more characters (computer limit is 100 characters).
The Application Identifier Standard, that is part of the UCC/EAN Shipping Label concept, complements, rather than replaces, other UCC/EAN standards. Most UCC/EAN standards primarily identify products.
Several industries expressed the need to standardize more than product identification. The UCC/EAN Code 128 Application Identifier Standard supplies this tool. The standard adds versatility for inter-enterprise exchanges of perishability dating, lot and batch identification, units of use measure, location codes, and several other information attributes.
For more detailed information on Code 128 UCC/EAN Shipping Label bar code and Application Identifier Standard, refer to the UCC/EAN-128
Application Identifier Standard specification.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
371
Appendix B
—
Bar Code Symbologies
I 2 of 5 (Interleaved)
I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code) is an all-numeric symbology, widely used for warehouse and heavy industrial applications. Its use has been particularly prevalent in the automobile industry. The I 2 of 5 symbology can be placed on smaller labels than what the standard UPC symbology requires.
I 2 of 5 also provides a little more flexibility on the type of material it can print on. Interleaved 2 of 5 Code has its name because of the way the bar code is configured.
I 2 of 5 bars and spaces both carry information. The bars represent the odd number position digits, while spaces represent the even number position digits. The two characters are interleaved as one. Messages encoded with this symbology have to use an even number of characters since two numeric characters always get interleaved together.
S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5)
The code S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5 Code) is designed primarily for:
S Warehouse inventory handling
S Identification of photo finishing envelopes
S Airline tickets
S Baggage and cargo handling
The code S 2 of 5 is simple and straightforward. All information is contained in the widths of the bars, with the spaces serving only to separate the individual bars.
Bars can either be wide or narrow, and the wide bars are usually three times the widths of the narrow bars. Spaces may be any reasonable width but are typically equal to the narrow bars. Narrow bars are identified as zero bits and wide bars as one bits.
Remember the code structure by associating the bar positions from left to right with weighting factors 1, 2, 4, 7, and parity. Exceptions to this rule are zero, start, and stop. This code is a discrete code, since the white spaces between the characters are not part of the code. Because the white spaces carry no information, their dimensions are not critical.
The S 2 of 5 code is self-checking, meaning a scanner passing through a printing void would detect the proper ratio of wide bars to total bars.
When the scanner spots an error, a non-read will occur.
372
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix B
—
Bar Code Symbologies
Plessey
Plessey finds its origin in the pulse width modulated (PWM) code developed in England. It is widely used for shelf markings in grocery stores.
Pulse width modulated codes represent each bit of information by a bar and space pair. A zero bit consists of a narrow bar followed by a wide space, while a one bit consists of a wide bar followed by a narrow space. It is mainly a numeric symbology (0–9) with six extra characters available for assigning any symbol or letter desired.
Plessey codes are not self-checking and employ a variety of check characters. Plessey employs a polynomial-based Cyclic Redundancy Check
(CRC). For start and stop characters, Plessey employs a 1101 and previously used a 0101.
This symbology is very limited about what information can be encoded. It is not considered for new applications.
MSI Code (Variant of Plessey)
In addition to Plessey characteristics, the MSI Code employs a Modulus
10 Check. For start and stop checks, MSI employs a single bit pair of 1 as a start symbol and a single bit pair of 0 as a stop symbol. MSI reverses the
1-2-4-8 BCD pattern for bit pair weighting to 8-6-2-1.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
373
Appendix B
—
Bar Code Symbologies
374
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
C
Conversion Tables
This appendix contains decimal-to-hex and binary-to-EBCDIC conversion tables.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
375
Appendix C
—
Conversion Tables
Decimal to Hexadecimal
Following are decimal and hexadecimal values for nondisplayable ASCII and displayable graphic characters.
Hex
1E
1F
20
21
22
1A
1B
1C
1D
23
24
25
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
0E
0F
10
11
0A
0B
0C
0D
04
05
06
07
08
09
00
01
02
03
Decimal
30
31
32
33
34
26
27
28
29
35
36
37
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
6
7
8
9
4
5
2
3
0
1
Decimal
68
69
70
71
72
64
65
66
67
73
74
75
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
42
43
44
45
46
47
38
39
40
41
Char.
RS
US
DP
”
!
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
#
$
%
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
Hex
44
45
46
47
48
40
41
42
43
49
4A
4B
3C
3D
3E
3F
38
39
3A
3B
34
35
36
37
30
311
32
33
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
26
27
28
29
Decimal
106
107
108
109
110
102
103
104
105
111
112
113
98
99
100
101
94
95
96
97
90
91
92
93
86
87
88
89
80
81
82
83
84
85
76
77
78
79
Char.
F
G
H
D
E
B
C
@
A
J
I
K
>
?
<
=
;
:
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
-
,
/
.
*
+
)
(
&
’
Hex
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
66
67
68
69
6F
70
71
62
63
64
65
5E
5F
60
61
5A
5B
5C
5D
56
57
58
59
50
51
52
53
54
55
4C
4D
4E
4F
Char.
l m n k j h i f g o p q d e b c a
‘
^
_
]
\
Z
[
V
W
X
Y
T
U
R
S
P
Q
L
M
N
O
376
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix C
—
Conversion Tables
Hex
86
87
88
89
82
83
84
85
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
7E
7F
80
81
7A
7B
7C
7D
76
77
78
79
72
74
74
75
93
94
95
96
8F
90
91
92
97
98
99
9A
Decimal
134
135
136
137
130
131
132
133
138
139
140
141
142
126
127
128
129
122
123
124
125
118
119
120
121
114
115
116
117
147
148
149
150
143
144
145
146
151
152
153
154
Char.
}
|
{ z
~
DEL x y v w s r t u
Decimal
193
194
195
196
189
190
191
192
197
198
199
200
201
185
186
187
188
181
182
183
184
177
178
179
180
173
174
175
176
206
207
208
209
202
203
204
205
210
211
212
213
SS3
DCS
PU1
PU2
STS
CCH
MW
SPA
EPA
IND
NEL
SSA
ESA
HTS
HTJ
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
Hex
C1
C2
C3
C4
BD
BE
BF
C0
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
B9
BA
BB
BC
B5
B6
B7
B8
B1
B2
B3
B4
AD
AE
AF
B0
CE
CF
D0
D1
CA
CB
CC
CD
D2
D3
D4
D5 d
±
2
3
Char.
Decimal
244
245
246
247
240
241
242
243
236
237
238
239
232
233
234
235
252
253
254
255
248
249
250
251
î
í
Ë
ì
ï
É
Ê
Ç
È
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Á
Â
¿
À
Ó
Ô
Ñ
Ò
Õ
1
º
»
¼
½
µ
¶
·
Hex
F4
F5
F6
F7
F0
F1
F2
F3
EC
ED
EE
EF
E8
E9
EA
EB
FC
FD
FE
FF
F8
F9
FA
FB
Char.
ï
î
í
ì
ê
ë
è
é
ú
û
ø
ù
ü
ÿ
ö
Œ
ô
õ
ñ
ò
ó
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
377
Appendix C
—
Conversion Tables
Hex
A7
A8
A9
AA
A3
A4
A5
A6
AB
AC
9F
A0
A1
A2
9B
9C
9D
9E
Decimal
167
168
169
170
163
164
165
166
171
172
159
160
161
162
155
156
157
158
¥
¦
§
¤
E
ª
«
¡
¢
£
Char.
CSI
ST
OSC
PM
APC
Decimal
226
227
228
229
222
223
224
225
230
231
218
219
220
221
214
215
216
217
Hex
E2
E3
E4
E5
DE
DF
E0
E1
E6
E7
DA
DB
DC
DD
D6
D7
D8
D9
Char.
Ü
ÿ
ú
û
Ö
Œ
Ø
ù
ä
å
â
ã
æ
ç
ß
à
á
Decimal Hex Char.
378
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix C
—
Conversion Tables
Binary to EBCDIC
The following table includes binary to EBCDIC conversion values.
Bits 0–7
01 1010
01 1011
01 1100
01 1101
01 1110
01 1111
10 0000
10 0001
10 0010
10 0011
10 0100
10 0101
01 0010
01 0011
01 0100
01 0101
01 0110
01 0111
01 1000
01 1001
00 1010
00 1011
00 1100
00 1101
00 1110
00 1111
01 0000
01 0001
00 0000
00 0001
00 0010
00 0011
00 0100
00 0101
00 0110
00 0111
00 1000
00 1001
EBCDIC Code
5E
5F
60
61
E2
5A
5B
5C
5D
E3
E4
E5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D2
D3
D4
D5
4E
4F
50
D1
4A
4B
4C
4D
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
40
C1
C2
C3
Display Graphic
*
)
$
!
;
¬
—
T
U
S
/
V
O
P
Q
R
K
L
M
N
&
J
+
|
<
(
¢
.
<space>
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
379
Appendix C
—
Conversion Tables
EBCDIC Code
7B
7C
7D
7E
F7
F8
F9
7A
F3
F4
F5
F6
6F
F0
F1
F2
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
E6
E7
E8
E9
83
84
85
86
87
7F
80
81
82
8C
8D
8E
8F
88
89
8A
8B
Bits 0–7
11 0111
11 1000
11 1001
11 1010
11 1011
11 1100
11 1101
11 1110
10 1111
11 0000
11 0001
11 0010
11 0011
11 0100
11 0101
11 0110
10 0110
10 0111
10 1000
10 1001
10 1010
10 1011
10 1100
10 1101
10 1110
11 1111
1000 0000
1000 0001
1000 0010
1000 0011
1000 0100
1000 0101
1000 0110
1000 0111
1000 1000
1000 1001
1000 1010
1000 1011
1000 1100
1000 1101
1000 1110
1000 1111
380
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Display Graphic
’
=
#
@
”
9
:
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
?
0
W
X
Y
Z
EBCDIC
,
%
-
> e f g h i c d a b
Bits 0–7
1001 0000
1001 0001
1001 0010
1001 0011
1001 0100
1001 0101
1001 0110
1001 0111
1001 1000
1001 1001
1001 1010
1001 1011
1001 1110
1001 1101
1001 1110
1001 1111
1010 0000
1010 0001
1010 0010
1010 0011
1010 0100
1010 0101
1010 0110
1010 0111
1010 1000
1010 1000
EBCDIC Code
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
9D
9E
9F
A0
99
9A
9B
9C
94
95
96
97
98
90
91
92
93
Appendix C
—
Conversion Tables
Display Graphic
p q r n o l m k j u v w x z t s y
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
381
Appendix C
—
Conversion Tables
382
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
D
Terminal Font Set Table
Note: The Terminal Font Set table in this appendix applies to 6400,
5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60
Terminals. For the Terminal Font Set table for the 2415, 2425, 2435A,
2455, 2475, or 248X Terminals, refer to the terminal’s user manual.
6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and
CV60 Terminals use a font set that supports English and Western European languages, such as French, German, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish, and others. You can develop applications that display any character in the terminal font set. Depending on the type of keyboard, you can also enter many of the characters. For help, see Chapter 3, “Using the Terminal’s Key-
board.”
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
383
Appendix D
—
Terminal Font Set Table
384
The following table lists the characters you can display on the terminal. It also lists the decimal and hexadecimal index values.
Terminal Font Set
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Character
(“radio” annunciator)
Decimal
¨
õ
∅
—
Space
Ã
ã
Õ
|
ψ
∆
¤
"
A
X
§
(“communications loss” annunciator)
18
(5250 dup character)
19
(“input inhibited” annunciator)
(“message waiting” annunciator)
16
17
20
21
22
13
14
15
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
9
2
3
0
1
4
23
13
14
15
16
17
Hexadecimal
10
11
12
0D
0E
0F
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
00
01
02
03
04
Unused
Unused
→
(”transmit” annunciator)
←
(”receive” annunciator)
(“battery” annunciator)
Space
Y
Ý
27
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
1C
1D
1E
1F
18
19
1A
1B
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix D
—
Terminal Font Set Table
)
*
(
’
+
#
$
%
&
2
3
0
1
, (comma)
- (dash)
/
. (period)
4
5
6
7
8
9
: (colon)
; (semicolon)
< (less than)
= (equal sign)
> (greater than)
? (question mark)
@ (ampersand)
A
Terminal Font Set (continued)
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Character
!
Space
Decimal
59
60
61
62
63
55
56
57
58
64
65
52
53
54
48
49
50
51
44
44
46
47
39
40
41
42
43
35
36
37
38
32
33
34
Hexadecimal
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
37
38
39
3A
40
41
34
35
36
30
31
32
33
2C
2D
2E
2F
27
28
29
2A
2B
23
24
25
26
20
21
22
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
385
Appendix D
—
Terminal Font Set Table
Terminal Font Set (continued)
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Character
V
W
X
T
U
R
S b c
Y
Z
[ (left bracket)
\ (backslash)
‘
_
] (right bracket)
^ a
N
O
P
Q
K
L
J
I
M
E
F
G
H
B
C
D
Decimal
93
94
95
96
97
89
90
91
92
98
99
86
87
88
82
83
84
85
78
79
80
81
73
74
75
76
77
69
70
71
72
66
67
68
Hexadecimal
5D
5E
5F
60
61
59
5A
5B
5C
62
63
56
57
58
52
53
54
55
4E
4F
50
51
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
45
46
47
48
42
43
44
386
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix D
—
Terminal Font Set Table
â
ä
à
Ç
ü
é
Terminal Font Set (continued)
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Character
s r p q l k m n o j i g h f d e v w t u x y z
{ (left curly bracket)
¦
} (right curly bracket)
~
Decimal
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
112
113
114
115
107
108
109
110
111
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
Hexadecimal
78
79
7A
74
75
76
77
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
70
71
72
73
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
67
68
69
6A
64
65
66
128
129
130
131
132
133
83
84
85
80
81
82
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
387
Appendix D
—
Terminal Font Set Table
ª
º
ú
ñ
Ñ
í
ó
ƒ
á
Terminal Font Set (continued)
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Character
ö
ò
Æ
ô
Å
É
ì
Ä
æ
î
ï
ë
è
å
ç
ê
£
¥
Ü
¢
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Decimal
146
147
148
149
141
142
143
144
145
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
Hexadecimal
92
93
94
95
8D
8E
8F
90
91
89
8A
8B
8C
86
87
88
9A
9B
9C
96
97
98
99
9D
9E
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
A3
A4
A5
9F
A0
A1
A2
A6
A7
388
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix D
—
Terminal Font Set Table
e
‖
†
⊧
⊦
—
|
⊧
⊩
Terminal Font Set (continued)
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Character
¡
«
¿
⌐ (not symbol)
¬
½
¼
»
Decimal
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
Hexadecimal
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
177
178
B1
B2
186
187
188
189
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
198
199
200
210
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
BA
BB
BC
BD
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
C6
C7
C8
C9
C3
C4
C5
BE
BF
C0
C1
C2
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
389
Appendix D
—
Terminal Font Set Table
σ
µ
γ
Π
∑
σ
θ
‡
⎦
J
∝
β
▄
▌
▐
▀
Terminal Font Set (continued)
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Character Decimal
202
Hexadecimal
CA
203
204
CB
CC
=
205
206
207
208
CD
CE
CF
D0
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
E2
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
E6
E7
E8
E9
E3
E4
E5
390
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Appendix D
—
Terminal Font Set Table
H
@
⎧
⎭
÷
≈
_
∞
ø
≡
±
≥
≤ d
Terminal Font Set (continued)
(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)
Character
Ω
Decimal
234
235
Hexadecimal
EA
EB
J
Space
240
241
242
243
244
245
236
237
238
239
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
F3
F4
F5
F0
F1
F2
EC
ED
EE
EF
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
391
Appendix D
—
Terminal Font Set Table
392
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
I
Index
The General Index covers all topics. Those in italics are figures, those in bold are tables.
The Files Index is to assist you in locating descriptions for device drivers, applications, utilities, batch files, or other files within this publication.
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
393
Index
General Index
Symbols
. (period)
700 series, 68 key remapping code, 236
, (comma)
700 series, 68 encoded sequence, 362 key remapping code, 236
# (pound), 183
#F (Transmit and Receive) extended command, 300
#G (Receive Only) extended command, 310
#M (Magnetic) card reader operation, 333
#P (Transmit Only) extended command, 306
#R (Relay) extended commands, Set, Reset, Read, 331
#I (Get Optical Inputs) extended command, 330
#S (Scan) extended command, 318
#T (Tone) extended command, 317
#V (Return Version) extended command, 316
$ (escape sequence), 361, 363
% (escape sequence), 362, 363
+ (escape sequence), 363
- (hyphen), 700 series, 68
/ (escape sequence), 362, 363
_ (underscore), 700 series, 68
¢ (Cent sign)
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 21
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5055, 49
59XX, 53
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86
¢ (cent sign), description, 15
Numbers
11XX terminal
5250 additional functions, 62
AID-generating keys, 61
Auto-Login Restart, 62 cursor keys, 59 display annunciators, 92 alphabetic character shift mode, 93 battery is charging, 93 communication loss, 92 input inhibited, 92 insert mode, 93 laser scanner in use, 93 left shift mode, 93 low battery condition, 94 message, 92 receiving data, 92 right shift mode, 93 transmitting data, 92 downloading files to, 253
Field Exit key, 61 keyboard, 59
Main menu, 101 paging keys, 60 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 102 remapping keys, 234 screen sizes, 152
Set-up Parms menu, 102 shift keys, 59 signal keys, 62 special control keys, 62 special host keys, 62 tab keys, 60 user’s guide, xxiv, 59
12-volt FLASH cloning cable, 173
17XX terminal
5250 additional functions, 57
AID-generating keys, 56
Auto-Login Restart, 58 cursor keys, 55 display annunciators, 92 alphabetic character shift mode, 93 bad battery, 93 battery is charging, 93 communication loss, 92 error, 93 input inhibited, 92 insert mode, 93 laser scanner in use, 93 left shift mode, 93 low battery condition, 94 message, 92 receiving data, 92 right shift mode, 93 temperature, 93 transmitting data, 92 downloading files to, 253
Field Exit key, 56 keyboard, 54
Main menu, 101 paging keys, 55 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 102 remapping keys, 234 screen sizes, 151
Set-up Parms menu, 102 shift keys, 54 signal keys, 57 special control keys, 57 special host keys, 57 tab keys, 55 user’s guide, xxiv, 54
394 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Index
2415 terminal
5250 additional functions, 21
AID-generating keys, 19
Auto-Login Restart, 21 configuring TE parameters, 177 cursor keys, 18
DK, display column spacing, 336 double-byte character set, 192 downloading files to, 251
Field Exit key, 20 keyboards, 18
Main menu, 99 paging keys, 18 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 100 remapping keys, 234 screen sizes, 146 serial scanning, 16
Set-up Parms menu, 100 setting up, 2 signal keys, 20 special control keys, 20 special host keys, 20 tab keys, 18 user’s manual, xxiv, 18
2425 terminal
5250 additional functions, 24
AID-generating keys, 23
Auto-Login Restart, 25 configuring TE parameters, 177 cursor keys, 22
DK, display column spacing, 336 downloading files to, 251
Field Exit key, 24 keyboard, 22
Main menu, 99 paging keys, 22 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 100 remapping keys, 234 screen sizes, 146 serial scanning, 16
Set-up Parms menu, 100 setting up, 2 shift keys, 22 signal keys, 24 special control keys, 24 special host keys, 24 tab keys, 22 user’s manual, xxiv, 22
2435A terminal
5250 additional functions, 29 additional 5250 functions, 30
AID-generating keys, 28
Auto-Login Restart, 30 configuring TE parameters, 177 cursor keys, 27
DK, display column spacing, 340
Field Exit key, 29 keyboards, 26
Main menu, 99
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide paging keys, 27 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 100 screen sizes disabled icons, 146 enabled icons, 147 serial scanning, 16
Set-up Parms menu, 100 shift keys, 26 signal keys, 29 special control keys, 29 tab keys, 27 user’s manual, xxiv, 26
2455 terminal
5250 additional functions, 33
AID-generating keys, 32
Auto-Login Restart, 33 configuring TE parameters, 177 cursor keys, 31
DK, display column spacing, 347 downloading files to, 251
Field Exit key, 32 keyboard, 31
Main menu, 99 paging keys, 31 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 100 remapping keys, 234 screen sizes, 147 serial scanning, 16
Set-up Parms menu, 100 setting up, 2 shift keys, 31 signal keys, 33 special control keys, 33 special host keys, 33 tab keys, 31 user’s manual, xxiv, 31
2475 terminal
5250 additional functions, 36
AID-generating keys, 35
Auto-Login Restart, 36 configuring TE parameters, 177 cursor keys, 34
DK, display column spacing, 349 downloading files to, 251
Field Exit key, 35 keyboard, 34
Main menu, 99 paging keys, 34 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 100 screen sizes, 148 serial scanning, 16
Set-up Parms menu, 100 signal keys, 36 special control keys, 36 special host keys, 36 tab keys, 34 user’s guide, 34 user’s manual, xxiv
395
Index
248X terminal
5250 additional functions, 36
AID-generating keys, 35
Auto-Login Restart, 36 configuring TE parameters, 177 cursor keys, 34
DK, display column spacing, 349 downloading files to, 251
Field Exit key, 35
Get Optical Inputs (#I), 330 keyboard, 34
Main menu, 99 paging keys, 34 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 100
Relay Commands (#R), 331 remapping keys, 234 screen sizes, 148 serial scanning, 16
Set-up Parms menu, 100 setting up, 2 shift keys, 34 signal keys, 36 special control keys, 36 special host keys, 36 tab keys, 34 user’s manual, xxiv, 34 with terminal blocks, 331 without terminal blocks
Get Optical Inputs (#I) extended command, 330
Relay (#R) extended commands, 332
3210 emulation, 126
3270 options, 123, 125 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 126 any auto enter, 127 auto entr scan, 126 auto tab scan, 126
BRT (bright) auto enter, 126 device name, 126 emulate 3210, 126 keybrd unlock, 125 origin set, 126 telnet, 126
3270.XLT, 246
3278 SNA keys. See SNA keys
5-volt FLASH cloning cable, 173
5020 data collection pc
5250 additional functions, 44
Auto-Login Restart, 45
Break key, 44 caps lock disabling, 45 enabling, 45 typing lowercase letter while enabled, 45 color-coded key combinations, 42 cursor keys, 42 downloading files to, 251 keyboards, 42
Main menu, 103 paging keys, 43 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 103 screen sizes, 150
Set-up Parms menu, 103 signal keys, 43 special control keys, 43 special host keys, 43 standard keys, 43 top-row function keys, 44 user’s manual, xxiv, 42
5055 data collection pc
5250 additional functions, 49
AID-generating keys, 48
Auto-Login Restart, 49 configuring TE parameters, 178 cursor keys, 46 display annunciators, 92 alphabetic character shift mode, 93 caps lock, 93 communication loss, 92 input inhibited, 92 insert mode, 93 left shift mode, 93 message, 92 num lock, 93 radio, 92 receiving, 92 right shift mode, 93 sending, 92 downloading files to, 252
Exit emulation and return to DOS, 179
Field Exit key, 48 implementing attribute colors, 241 keyboard, 46
Main menu, 101 opening the main menu, 179 paging keys, 47 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 102 remapping keys, 234 screen sizes, 150
Set-up Parms menu, 102 shift keys, 46 signal keys, 49 special control keys, 49 special host keys, 49 standard keys, 65 terminal emulation, 178 user’s guide, xxiv, 46
5250
CONFIG.DAT option, 209
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
396 TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Index
5250 options, 123 allow alias, 124 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 124 auto tab scan, 123 beep on error, 123 destructive BS (backspace), 124 device name, 124 lock error msg (message), 125 period-comma, 124 skip fldexit (field exit), 124 telnet, 123 use color, 125
59XX terminal
5250 additional functions, 53
AID-generating keys, 52
Auto-Login Restart, 53 cursor keys, 50
DBCS code, 216 display annunciators, 92 alphabetic character shift mode, 93 communication loss, 92 current row/column position, 94 input inhibited, 92 insert mode, 93 left shift mode, 93 message, 92 receiving, 92 right shift mode, 93 sending, 92 downloading files to, 253
Field Exit key, 52 key repeat, 217 keyboard, 50
Main menu, 101 paging keys, 51 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 102 remapping keys, 234 screen sizes, 151
Set-up Parms menu, 102 shift keys, 50 signal keys, 53 special control keys, 53 special host keys, 53 tab keys, 51 user’s guide, xxiv, 50
6400 computer
5250 additional functions, 40
AID-generating keys, 39 alpha lock mode, 38
Auto-Login Restart, 41 configuring TE parameters, 177 cursor keys, 38 display annunciators, 92 alpha lock, 93 alphabetic character shift mode, 93 battery pack gas gauge, 94 communication loss, 92 input inhibited, 92 insert mode, 93
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide left shift mode, 93 message, 92 radio, 92 receiving, 92 right shift mode, 93 sending, 92 downloading files to, 252
Exit emulation and return to DOS, 178
Field Exit key, 40 keyboards, 37
Main menu, 101 opening the main menu, 177 paging keys, 38 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 102 remapping keys, 234 screen sizes, 149
Set-up Parms menu, 102 shift keys, 37 signal keys, 40 special control keys, 40 special host keys, 40
Tab keys, 38 user’s guide, xxiv, 37
700 series mobile computer
5250 additional functions, 69
Auto-Login Restart, 70 auxiliary keys, 68
Break key, 68 configuration menus, 95 configuration settings file, 89 cursor keys, 64 dialog boxes, 97 displaying double-byte characters, 192 downloading files to, 251 editing keys, 67
Field Exit key, 69 function keys, 67 implementing attribute colors, 241 keyboards, 63
Main menu, 103 paging keys, 64 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 103
RSSI, 97 screen sizes, 152
Set-up Parms menu, 103 signal keys, 69
SIP toggle, 97
Software Input Panels, 63 changing colors, 63 special control keys, 69 special host keys, 69 terminal IP address annunciator, 97 user’s manual, xxiv, 63
802.11 radio, 7
802.11 radio test, 6400, 5055, 164
802.1x supplicant radio driver, radio comm, 141 disconnection value, 141 user authentication, 141
902 MHz radio module, 6400, 5055, 111
397
Index
A
ABC Codabar
CONFIG.DAT option, 200
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
ActiveSync, 187, 188, 251
Adapter, communication, 252, 253
Adaptive Poll protocol, 212
Add-On 2
CONFIG.DAT option, 204, 205
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 224, 225
Add-On 5
CONFIG.DAT option, 204, 205
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 224, 225
Additional 5250 functions
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 21
2435A, 29, 30
2425, 24
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 44
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69
CK30, 75, 76
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 15
Addresses cursor
Clear Format Table command, 271
Clear Unit command, 272
Read Immediate command, 260
Read Input Fields command, 262, 263
Read MDT Fields command, 264
Restore Screen command, 273
Insert Cursor order, 281
Move Cursor order, 282 parameter errors, 297
Repeat to Address order, 283
Set Buffer Address order, 284
Start of Field order, 290
Write to Display command, 278
Aid-associated commands, 260
AID-generating keys
11XX, 61
17XX, 56
2415, 19
2425, 23
2435A, 28
2455, 32
398
2475, 35
248X, 35
5055, 48
59XX, 52
6400, 39 bar code labels, 355
CK30, 74
CK31, 79
CV60, 85 description, 12 extended command characters, 303 system code for, 296
Alarm, 278, 279, 295
Allow Alias
5250 options, 124
CONFIG.DAT option, 209
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
Allow Alpha
CONFIG.DAT option, 208
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 226
Allow LineMode, VT/ANSI options, 133
Allow NAWS (negotiate about window size)
3270 options, 126
5250 options, 124
CONFIG.DAT option, 209
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
VT/ANSI options, 132
Alpha lock, display annunciators, 6400, 93
Alpha lock mode, 6400, 38
Alpha only field, 286, 289, 296
Alpha shift field, 286, 289
Alphabetic keys, key remapping codes, 237
Alternate character size, 53
Alternate cursor, 6
Alternate screen columns, 216, 313
Alternate screen rows, 216, 313
Annunciator format
CONFIG.DAT option, 213
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 229
Annunciator position
CONFIG.DAT option, 213
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 229
Annunciators, 10, 154
Answerback, 128
Any Auto Enter, 3270 options, 127
Application keypad mode, 131 starting, 3
VT cursor mode, 132
Application Cursor mode, 132
Application mode, 131
ASCEBD.TBL, 243
ASCII, 246
Asynchronous prefixes, 295
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Attn key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 359
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14
Attribute colors, implementing, 241
Austrian character set, 247
Auto Detect scanner
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Auto enter field, 286, 289
Auto entr scan, 126 vt/ansi options, 127
Auto tab scan, 10
3270 options, 126
5250 options, 123
CONFIG.DAT option, 209
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227 vt/ansi options, 128
Auto wrap, VT/ANSI options, 133
Auto-advancing through fields, 10
Auto-Encoded Code 39
CONFIG.DAT option, 206
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
Auto-login, 182 control characters, 184 developing script files, 182 disabling, 187
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 188
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 188
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 188
6400, 5055, 188 loading the script file, 184
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 185
5020, 185
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 186
6400, 5055, 186
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 187 sample script files, 189 script file commands, 182
Auto-Login Restart
11XX, 62
17XX, 58
2415, 21
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Index
2425, 25
2435A, 30
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 45
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 41
700 series, 70 bar code label, 361
CK30, 76
CK31, 80
CV60, 87 description, 191 key remapping code, 239
Auxiliary keys, 700 series, 68
B
Back Tab
11XX, 60
17XX, 55
2415, 18
2425, 22
2435A, 27
2455, 31
2475, 34
248X, 34
5020, 43
5055, 47
59XX, 51
6400, 38
CK30, 73
CK31, 78
CV60, 84 description, 15
Back Tab key
700 series, 67 bar code label, 355 remapped character, 238
Background RGB, display colors, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,
139
Backlight display opts, 135
700 Series, 137
LCD parms, 155
Backlight intensity, CONFIG.DAT option, 213
Backlight state
CONFIG.DAT option, 210
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 228
Backlight timer
CONFIG.DAT option, 210
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 228
Backspace key, 361
Bad battery, display annunciators, 17XX, 93
“Bad option name” message, 196
“Bad string length” message, 196
“Bad value” message, 196
399
Index
Bar Code, symbologies, 365
Codabar, 368
Code 11, 368
Code 128, 370
Code 39, 369
Code 39 concatenation, 369
Code 39 full ASCII, 369
Code 93, 370 data string formats, 366
EAN, 368
I 2 of 5, 372
MSI code, 373
Plessey, 373
S 2 of 5, 372
UPC, 367
Bar code parms
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 114
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30,
CK31, CV60, 115 code 39 encoded, 114 concatenate, 114
RS232 stream, 114 scan all flds, 114 scan options, 115 scanner type, 115 stream scan, 114
Bar code scanning
CONFIG.DAT options, 199 length, 322 length options, 120 scan options to enable, 118 additional bar codes, 119
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Basic Service Set ID (B SSID). See Radio test (802.11)
Battery capacity icons, 94 low capacity levels, 94 low level status, 94
Battery gas icons for levels, 94 low capacity levels, 94 low level readings, 94
Battery is charging, display annunciators
11XX, 93
17XX, 93
Battery pack, charge level, 94
Battery pack gas gauge, display annunciators, 6400, 94
Baud rates, 212
BC type char, 116
BC Type Character
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Beep head set, 163, 215
Beep internal, 163, 215
Beep on error, 123
CONFIG.DAT option, 209
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
Beeper frequency, 215 length, 215
400
volume, 215
Beeper frequency, 313
Beeper length, 313
Beeper select, 163
Beeper setup
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, CK30, CK31, 161 beep headset, 163 beep internal, 163 beeper select, 163 error tone, 163 key click, 161 frequency, 162 length, 162 volume, 162
Beeper volume, 313
Belgian character set, 247
Belgian IBM character set, 248
Big 5 Chinese, 192
Block
6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 136
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 138
Block (line edit mode), 130
Block blink
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 6400,
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 137
Bluetooth Device Manager application, 144
Brazilian character set, 247
Break key, 46
5020, 44
700 series, 68
BRT (bright) Auto Enter, 3270 options, 126
Bypass field, 286, 289
C
“Can’t open file” message, 196
Canadian (French) character set, 247
Caps Lock, 5020 disabling, 45 enabling, 45 typing lowercase letter while enabled, 45
Caps lock, display annunciators, 5055, 93
Caps Lock key, 5055, 49
CC Byte 1, 319
CC Byte 2, 321
CC Byte 3, 322
CC bytes, 262, 264, 278
CD bit
Read Immediate command, 260
Read Input Fields command, 262
Read MDT Fields command, 264
Read Screen command, 267
Center cursor, 153
Center Cursor mode
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Central Europe, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 140
Change colors on SIPs
700 Series, 63
CV60, 81
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Index
Change of direction bit. See CD bit
Change size of SIPs, CV60, 81
Changing text, 232
Channel, CONFIG.DAT option, 197
Character mode, 130
Character sets, 248 double-byte, 192
Characters allowed in fields, 289 key remapping codes, 236 remapping, 240
Start of Field order, 290 substituting national, 246 write control, 278
Write Error Code command, 276
Write to Display command, 278
Charge level icons, 94
Check Digit
CONFIG.DAT option, 206
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
Check Digit 1
CONFIG.DAT option, 207
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 226
Check Digit 2
CONFIG.DAT option, 207
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 226
Chinese (simplified) double-byte characters
700 series, 192
CK30, 193
Chinese (traditional) double-byte characters
700 series, 192
CK30, 193
CK30 handheld computer
5250 additional functions, 75 additional 5250 functions, 76
AID-generating keys, 74
Auto-Login Restart, 76 configuration settings file, 89 cursor keys, 72 displaying double-byte characters, 193 downloading files to, 251
Field Exit key, 75, 79 keyboards, 71
Main menu, 103 paging keys, 73 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 103 screen sizes, 152
Set-up Parms menu, 103 shift keys, 72, 77 signal keys, 75 special control keys, 75 tab keys, 73 user’s manual, xxiv, 71
CK31 handheld computer
5250 additional functions, 80 additional 5250 functions, 80
AID-generating keys, 79
Auto-Login Restart, 80 configuration menus, 95 configuration settings file, 89
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide cursor keys, 77 downloading files to, 251 keyboards, 77
Main menu, 103 paging keys, 78 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 103 screen sizes, 152
Set-up Parms menu, 103 signal keys, 80 special control keys, 80 tab keys, 78 user’s manual, xxiv, 77
Clear Format Table command, 271
Clear key
11XX, 61
17XX, 56
2415, 19
2425, 23
2435A, 28
2455, 32
2475, 35
248X, 35
5055, 48
59XX, 52
6400, 39
700 series, 67 bar code label, 355
CK30, 74
CK31, 79
CV60, 85 description, 12 encoded sequence, 362 key remapping code, 238
Clear type, font quality, CK30, CK31, 140
Clear Unit Alternate command, 259
Clear Unit command, 272
Cloning opts, 172
Codabar, 326, 368
CONFIG.DAT option, 200
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
Code 11, 326
CONFIG.DAT option, 200, 207
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221, 226
Code 128, 327
CONFIG.DAT option, 200, 208
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221, 227
Code 39
CONFIG.DAT option, 200
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
Code 39 Encoded, 114
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Code 93, 326
CONFIG.DAT option, 200
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
Code page
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 140
CONFIG.DAT option, 211
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 228
401
Index
Codes
11, 368
128, 370
39, 369
39 concatenation, 369
39 full ASCII, 369
93, 370
Cold start, 142
Color-coded key combinations, 5020, 42
Columns remote display, CONFIG.DAT option, 211 terminal screen size, 216, 313 wireless station screen size
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
COM select, 145
CONFIG.DAT option, 212
Commands asynchronous, 295 input description, 260
Read Immediate, 260
Read Immediate Fields, 262
Read MDT Alternate, 266
Read MDT Fields, 264
Read Modified Immediate Alternate, 261
Read Screen, 267
Save Screen, 268
Write Structured Field, 269 nonsupported, 259 output
Clear Format Table, 271
Clear Unit, 272 description, 271
Restore Screen, 273
Roll, 274
Write Error Code, 276
Write to Display, 278
Signal, 276, 295 structure of, 259
Communication, 105
Communication Adapter, 252, 253
Communication loss, display annunciators
11XX, 92
17XX, 92
5055, 92
59XX, 92
6400, 92
CompactFlash storage card, 187
Computer Identics 2 of 5, 327
CONFIG.DAT option, 201
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
Concatenate, 114, 116
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Concatenation, 369
Configuring serial scanning, 16
Configuring TE parameters, 98
5055, 178
402
6400, 177
700 Series, CK31, CV60, 95 trakker antares, 177
Contrast mode, CONFIG.DAT option, 211
Control character bytes, 262, 264, 278
Control characters, 184
Conversion tables, 376, 379
Copy setup, session menu, 174
Copying files, 251
Corner mode, 153
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Courier new, select font, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 138
Courier new bold, select font, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,
138
CR to CRLF (carriage return to carriage return/line feed),
127
Current row/column position, display annunciators, 59XX,
94
Cursor keys
11XX, 59
17XX, 55
2415, 18
2425, 22
2435A, 27
2455, 31
2475, 34
248X, 34
5020, 42
5055, 46
59XX, 50
6400, 38
700 series, 64 bar code labels, 354
CK30, 72
CK31, 77
CV60, 83 key remapping codes, 239
Cursor mode
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020,
6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 137
CONFIG.DAT option, 211
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 228
VT cursor mode, 132
Custom configuration files
CFGLIT.DAT, 232
CONFIG.DAT
parameter formats, 195 parameters and qualifiers, 196 prompting for a value, 195 sample set-up file, 195 syntax, 194 verifying your configuration, 196
TE_SETTINGS.INI
parameter formats, 218 parameters and qualifiers, 219
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
CV60 vehicle mount computer
5250 additional functions, 86
AID-generating keys, 85
Auto-Login Restart, 87 configuration menus, 95 configuration settings file, 89 cursor keys, 83 dialog boxes, 97 downloading files to, 251
Field Exit key, 86 implementing attribute colors, 241 keyboards, 81
Main menu, 103 paging keys, 83 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 103
RSSI, 97 screen sizes, 152
Set-up Parms menu, 103 shift keys, 81 signal keys, 86
SIP toggle, 97
Software Input Panels, 81 changing colors, 81 changing size, 81 special control keys, 86 special host keys, 86 tab keys, 84 terminal IP address annunciator, 97 user’s guide, xxiv, 81
Cyrillic (Russian), code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,
140
D
Danish character set, 247
Danish IBM character set, 248
Data Decode
CONFIG.DAT option, 206
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
Data stream, 122
CONFIG.DAT option, 197 initialization files, 233
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 219
Decimal values, 376
Default values
CONFIG.DAT, 196 restoring, 142
TE_SETTINGS.INI, 219
Define height, 155
CONFIG.DAT option, 213
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Define origin, 154
Define width, 155
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
DEL (delete), 238
Del key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 67, 69 bar code label, 359
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14 encoded sequence, 361
DEL to BS (delete to backspace), 127
Delete (DEL), 238
Delete key, key remapping code, 238
Delimiter character, 301, 310
Destructive BS
CONFIG.DAT option, 210
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
Destructive BS (backspace), 5250 options, 124
Developing auto-login script files, 182
Device name
3270 options, 126
5250 options, 124
CONFIG.DAT option, 209
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
Dialog boxes, 97
RSSI, 97
SIP toggle, 97 terminal IP address annunciator, 97
Digits only field, 286, 289
Direct Connect, 113
Disabling auto tab scan, 11
Disabling auto-login, 187
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 188
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 188
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 188
6400, 5055, 188
Disconnect Val, 141, 212
DiscreteBells, 129
Display asynchronous prefixes, 295 data stream commands, 257, 259 orders, 280 parameters errors, 296 system codes, 296
Index
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
403
Index
Display annunciators, 92 position 0, radio, 92 position 1 communications loss, 92 message, 92 receiving, 92 receiving data, 92 sending, 92 transmitting data, 92 position 1-3, laser scanner in use, 93 position 2 input inhibited, 92 insert mode, 93 position 3 alphabetic character shift mode, 93 left shift mode, 93 right shift mode, 93 position 4 alpha lock, 93 battery is charging, 93 position 4-6, low battery condition, 94 position 4-8, current row/column position, 94 position 5, error, 93 position 5-8, battery pack gas gauge icons, 94 position 6 bad battery, 93 temperature, 93 positions 4 and 5 caps lock, 93 num lock, 93
Display colors, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 138
Display column spacing
2415 terminal, 336
2425 terminal, 336
2435A terminal, 340
2455 terminal, 347
2475 terminal, 349
248X terminal, 349
Display cursor location, 6
Display mode, 6
Display options
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020,
6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 137 background RGB, display colors, 139 backlight, 135
700 Series, 137 block, 136
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 138 block blink
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 6400,
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 137 central europe, code page, 140 clear type, font quality, 140 code page
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 140 central europe, 140 cyrillic (russian), 140 english, 140
404
greek, 140 hebrew, 140 latin 2, 140 polish, 140 courier new, select font, 138 courier new bold, select font, 138 cursor mode
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020,
6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 137 block, 136, 138 block blink, 135, 137 underline, 135, 137 underline blink, 135, 137 cyrillic (russian), code page, 140 display colors
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 138 background RGB, 139 foreground RGB, 139 swap fore/back, 139 enabled, remote display, 136 english, code page, 140 font quality
CK30, CK31, 140 clear type, 140 standard, 140 foreground RGB, display colors, 139 greek, code page, 140 hebrew, code page, 140 latin 2, code page, 140 lucida, select font, 138 polish, code page, 140 remote baud, 136 remote display, 136 enabled, 136 remote baud, 136 remote type, 136 screen size, 136 remote type, 136 screen size, 136 select font
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 138 courier new, 138 courier new bold, 138 lucida, 138 tahoma, 138 standard, font quality, 140 swap fore/back, display colors, 139 tahoma, select font, 138 underline
6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 137 underline blink, 137
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 6400,
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
Display test, 166
DK. See Display column spacing
DNS, 106
Do gold key, VT/ANSI options, 133
Do UTF-8, VT/ANSI options, 133
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
DOS 6.22, terminal emulations, 178
Double-byte character set, 192
59xx parameter, 216
Downloading files, 251
File Manager, 186 flash and utility files, 186
INTERLNK/INTERSVR, 186
RF communications, 185 serial ports, 185
Unit Manager, 185
Drop Leading
CONFIG.DAT option, 202
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 222
Drop Trailing
CONFIG.DAT option, 202
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 222
Dual sessions, 6
Dup key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 21
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 44
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 360
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 15 system code, 296
Duplication field, 286, 289
E
EAN, 323, 368
CONFIG.DAT option, 201
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
EBCDIC, 246
EBCDIC codes, 379
EBCDIC to ASCII translation, 243
Editing files, 251
Editing keys, 700 series, 67
EHLLAPI values, 235
Element decode
CONFIG.DAT option, 206
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
Emulate 3210, 126
Emulation, 107
Enabled, remote display, 136
Encoded Code 39
CONFIG.DAT option, 206 key press sequences, 361
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Index
Scan Bar Code Parameters (#S) extended command,
324
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
Encoded sequences, 361
End (viewport) command, 5
End key, 46
English, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 140
English (UK) character set, 247
Enter auxiliary key
700 series, 68 using to navigate through menus, 90 key remapping code, 238
Enter key
2435A, 28
700 series, 67
CK30, 74
CK31, 79
Enter/Rec Adv, encoded sequence, 361
Enter/Rec Adv key
11XX, 61
17XX, 56
2415, 19
2425, 23
2455, 32
2475, 35
248X, 35
5055, 48
59XX, 52
6400, 39 bar code label, 355
CV60, 85 description, 12
Erase Field, 5
Erase input, escape sequence, 361
Erase Input key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 359
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14
Erase Last Word, 5
Error, display annunciators, 17XX, 93
Error messages, CONFIG.DAT, 196
Error reset, encoded code sequences, 362
405
Index
Error Reset key
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
11XX, 62
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 359
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14
Error tone, 163, 313 beeper frequency, 215 length, 215 volume, 215
Escape characters (Encoded Code 39), 363
European Article Numbering code. See EAN
Exchanging files, 251
Exit emulation
5055, 179
6400, 178
Exit menus, 170
Exit TE2000, 143
Expand 8 to 13
CONFIG.DAT option, 205
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
Expand E to A
CONFIG.DAT option, 205
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 224
“Expected numeric” message, 196
Extended Code 39, 324
CONFIG.DAT option, 206
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
Extended commands, 123
Get Optical Inputs (#I), 330
Magnetic Card Reader (#M), 333
Receive Only (#G), 310
Relay Commands (#R), Set, Reset, Read, 331
Return Version (#V), 316
Scan (#S), 318
Set Parameters (#H), 313
Tone (#T), 317
Transmit and Receive (#F), 300
Transmit Only (#P), 306
F
Fast Cursor Left command, 5
Fast Cursor Right command, 5
FCWs, 265, 286, 293
FFW, 286
Field control words, 265, 286, 293
406
Field exit, escape sequence, 361
Field Exit field, 286, 289
Field Exit key
11XX, 61
17XX, 56
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 32
2475, 35
248X, 35
5055, 48
59XX, 52
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 358
CK30, 75, 79
CV60, 86 description, 13 system codes for, 296
Field Format Word, 286
Field Mark key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 21
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 44
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 360
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 15
Field+ key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 21
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 44
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 360
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 15
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Field- key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 21
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 44
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 360
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 15 system code for, 296
Fields bit numbers, 286 parameter errors for, 296 resequencing, 290, 293 system codes for, 296 types of, 289
File Manager, downloading files, 186
FileCopy utility, 251
Files custom parameter set-up, 194 downloading, 251
Finnish character set, 247
Finnish IBM character set, 248
Fixed bar code lengths fixed length 1
CONFIG.DAT option, 202
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 222 fixed length 2
CONFIG.DAT option, 203
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 223 fixed length 3
CONFIG.DAT option, 203
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 223 fixed length 4
CONFIG.DAT option, 203
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 223
Flash and utility files, downloading files, 186
Flash memory reprogramming, 252 upgrades, 252
Fn key, 46
Font quality
CK30, CK31, 140
CONFIG.DAT option, 211
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 228
Font set, 246, 383
Foreground RGB, display colors, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,
139
Foreground session
CONFIG.DAT option, 216
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231
Forward Tab
11XX, 60
17XX, 55
2415, 18
2425, 22
2455, 31
2475, 34
248X, 34
5020, 43
5055, 47
59XX, 51
6400, 38
CV60, 84 description, 15
Forward Tab key
2435A, 27
700 series, 67 bar code label, 355
CK30, 73
CK31, 78
French character set, 247
French IBM character set, 248
Frequency beeper setup, 162
CONFIG.DAT option, 197
Full ASCII
CONFIG.DAT option, 206
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
Function keys
2435A, 28
2455, 32
2475, 35
248X, 35
5020, 44
5055, 48
6400, 39
700 series, 67 bar code labels, 355
CK30, 74
CK31, 79
CV60, 85 description, 12 encoded sequences, 361 key remapping codes, 238
G
German character set, 247
German IBM character set, 248
Get Optical Inputs (#I) extended command, 330
Greek, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 140
H
Hard resets
5055, 179
6400, 178
Hebrew, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 140
Index
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
407
Index
Help key from error state
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 359
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14 key remapping code, 238 non-error state
11XX, 61
17XX, 56
2415, 19
2425, 23
2435A, 28
2455, 32
2475, 35
248X, 35
5055, 48
59XX, 52
6400, 39 bar code label, 358
CK30, 74
CK31, 79
CV60, 85 description, 12
Help, where to find more on, INTERLNK, INTERSVR,
253
Hex key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 359
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14
Hex mode, 273, 277
408
I
Hexadecimal values, 376
Histogram, 169
Home (viewport) command, 5
Home key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 67, 69 bar code label, 359
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14 encoded sequence, 361
Host A, B, or C
CONFIG.DAT option, 197
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 219
Host Name
CONFIG.DAT option, 197
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 219
Host name, 106
Host setup, 106
Host view size, 122
HostName command (auto-login), 182
I 2 of 5. See Interleaved 2 of 5
I/O field, 286, 289
IBM character sets, 248
IBM-5291-1 terminal, 9
IBM-5555-B01 terminal, 9
IC (Insert Cursor) order, 281
Icons. See Annunciators
Illustrations, keyboards
11XX, 59
17XX, 54
2415, 18
2425, 22
2435A, 26
2455, 31
2475, 34
248X, 34
5020, 42
5055, 46
59XX, 50
6400, 37
700 series, 64
CK30, 71
CK31, 77
CV60, 83
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Index
Immediate commands
Clear Unit, 272
Read Immediate, 260
Read Modified Immediate Alternate, 261
Read Screen, 267
Restore Screen, 273
Save Screen, 268
Initialization screens, 3, 98, 176
5055, 178
6400, 177 trakker antares, 177
Input command, 182
Input commands description, 260
Read Input, 260
Read Input Fields, 262
Read MDT Alternate, 266
Read MDT Fields, 264
Read Modified Immediate Alternate, 261
Read Screen, 267
Save Screen, 268
Write Structured Field, 269
Input Inhibited, 10
Input inhibited, display annunciators
11XX, 92
17XX, 92
5055, 92
59XX, 92
6400, 92
Input Inhibited annunciator
Clear Format Table command, 271
Clear Unit command, 272
Start of Field order, 289
Write Error Code command, 277
InputHidden command, 182
Insert annunciator, 10
Insert Cursor order, 281
Insert key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 67, 69 bar code label, 359
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14 encoded sequence, 361 remapping code, 238
Insert mode
Clear Format Table command, 271
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Clear Unit command, 272 display annunciators
11XX, 93
17XX, 93
5055, 93
59XX, 93
6400, 93
Restore Screen command, 273 system code for, 296
Write Error Code command, 277
Installing INTERLNK/INTERSVR, 252
Interleaved 2 of 5, 328, 372
CONFIG.DAT option, 201, 207
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221, 226
INTERLNK, 253 downloading files, 186 installation, 252 installing, 253 prerequisites for flash update, 252 where to find more help, 253
Intermec Application Server
DNS name, 106 downloading Postamble command from, 10 dual sessions, 6 host name, 106
IP address, 106
SNA, 107 system manual, xxiv
Telnet, 107
International character set, 247
INTERSVR downloading files, 186 used for, 253 where to find more help, 253
IP address, 105, 106
Italian character set, 247
Italian IBM character set, 248
ITC server, 105 host setup, 106 emulation, 107 host name, 106 port number, 107 upline protocol, 107
J
Japanese (English) character set, 247
Japanese double-byte characters
700 series, 192
CK30, 193
K
Katakana, 286
Key click, 161 frequency, 162, 215 length, 162, 215 volume, 162, 215
Key code table, 236
Key repeat, 217
Key uppercase, 155
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
409
Index
Keyboard “0” command, 183
Keyboard “1” command, 183
Keyboard opts, 171
Keyboard test, 167
700 Series, CK31, CV60, 96
Keyboards
11XX, 59
17XX, 54
2415, 18
2425, 22
2435A, 26
2455, 31
2475, 34
248X, 34
5020, 42
5055, 46
59XX, 50
6400, 37
700 series, 63
CK30, 71
CK31, 77
CV60, 81 remapping keys, 234
Keybrd unlock, 125
Keypad mode, 131
Keypads. See Keyboards
Korean double-byte characters
700 series, 192
CK30, 193
L
Lan ID, CONFIG.DAT option, 197
Laser scanner
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Laser scanner in use, display annunciators
11XX, 93
17XX, 93
Latin 2, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 140
Lazy mode, 154
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
LCD contrast, 145, 214
LCD parms (parameters), 145 annunciators, 154 backlight, 155 define height, 155 define width, 155 key uppercase, 155
LCD contrast, 145 menu settings, 156 screen mode, 153 center cursor, 153 corner mode, 153 define origin, 154 lazy mode, 154
410
locked mode, 154 page mode, 153 screen size, 146, 155
11XX, 152
17XX, 151
2415, 146
2425, 146
2435A (disabled icons), 146
2435A (enabled icons), 147
2455, 147
2475, 148
248X, 148
5020, 150
5055, 150
59XX, 151
6400, 149
700 series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 152 scroll window, 155, 156
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 156 define height, 155 define width, 155 screen size, 155 tab size, 155 tab size, 155 toolbar options, 157
Length, beeper setup, 162
Length options, 120
Line Edit (block) mode, 130
Loading auto-login script file, 184
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 185
5020, 185
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 186
6400, 5055, 186
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 187
Local echo, 128
Lock Error Msg (message)
5250 options, 125
CONFIG.DAT option, 210
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
Lock key, 700 series, 67
Lock mode, 130
Locked mode, 154
Low battery condition, display annunciators
11XX, 94
17XX, 94
Lucent radio test, 6400, 5055, 164
Lucida, select font, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 138
Lustat, 273
M
Macros creating, 235 nesting, 236
Magetic (#M) card reader operation, 333
Magnetic card reader operation (#M), 333
Magnetic Stripe Reader, 287, 288, 290
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Index
Main menu, 99
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 99
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 103
5055, 179
6400, 177
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 101 opening, 98, 99 bar code label, 361 options, 98 password
CONFIG.DAT option, 213
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 229
Main menu 2, 171 cloning opts, 172 keyboard opts, 171
Save parms, 171 session menu, 174 copy setup, 174 session name, 174 set hot key, 174 switch, 174
Mandatory entry field, 286, 289, 296
Mandatory fill field, 286, 289, 296
Maximum bar code length
CONFIG.DAT option, 204
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 223
MC (Move Cursor) order, 282
MDT bit
Clear Format Table command, 271
Clear Unit command, 272
Read Immediate command, 260
Read Input Fields command, 262
Read MDT Alternate command, 266
Read MDT Fields command, 264
Restore Screen command, 273
Start of Field order, 286
Write to Display command, 278
Memory, reprogramming flash, 252
Memory view test, 168
Menu password, 143
Menu settings, 156
Menus, opening, 98, 99, 361
Message, display annunciators
11XX, 92
17XX, 92
5055, 92
59XX, 92
6400, 92
Message Waiting annunciator, 10
Clear Format Table command, 271
Clear Unit command, 272
Restore Screen command, 273
Signal command format, 295
Write to Display command, 278
Messages, system, 296
Microsoft ActiveSync, 187, 188, 251
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Minimum bar code length
CONFIG.DAT option, 204
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 224
“Missing ‘;’ ” message, 196
“Missing ‘=’ ” message, 196
Mod 10 check, 116
CONFIG.DAT option, 199, 208 parameter code for, 297
Start of Field order, 289 system code for, 296
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220, 226
Mod 11 check
CONFIG.DAT option, 208 parameter code for, 297
Start of Field order, 289 system code for, 296
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 226
Mode, CONFIG.DAT option, 197
Modified data tag bit. See MDT bit
Modified field, 286, 289
Move Cursor order, 282
MSI Plessey, 373
MSR, 287, 288, 290
N
Native, 123, 134 programmer’s guide, xxiv
NC1100 Power Supply and Charger, 173
Negative response, 278
Network, 2
New Line key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 21
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 44
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 67, 69 bar code label, 360
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 15
No UCC Type
CONFIG.DAT option, 208
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
Nonbypass field, 286
Norand Utilities, 253
Norwegian character set, 247
Norwegian IBM character set, 248
411
Index
Not symbol
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 21
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5055, 49
59XX, 53
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 15
Num lock, display annunciators, 5055, 93
Numbers test, 169
Numeric, keypad mode, 131
Numeric Keypad mode, 131
Numeric keys, key remapping codes, 237
Numeric only field, 286, 289, 296
Numeric shift field, 286, 289
NumLk key, 46
O
Object store, 187
Opening main menu
5055, 179
6400, 177
Opening TE menus, 98, 99 bar code label, 361
Opening the TE application, 3
Optical inputs, 330 returned values, 330, 331
Orders description, 280
Insert Cursor, 281
Move Cursor, 282
Repeat to Address, 283
Set Buffer Address, 284
Start of Field, 285
Start of Header, 292
Transparent Data, 294
Origin set, 126
Output commands
Clear Format Table, 271
Clear Unit, 272 description, 271
Restore Screen, 273
Roll, 274
Write Error Code, 276
Write to Display, 278
Overlays. See Keyboards
P
Packet driver test, 168 histogram, 169 packet stats (statistics), 168
Packet stats (statistics), 168
412
Page mode, 153
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Paging keys
11XX, 60
17XX, 55
2415, 18
2425, 22
2435A, 27
2455, 31
2475, 34
248X, 34
5020, 43
5055, 47
59XX, 51
6400, 38
700 series, 64 bar code labels, 354
CK30, 73
CK31, 78
CV60, 83 key remapping codes, 239
Pan print, 144
Parameter errors, 296
ParmsBySession, 117
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Part numbers, IBM character sets, 248
Passwords
Main Menu
CONFIG.DAT option, 212, 213
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 229 saving parameters, 171
Set-up Parms menu
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 100
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 103
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 102
CONFIG.DAT option, 217
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231
Pause “xxxxx” command, 183
Pause key, 46
PC char set, 132
Period-Comma
CONFIG.DAT option, 210
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 228
Period-comma, 5250 options, 124
Peripherals test, 164
Plessey, 325, 373
CONFIG.DAT option, 201
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
Polish, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 140
Port number, 107
CONFIG.DAT option, 197
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 219
Portuguese character set, 247
Posthelp error state
Read Screen command, 267
Roll command, 274
Write Error Code command, 277
Write to Display command, 278
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Prefixes, asynchronous, 295
Prehelp error state
Read Screen command, 267
Roll command, 274
Write Error Code command, 276
Write to Display command, 278
PRI (primary version). See Radio test (802.11)
Print device, 144
CONFIG.DAT option, 213
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 229
Print key
11XX, 61
17XX, 56
2415, 19
2425, 23
2435A, 28
2455, 32
2475, 35
248X, 35
5055, 48
59XX, 52
6400, 39 bar code label, 358
CK30, 74
CK31, 79
CV60, 85 description, 12
Printer address, 144
CONFIG.DAT option, 213
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 229
Printer port
CONFIG.DAT option, 213
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 229
Program Access keys. See PA keys
Program name, 7
CONFIG.DAT option, 217
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231
Program version, 7
CONFIG.DAT option, 217
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231
Programmable function keys. See Function keys
PromptSessionStart command, 183
Protocol options
3210 emulation, 126
3270 options, 125
5250 options, 123
VT/ANSI, 127
Protocol opts, 121
3270 options, 125 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 126 any auto enter, 127 auto entr scan, 126 auto tab scan, 126
BRT (bright) auto enter, 126 device name, 126 emulate 3210, 126 keybrd unlock, 125 origin set, 126
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Index
telnet, 126
5250 options, 123 allow alias, 124 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 124 auto tab scan, 123 beep on error, 123 destructive BS (backspace), 124 device name, 124 lock error msg (message), 125 period-comma, 124 skip fldexit (field exit), 124 telnet, 123 use color, 125 data stream, 122 extended commands, 123 host view size, 122
RS232 setup
RS232 baud rate, 129
RS232 data bits, 129
RS232 flow, 129
RS232 parity, 129
RS232 stop bits, 129
VT/ANSI options, 127 allow linemode, 133 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 132 answerback, 128 application (keypad mode), 131 application (cursor mode), 132 auto entr scan, 127 auto wrap, 133 block (line edit mode), 130 char (character mode), 130
CR to CRLF (carriage return to carriage return/line feed), 127 cursor (VT cursor mode), 132
DEL to BS (delete to backspace), 127 discretebells, 129 do gold key, 133 do utf-8, 133 keypad mode, 131 local echo, 128 lock mode, 130 native, 134 numeric (keypad mode), 131
PC char set, 132
RS232 setup, 129 screen lock, 128 send XON, 131 auto tab scan, 128 telnet, 130
Term (terminal) setup, 131 terminal ID, 133 terminal mode, 132 transmit BS, 130 userkey locked, 129
VT cursor mode, 132
VT220 mode, 130
413
Index
Protocols
3270, 123
Adaptive Poll, 212
Native, 123
RTC, 212
SST, 212
TCP/IP Direct Connect, 113
UDP Plus, 7, 105 upline, 107
VT/ANSI, 121, 122, 123
WTP, 7
Q
Quiet Zone
CONFIG.DAT option, 206
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
R
RA order, 283
Radio, display annunciators
5055, 92
6400, 92
Radio baud rates, 212
Radio comm, 141
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 141
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 142 disconnection value, 141 security ID, 142 user authentication, 141
Radio configuration number, CONFIG.DAT option, 197
Radio number
CONFIG.DAT option, 198
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 219
Radio protocols, 212
Radio signal strength indicator. See RSSI
Radio test (802.11)
6400, 5055, 164
B SSID (Basic Service Set ID), 165
PRI (primary version), 165
RFLINK, 165
SEC (secondary version), 165
SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio), 165
SSID (Service Set ID), 165
TxRate, 165
Read Immediate command, 260
Read Input Fields command, 262
Read MDT Alternate command, 266
Read MDT Fields command, 264
Read Modified Immediate Alternate command, 261
Read Relay (#R) extended command, 331
Read Screen command, 267
Receive Only (#G) extended command, 310
Receiving, display annunciators
5055, 92
59XX, 92
6400, 92
Receiving data, display annunciators
11XX, 92
17XX, 92
414
Record Backspace key
11XX, 61
17XX, 56
2415, 19
2425, 23
2435A, 28
2455, 32
2475, 35
248X, 35
5055, 48
59XX, 52
6400, 39 bar code label, 358
CK30, 74
CK31, 79
CV60, 85 description, 12
Redundancy, 115
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
Relay (#R) extended commands, Set, Reset, Read, 331
Remap command, 234
Remapping characters, 240, 246 creating a macro, 235
EHLLAPI values, 235 key code table, 236 key or two-key sequence, 234 nesting, 236
Remapping keys, 234 per session, 236
Remote baud, 136
CONFIG.DAT option, 211
Remote display, 136
CONFIG.DAT option, 211
Remote type, 136
Renaming auto-login script files, 187
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 188
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 188
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 188
6400, 5055, 188
Repeat to Address order, 283
Reprogramming, flash memory, 252
Request/Response Header, 262
Resequencing
Read Immediate command, 260
Read Input Field command, 263
Start of Field command, 290
Start of Field order, 287
Start of Header order, 293
Reset key, 700 series, 67
Reset Relay (#R) extended command, 331
Reshow command, 5
Restart “x” command, 183
Restore Screen command, 273
Return AID key, 303
Return key, 700 series, 67
Return result
CONFIG.DAT option, 217
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231
Return Version (#V) extended command, 316
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Reverse image
Clear Format Table command, 271
Clear Unit command, 272, 293
Start of Field order, 290
RF communications, downloading files, 185
RFLINK. See Radio test (802.11)
RGB format, 241
RH, 262
Right-adjust field, 286, 289
RM60/70, 6400, 5055, 109
RM80/90, 6400, 5055, 109
Roll command, 274
Roll keys
11XX, 61
17XX, 56
2415, 19
2425, 23
2435A, 28
2455, 32
2475, 35
248X, 35
5055, 48
59XX, 52
6400, 39 bar code labels, 358
CK30, 74
CK31, 79
CV60, 85 description, 12, 13
Rows, 313 remote display, CONFIG.DAT option, 211 terminal screen size, 216, 313 wireless station screen size
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
RS-232, stream, CONFIG.DAT option, 199
RS232 baud rate, 129
RS232 data bits, 129
RS232 flow, 129
RS232 parity, 129
RS232 setup, 129
RS232 stop bits, 129
RS232 stream, 114
RS232 test, 166
RSSI
700 Series, 97
CV60, 97
RT3210 hand-held computer, 126
RTC diag mode, 212
RTC over TCP
CONFIG.DAT option, 198
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 219
RTC protocol, 212
RTC/WTP, 107, 109
S
S 2 of 5. See Standard 2 of 5
Sample auto-login script files, 189
Save parms, 171
“Save parms” message, 170
Save Screen command, 268
SBA order, 284
Scan (#S) extended command, 318
Scan All Fields, 313
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Scan all flds (fields), 114, 116
Scan options, 115 length options, 120
Scan postamble character
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Scan postchar, 117
Scan preamble character
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Scan prechar, 117
Scan timeout, 116
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
Scanner test, 167
700 Series, CK31, CV60, 96
Scanner type, 115
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Screen columns, 216, 313
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Screen Design Aid, 258
Screen lock, 128
Screen mode, 153 center cursor, 153
CONFIG.DAT option, 214 corner mode, 153 define origin, 154 lazy mode, 154 locked mode, 154 page mode, 153
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Screen rows, 216, 313
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Index
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
415
Index
Screen size, 146, 155, 216
11XX, 152
17XX, 151
2415, 146
2425, 146
2435A disabled icons, 146 enabled icons, 147
2455, 147
2475, 148
248X, 148
5020, 150
5055, 150
59XX, 151
6400, 149
700 series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 152
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
CONFIG.DAT option, 214 extended command, 313 remote display, 136
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Script files. See Auto-login
ScrLk key, 46
Scroll setting
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Scroll window, 155, 156
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 156
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
SDA, 258
Secure Digital storage card, 187
Security ID, 142, 212
Select font
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 138
CONFIG.DAT option, 211
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 228
Selector light pen, 287, 288
Self-check field, 287, 288, 289
Send command, 183
Send XON, 131
Sending, display annunciators
5055, 92
59XX, 92
6400, 92
Serial ports, downloading files, 185
Serial scanning, configuring options, 16
Server IP
CONFIG.DAT option, 198
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 219
Session control request, 262, 264
Session menu, 174 copy setup, 174 session name, 174 set hot key, 174 switch, 174
Session name
CONFIG.DAT option, 216
416
session menu, 174
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231
Set Buffer Address order, 284
Set hot key
CONFIG.DAT option, 216 session menu, 174
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231
Set Parameters (#H) extended command, 313
Set Relay (#R) extended command, 331
Set-up parms barcode parms (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X,
5020) code 39 encoded, 114 concatenate, 114
RS232 stream, 114 scan all flds, 114 stream scan, 114 barcode parms (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700
Series) scan options, 115 scanner type, 115
COM select, 145 display options
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020,
6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 137 menu password, 143 print device, 144 radio comm, 141
RTC/WTP, 107, 109
TCP/IP settings, 111
WTP settings, 107, 109 scan options additional bar codes, 119 bc type char, 116 concatenate, 116 enable bar codes, 118 length, 120 mod 10 check, 116 parmsbysession, 117 redundancy, 115 scan all flds, 116 scan postchar, 117 scan prechar, 117 scan timeout, 116 stream scan, 116 use wedge mode, 117
Set-up Parms menu
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 100
5020, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 103
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 102
CONFIG.DAT option, 217
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231
Setting up the network, 2
Setting up the terminal, 2
Setup key, 46
SF order, 285
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Shift keys, 90
11XX, 59
17XX, 54
2415, 18
2425, 22
2435A, 26
2455, 31
2475, 34
248X, 34
5055, 46
59XX, 50
6400, 37
700 series, 67
CK30, 72, 77
CV60, 81
Shift Lock key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14
Shift mode, alphabetic character, display annunciators
11XX, 93
17XX, 93
5055, 93
59XX, 93
6400, 93
Shift mode, left, display annunciators
11XX, 93
17XX, 93
5055, 93
59XX, 93
6400, 93
Shift mode, right, display annunciators
11XX, 93
17XX, 93
5055, 93
59XX, 93
6400, 93
Signal command, 276, 295
Signal keys
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14
SEC (secondary version). See Radio test (802.11)
Service Set ID (SSID). See Radio test (802.11)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR). See Radio test (802.11)
Signed numeric field, 286, 289, 296
SIP toggle
700 Series, 97
CONFIG.DAT option, 211
CV60, 97
Skip FldExit
CONFIG.DAT option, 210
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 228
Skip FldExit (field exit), 5250 options, 124
SLP, 287, 288
SNA, 107
CONFIG.DAT option, 198
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 219
Software Input Panels
700 series, 63 changing colors, 63
CV60, 81 changing colors, 81 changing size, 81
SOH order, 292
Space bar key
700 series, 67 key remapping code, 236
Spacing parameters
2415 terminal, 336
2425 terminal, 336
2435A terminal, 340
2455 terminal, 347
2475 terminal, 349
248X terminal, 349
Spanish character set, 247
Spanish IBM character set, 248
Special characters encoded sequences, 362, 362 overstruck asterisk, 289
Index
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
417
Index
2455, 32
2475, 35
248X, 35
5055, 48
59XX, 52
6400, 39
CV60, 85 signal
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 special control
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
Special control keys
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2435A, 29
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 description, 14
Special function keys, 12
AID-generating
11XX, 61
17XX, 56
2415, 19
2425, 23
418
6400, 40
700 series, 69
CK30, 75
CK31, 80
CV60, 86 special host
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69
CV60, 86
Special host keys
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69
CV60, 86 description, 14
SS message state asynchronous prefixes, 295
Clear Format Table command, 271
Clear Unit command, 272
Read Immediate command, 260
Read Screen command, 267
Restore Screen command, 273
Roll command, 274
Save Immediate command, 268
Write Error Code command, 276
Write to Display command, 278
SST diag mode, 212
SST protocol, 212
Standard, font quality, CK30, CK31, 140
Standard 2 of 5, 372
Standard keys
5020, 43
700 series, 65
Start character, 301, 310
START decode
CONFIG.DAT option, 207
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 225
Start of Field order, 285
Start of Header order, 292
Starting the TE application, 3
Status command, 5
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Index
Status line, 5, 15
Straight 2 of 5, 327
CONFIG.DAT option, 201
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
Stream Scan, 313
CONFIG.DAT option, 200
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Stream scan, 114, 116
Swap fore/back, display colors, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,
139
Swedish character set, 247
Swedish IBM character set, 248
Switch, session menu, 174
Symbologies, 365
CONFIG.DAT option, 200
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
Symbols, key remapping codes, 236
“Syntax error” message, 196
Synthesized UHF radio, 6400, 5055, 111
Sys Req key
11XX, 62
17XX, 57
2415, 20
2425, 24
2455, 33
2475, 36
248X, 36
5020, 43
5055, 49
59XX, 53
6400, 40
700 series, 69 bar code label, 360
CV60, 86 description, 14
System 0 UPCE
CONFIG.DAT option, 205
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 224
System 1 UPCE
CONFIG.DAT option, 205
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 224
System codes, 296
System messages, 15, 296
CONFIG.DAT, 196
System request state
Clear Format Table command, 271
Clear Unit command, 272
Read Immediate command, 260
Read Screen command, 267
Restore Screen command, 273
Roll command, 274
Save command, 268 system messages, 296
Write Error Code command, 276
Write to Display command, 278
T
Tab key bar code labels, 355
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide special function key, 700 series, 67
Tab keys
11XX, 60
17XX, 55
2415, 18
2425, 22
2435A, 27
2455, 31
2475, 34
248X, 34
5020, 43
5055, 47
59XX, 51
6400, 38
CK30, 73
CK31, 78
CV60, 84 encoded sequences, 361
Tab size, 155
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Tahoma, select font, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 138
TCP/IP Direct Connect, 2, 113
TCP/IP settings, 111
TD order, 294
TD2400 Communications Dock, xxiv
TE application, opening, 3
TE configuration menus bar code label, 99 configuring options, 98
5055, 178
6400, 177 trakker antares, 177 key remapping code, 239 navigating through, 90 bar code label, 361 opening, 98 restarting, 175
Telnet, 107
3270 options, 126
5250 options, 123
CONFIG.DAT option, 198, 210
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 219, 228 vt/ansi options, 130
Temperature, display annunciators, 17XX, 93
Term (terminal) setup, 131
Terminal emulations, 178 updating 50DS1000, 178
Terminal Font Set table, 383
Terminal ID, VT/ANSI options, 133
Terminal IP address annunciator
700 Series, 97
CV60, 97
Terminal mode, 132
Terminal type
CONFIG.DAT option, 198
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Terminating keys, 363
Test Request, 6
419
Index
Tests, 164
802.11 radio, 6400, 5055, 164 display, 166 keyboard, 167
700 Series, CK31, CV60, 96 memory view, 6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX, 168 numbers, 169 packet driver
6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 168 histogram, 169 packet stats (statistics), 168 peripherals, 164 radio test, 6400, 5055, 164
RS-232, 166 scanner, 167
700 Series, CK31, CV60, 96 timed numbers, 169
Thai double-byte characters
700 series, 192
CK30, 193
Timed numbers test, 169
Tone (#T) extended command, 317
Tool Kit, INTERLNK and INTERSVR, 253
Toolbar options, 157
Top-row function keys, 5020, 44
Trailing characters, 124
Transmit and Receive (#F) extended command, 300
Transmit BS mode, 130
Transmit Only (#P) extended command, 306
Transmit_rate values (Lucent radios), 164
Transmitting data, display annunciators
11XX, 92
17XX, 92
Transparency, 287, 288
Transparent Data order, 294
Troubleshooting, 164
TxRate. See Radio test (802.11)
Type, remote display, CONFIG.DAT option, 211
Type-ahead
CONFIG.DAT option, 216
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231
U
UCC F1 Value
CONFIG.DAT option, 209
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
UCC/EAN
CONFIG.DAT option, 208
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 227
UDP Plus, 2, 7, 105 radio comm, 141
Unbind request, 262, 264
Underline
6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 137
Underline blink
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 6400,
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 135
700 Series, CK30, CV60, 137
Unit Manager, downloading files, 185
420
Unit number
CONFIG.DAT option, 198
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Universal Product Code. See UPC
“Unknown type” message, 196
Unsupported commands, 5
Up and Down arrow keys, 91
UPC, 323, 367
CONFIG.DAT option, 201
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 221
Updating 50DS1000, 178
Upline protocol, 107
Use Color
5250 options, 125
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 228
Use Wedge Mode, 117
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
User Auth, 141, 212
UserKey locked, 129
V
“Value out of range” message, 196
Version info, 169
Versions building customized, 255
CONFIG.DAT options, 217 of program name, 7
Return Version extended command, 316
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 231 using CHECKCFG to display, 253 using FLSHCONV to display, 254
Viewport. See Window/viewport
Volume, beeper setup, 162
VT cursor mode, 132
VT/ANSI options, 123, 127 allow linemode, 133 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 132 answerback, 128 application keypad mode, 131
VT cursor mode, 132 auto entr scan, 127 auto tab scan, 128 auto wrap, 133 block (line edit mode), 130 char (character mode), 130
CR to CRLF (carriage return to carriage return/line feed), 127 cursor, VT cursor mode, 132
DEL to BS (delete to backspace), 127 discretebells, 129 do gold key, 133 do utf-8, 133 keypad mode, 131 local echo, 128 lock mode, 130 menu options, 121 native, 134 numeric, keypad mode, 131
PC char set, 132
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
RS232 baud rate, 129
RS232 data bits, 129
RS232 flow, 129
RS232 parity, 129
RS232 setup, 129
RS232 stop bits, 129 screen lock, 128 send XON, 131 telnet, 130 term (terminal setup), 131 terminal ID, 133 terminal mode, 132 transmit BS, 130 userkey locked, 129
VT cursor mode, 132
VT220 mode, 130
VT220, 132
VT220 mode, 130
VT320, 132
W
WaitFor command, 182
Wand Emulate scanner
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Wand scanner
CONFIG.DAT option, 199
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 220
Window/viewport, 239, 354
Write Error Code command, 276
Write Structured Field command, 269
Write to Display command, 278
WTD command, 278
WTP, 7
WTP settings, 107, 109
X
XOFF, 302
XON, flow control, 302
XOrigin
CONFIG.DAT option, 214
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Y
YOrigin
CONFIG.DAT option, 215
TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 230
Index
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
421
Index
Files Index
Numbers
1700BIOS.EXE, 255
50BDXXXX.EXE, 252
50DS1000, 178
5250.INI, 233
5250.XLT, 240, 248, 249, 250
A
ASCEBD.TBL, 243
ASEBTBLD.EXE, 243
AUTOEXEC.BAT, 178 updating 50DS1000, 178
AUTOLOG.SCR, 182, 184, 185, 187
2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 185
59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 186
6400, 5055, 186
B
BIG700.ARM.CAB, 192
BIG730.ARM.CAB, 192
BIGCK30.ARM.CAB, 193
C
CFGLIT.DAT, 89, 187, 196, 219, 232, 254, 255
CFGLIT.TXT, 232
CHECKCFG.EXE, 194, 196, 253
CONFIG.DAT, 89, 100, 102, 103, 106, 142, 176, 181,
194, 196, 251, 252, 254 migrating to TE_SETTINGS.INI, 217
CONFIG.OLD, 89, 181, 194
CONFIG.SYS, 252, 253 updating 50DS1000, 178
D
DIOPEN1.CAB, 192
F
FLSHCONV.EXE, 186, 254
FWP110H0, 7
FWP111H0, 7
FWP114H0, 7
FWP116H0, 7
FWP118H0, 7
FWP170H0, 7
FWP170H0.EXE, 255
FWP170H0.HEX, 255
FWP170H3, 7
FWP171H0, 7
FWP171H3, 7
FWP174H0, 7
FWP174H3, 7
FWP176H0, 7
FWP176H3, 7
FWP178H0, 7
FWP178H3, 7
FWP240H0, 7
FWP502H0, 7
FWP591H1, 7
422
FWP592H0, 7
FWP594H0, 7
FWP596H0, 7
FWP598H0, 7
FWP640H0, 7
FWP640H4, 7
FWP64TH0, 7
FWP64TH4, 7
FWP650H0, 7, 178
FWP65TH0, 7
FWP700H0, 7
FWPCK3H0, 7
FWPCV6H0, 7
G
GB700.ARM.CAB, 192
GB730.ARM.CAB, 192
GBCK30.ARM.CAB, 193
I
INTERLNK.EXE, 252, 253
INTERSVR.EXE, 253
ITCCOLOR.DAT, 241
J
JP700.ARM.CAB, 192
JP730.ARM.CAB, 192
JPCK30.ARM.CAB, 193
K
KERNEL.EXE, 255
KRCK30.ARM.CAB, 193
L
LOADER.EXE, 185, 251
M
MAGCARD.CAB, 334
MAGCARD.DLL, 334
MAKELIT.EXE, 232
N
NET.CFG, 109, 164
NEW.HEX, 187
NORAND.FNT, 255
P
PROGDUX.EXE, 187, 256
R
REMAP.CFG, 187, 234
T
T24XCOPY.EXE, 185
TE_SETTINGS.INI, 89, 103, 106, 143, 181, 187, 194 migrating from CONFIG.DAT, 217
THAI700.ARM.CAB, 192
THAI730.ARM.CAB, 192
THAICK30.ARM.CAB, 193
TOOLS.EXE, 186, 194
W
WTPPKT.EXE, 109
TE 2000
™ 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide
Corporate Headquarters
6001 36th Avenue West
Everett, Washington 98203
U.S.A.
tel 425.348.2600
fax 425.355.9551
www.intermec.com
TE 2000t 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer's Guide - March 2005
*977-055-004J*
P/N 977-055-004 REV J
Download
Link público atualizado
O link público para seu chat foi atualizado. Você pode visualizar e gerenciar seus links de chat após o registro aqui.
Link público do documento
Anúncio